The Community Planning Handbook

CPH pages i-21 10/7/06 12:41 Page i

Advance praise for “This publication is a major step towards a better The understanding of the processes whereby people can learn from each other in helping to determine better planning for Community our future built environments. It brings together experience Planning that exists in Britain with international experience from Handbook across the globe. The layout brings a new standard of design excellence to the art of communication in this ﬁeld. I highly recommend it as a practical tool for communities and their activists. It has a truly international perspective.” Michael Parkes, Expert on Urban Policy to the European Commission, Directorate General Development, Brussels, Belgium

“The clear and concise copy as well as the very appealing graphic formatting of the material make this an excellent handbook which will be useful to so many different users in so many ways.” Tony Costello, Professor of Architecture, Ball State University, USA

“Community planning is set to become part of the mainstream planning process. Whether you are a developer, a planning professional or an active member of your community, The Community Planning Handbook will be an invaluable guide in helping you choose and plan the participatory events and structures to meet your needs.” John Thompson, architect and community planner

“I like it and I like the format. It should be a useful tool in the toolbox.” Simon Croxton, International Institute for Environment and Development

“An excellent book and well worth while.” Rod Hackney, community architect

“Comprehensive and useful.” Sonia Khan, Freeform Arts Trust

“A really useful document – I like the approach, layout and methodology.” Babar Mumtaz, Development Planning Unit, London CPH pages i-21 10/7/06 12:41 Page ii

"A graphically pleasing publication in simple language that will get across effectively to communities, empowering them in the new ‘dharma’ – demand-driven planning and decision making through a participatory process." Vinay D. Lall, Director, Society for Development Studies, New Delhi, India

“An excellent book that will have a host of valuable applications – with sufﬁcient detail for practitioners, researchers, planners and policy makers. It is an important and timely contribution.” Jules Pretty, Director, Centre for Environment and Society, University of Essex

“A very impressive piece of work. The Community Planning Handbook should be very useful to all sorts of people working in this area. It's informative, clear and straightforward.” John Twigg, University College London

“Great layout, and helpful to lots of people and groups.” Jack Sidener, Professor of Architecture, Chinese University of Hong Kong

“Very useful indeed.” Patrick Wakely, Professor of Urban Development, University College London

“Absolutely brilliant.” Margaret Wilkinson, Community Development Fieldworker, Neighbourhood Initiatives Foundation

“Very useful in giving me the conﬁdence to try something new – I recommend it highly.” Jez Hall, Manchester Community Technical Aid Centre

“It's excellent.” Michael Hebbert, Professor of Town Planning, University of Manchester CPH pages i-21 10/7/06 12:41 Page iii

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK

“If you want to know how the shoe ﬁts, ask the person who is wearing it, not the one who made it.” CPH pages i-21 10/7/06 12:41 Page iv CPH pages i-21 10/7/06 12:41 Page v

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK

How people can shape their cities, towns and villages in any part of the world

Compiled and edited by Nick Wates

Published in association with The Urban Design Group The Prince’s Foundation South Bank University, London

With the generous support of Department of the Environment, Transport and the Regions, England Department for International Development, UK European Commission Humanitarian Ofﬁce CPH pages i-21 10/7/06 12:41 Page vi

The Community Planning Handbook For a full list of Earthscan publications please How people can shape their cities, towns and contact: villages in any part of the world. Earthscan Compiler and Editor: Nick Wates. 8-12 Camden High Street Design and production: Jeremy Brook, London NW1 0JH, UK Graphic Ideas, Hastings. Tel: +44 (0)20 7387 8558 Cover design: Declan Buckley. Fax: +44 (0)20 7387 8998 Advisory Group: Roger Bellers, John Billingham, Email: [email protected] Roger Evans, Nick Hall, Birgit Laue, Arnold Linden, www.earthscan.co.uk Jenneth Parker, David Lunts, Michael Mutter, Earthscan publishes in association with the Renate Ruether-Greaves, Jon Rowland, International Institute for Environment and Ros Tennyson, John Thompson, John F C Turner. Development. First published in the UK in 2000 by Earthscan Reprinted 2006 See www.communityplanning.net for updates Copyright © Nick Wates, 2000. All rights reserved. A catalogue record for this book is available from the British Library. ISBN-13: 978-1-85383-654-1 ISBN-10: 1-85383-654-0 Published in association with: The Urban Design Group; The Prince’s Foundation; South Bank University, London. With the generous support of: Department of the Environment, Transport and the Regions, England; Department for International Development, UK; European Commission Humanitarian Ofﬁce. Printed and bound in Malta by Gutenberg Press. Individual pages may be freely copied for use for community planning activity providing the source is visible on all copies. This document is an output from a project partially funded by the UK Department for Cover photographs: International Development (DFID) for the beneﬁt Mapping in Yellamanchilli, Adrapradesh, India, 1996 of developing countries. The views expressed are Design workshop in Berlin, Germany, 1996 not necessarily those of the DFID or any of the Design fest in Hong Kong, 1998 other supporting organisations. Architecture centre in London, UK, 1999 This book is printed on elemental chlorine free paper. Frontispiece: Freestanding quotations are from interviews by Design workshops at a planning weekend in the editor unless otherwise indicated. Liverpool, UK, 1997

COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages i-21 10/7/06 12:41 Page vii

“I know of no safe depository of the ultimate “Community designers draw out of people powers of society, but the people themselves; their heroic insights and ﬁnd ways to and if we think them not enlightened enough implement them.” to exercise their control with a wholesome discretion, the remedy is not take it from Richard Meier, Architect, them, but to inform their discretion.” Community Design Primer, 1990

Thomas Jefferson, architect and “When people feel they ‘belong’ to a President of the United States, 1820 neighbourhood which is theirs through their Letter to William Charles Jarvis own efforts, then it will become a place which is worth struggling to retain and “When dwellers control the major decisions develop. People will safeguard what they and are free to make their own contribution have helped to create.” to the design, construction or management of their housing, both the process and the Lord Scarman and Tony Gibson, environment produced stimulate individual The Guardian, 11 December 1991 and social well-being.” “Environmental issues are best handled with John F C Turner, Freedom to Build, 1972 the participation of all concerned citizens, at the relevant level. At the national level, each “Public participation should be an individual shall have appropriate access to indispensable element in human information... and the opportunity to settlements, especially in planning strategies participate in decision making processes. and in their formulation, implementation States shall facilitate and encourage public and management; it should inﬂuence all awareness and participation by making levels of government in the decision-making information widely available.” process to further the political and economic growth of human settlements.” United Nations Rio Declaration, Principle 10, 1992 Delegate communiqué, United Nations Habitat 1 conference, Vancouver, 1976 “Community planning is a vehicle through which we can hope to re-engage people “The professionals need to consult the users with their community and with society.” of their buildings more closely. The inhabitants have the local knowledge: they must not be Charmian Marshall, Campaign Director, despised. People are not there to be planned Urban Villages Forum, 1993 for; they are to be worked with… There must be one golden rule – we all need to be “Community involvement has been shown involved together – planning and architecture to make a positive contribution to planning are much too important to be left to the and development processes. At its best, professionals.” community involvement can enable: processes to be speeded up; resources to be HRH The Prince of Wales, used more effectively; product quality and AVision of Britain, 1989 CPH pages i-21 10/7/06 12:41 Page viii

feelings of local ownership to improve; Tony Blair, Prime Minister, Bringing added value to emerge; confidence and Britain Together; a national strategy for skills to increase – for all; conflicts to be Neighbourhood Renewal, 1998 more readily resolved.” “Community planning gave us the Department of the Environment England, opportunity to work alongside the powers Summary of planning research that be, have our say and feel, for the first programme, 1994 time, that we were really being listened to. Residents now feel much more connected “Design participation is the best education a with decision-making and things are really community can get. The people here have beginning to improve around here.” been involved down to the last nail and screw. People round here know more about Sydoney Massop, Resident, South Acton architecture than anywhere else in the Estate, Ealing, UK, 1999 country! It’s helped us to get what we want and to get it right.” “Community participation lies right at the heart of sustainable development. Sustainable Tony McGann, Chair, Eldonian Community- communities will take different forms from based Housing Association, Liverpool, place to place, but one thing that none of Building homes people want, 1994 them will be able to do without is a broad and deep level of participation.” “Putting cities back on the political agenda is now fundamental. What’s needed is Action Towards Local Sustainability, greater emphasis on citizens’ participation in website introduction, 1999 city design and planning. We must put communal objectives centre-stage.”

Sir Richard Rogers, Architect, Reith Lecture, 1995

“This is a good time to be alive as a development professional. For we seem to be in the middle of a quiet but hugely exciting revolution in learning and action.”

Robert Chambers, Whose Reality counts?, 1997

“Experience shows that success depends on communities themselves having the power and taking the responsibility to make things better. A new approach is long overdue. It has to be comprehensive, long-term and founded on what works.” CPH pages i-21 10/7/06 12:41 Page 1

Contents

Introduction 2 Why get involved? 4 Getting started 6 Book format 8

General principles A–Z 11 Methods A–Z 23 Scenarios A–Z 131 Appendices 165 Useful formats 166 Useful checklists 172 Glossary A–Z 181 Publications and ﬁlm A–Z 203 Contacts A–Z 209

Credits 218 Photocredits 220 Feedback 221 Index 225 CPH pages i-21 10/7/06 12:41 Page 2

Introduction All over the world there is increasing demand from all sides for more local involvement in the planning and management of the environment.

It is widely recognised that this is the only way that people will get the surroundings they want. And it is now seen as the best way of ensuring that communities become safer, stronger, wealthier and more sustainable.

But how should it be done? How can local people – wherever they live – best involve themselves in the complexities of architecture, planning and urban design? How can professionals best build on local knowledge and resources?

Over the past few decades, a wide range of methods has been pioneered in different countries. They include new ways of people interacting, new types of event, new types of organisation, new services and new support frameworks.

This handbook provides an overview of these new methods of community planning for the first time in one volume. It is written for everyone concerned with the built environment. Jargon is avoided and material is presented in a universally applicable, how-to-do-it style. Whether you are a resident wanting to improve the place where you live, a policy maker interested in improving general practice, or a development professional working on a specific project, you should quickly be able to find what you need.

The methods described here can each be effective in their own right. But it is when they are

2 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages i-21 10/7/06 12:41 Page 3

INTRODUCTION

combined together creatively that community planning becomes a truly powerful force for positive and sustainable change. Just a few of the many possibilities are featured in the scenarios section towards the end of the book.

In years to come it is possible to imagine that every human settlement will have its own architecture centre and neighbourhood planning ofﬁces; that all development professionals will be equipped to organise ideas competitions and planning weekends; that everyone will have access to planning aid and feasibility funds; that all architecture schools will have urban design studios helping surrounding communities; and that everyone will be familiar with design workshops, mapping, participatory editing, interactive displays and other methods described in this book.

When that happens, there will be more chance of being able to create and maintain built environments that satisfy both individual and community needs, and that are enjoyable to live and work in.

In the meantime the art of community planning is evolving rapidly. Methods continue to be reﬁned and new ones invented. There is a growing network of experienced practitioners. This handbook will hopefully help with the evolution of community planning by allowing people to beneﬁt from the experience gained so far and by facilitating international exchange of good practice.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 3 CPH pages i-21 10/7/06 12:41 Page 4

Why get involved?

When people are involved in shaping their local surroundings, the beneﬁts can include:

1 Additional resources Governments rarely have sufﬁcient means to solve all the problems in an area. Local people can bring additional resources which are often essential if their needs are to be met and dreams fulﬁlled.

2 Better decisions Local people are invariably the best source of knowledge and wisdom about their surroundings. Better decision-making results if this is harnessed.

3 Building community The process of working together and achieving things together creates a sense of community.

4 Compliance with legislation Community involvement is often, and increasingly, a statutory requirement.

5 Democratic credibility Community involvement in planning accords with people’s right to participate in decisions that affect their lives. It is an important part of the trend towards democratisation of all aspects of society. 6 Easier fundraising Many grant-making organisations prefer, or even require, community involvement to have occurred before handing out ﬁnancial assistance.

7 Empowerment Involvement builds local people’s conﬁdence, capabilities, skills and ability to co-operate. This enables them to tackle other challenges, both individually and collectively.

4 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages i-21 10/7/06 12:41 Page 5

WHY GET INVOLVED

8 More appropriate results Design solutions are more likely to be in tune with what is needed and wanted. Involvement allows proposals to be tested and reﬁned before adoption, resulting in better use of resources.

9 Professional education Working closely with local people helps professionals gain a greater insight into the communities they seek to serve. So they work more effectively and produce better results.

10 Responsive environment The environment can more easily be constantly tuned and reﬁned to cater for people’s changing requirements.

11 Satisfying public demand People want to be involved in shaping their environment and mostly seem to enjoy it.

12 Speedier development People gain a better understanding of the options realistically available and are likely to start thinking positively rather than negatively. Time-wasting conﬂicts can often be avoided.

13 Sustainability People feel more attached to an environment they have helped create. They will therefore manage and maintain it better, reducing the likelihood of vandalism, neglect and subsequent need for costly replacement.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 5 CPH pages i-21 10/7/06 12:41 Page 6

Getting started

How do you get started with community planning? How do you decide which methods to use, and when? How do you design an overall strategy geared to your own circumstances?

The approach adopted will be different for every community. There is rarely a quick ﬁx or blueprint. Each place needs to carefully devise its own community planning strategy to suit local conditions and needs.

But there are principles, methods and scenarios which appear to be universally relevant, and can be drawn on for inspiration and guidance. These are set out in this handbook. They are based on pioneering projects and experience from many countries over the past few decades.

It is unlikely that you will be able to draw up a complete strategy at the outset. Flexibility is important, in any case, to be able to respond to new circumstances and opportunities. But planning a provisional overall strategy is a useful discipline so that everyone understands the context in which the chosen methods are being used and the purpose of each stage.

First, deﬁne the goal or purpose. Then devise a strategy to achieve it. Try doing some or all of the following:

• Look through the General principles A–Z (pp11–21) to understand the basic philosophy of community planning;

• Skim through the Methods A–Z (pp23–129) to get a feel for the range of options available;

6 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages i-21 10/7/06 12:41 Page 7

GETTING STARTED

• Scan the Scenarios A–Z (pp131–163) to see if there are any which relate to your own context or provide inspiration;

• Sketch out a scenario for your own situation (similar to those in the Scenarios A–Z);

• Complete your own strategy planner (p166), action planning event planner (p168) or progress monitor (p170);

• Think through who might be involved (see checklist, p174);

• Produce an itemised budget and allocate responsibilities;

• Organise a Process Planning Session similar to that in the Methods A–Z (p106).

Once you have done this you should be in a position to assess the options available and resources required. You may be working to a fixed budget with known contributors, in which case your options are limited. More likely, securing financial and other support will be part of the process. Raising funding may not be easy, but organisations of all kinds are increasingly prepared to contribute as they begin to see how community planning activity can benefit the communities they are located in, or are responsible for. And there is a great deal that can be achieved by obtaining ‘support in kind’; help and assistance in non- financial terms.

And so the adventure begins…

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 7 CPH pages i-21 10/7/06 12:41 Page 8

Purpose The method’s Book format main use and Method title strengths

On the next few pages some General principles are set out. C METHODS These are mostly universal and apply to any community Community S planning activity. As with most planning forum material in the book they are

listed in alphabetical order for HELP PLAN THE FUTURE OF MONROE Community planning forums are open, easy reference. THE MONROE SOCIETY multipurpose events lasting several hours. INVITES YOU TO A The three-stage format is designed to secure The Methods A–Z covers a COMMUNITY PLANNING FORUM information, generate ideas and create selection of methods for ON MONROE’S OPEN SPACES interaction between interest groups with a AT BOLLING HOUSE, 211 EAST STREET helping people get involved in 5.00PM THURSDAY 8 AUGUST 1996 minimum of advance planning. physical planning and design. Each is summarised on a ᔢ Community planning forums can be organised at double-page spread in enough any time but are particularly useful at an early stage in a participation or development process. detail for you to understand ALL WELCOME GIVE US YOUR IDEAS FOR IMPROVING how it works and decide THIS NEIGHBOURHOOD ᔢ Forums can be organised by any interested party whether to pursue it further. Sample advertising leaflet. and can be organised at short notice. Key components: Slogan Information provided is shown summarising overall purpose; on the right. A list of methods venue; time; date; statement of ᔢ The format combines interactive displays, an open immediate objectives and covered is on page 23. perhaps some background forum, workshop groups and informal networking. information; map of area with The Scenarios A–Z shows how venue marked; name of Key ingredients are a leaflet advertising the event, a organisers. ᔢ a number of methods can be means of distributing it, a venue and a facilitator. combined in an overall strategy. A range of scenarios cover ✎ Keep the atmosphere informal to get best results. Good some common development refreshments worthwhile. situations. The format used is ✎ “It was a very effective formula. Particularly useful events for students engaged in urban design shown top right. A list of It allowed us, as a group, to projects because they do not necessarily need to relate to any scenarios covered is on page 131. find out what the inhabitants ‘real’ development timetable or be organised by local people. expected of their place for the They can be organised by anyone at any time (though they will future. And it didn’t impose normally work better if locals assist). In the appendices, the too much on people’s time. In ✎ Glossary A–Z explains common fact I think everyone had a very Getting students to organise the format themselves can be highly enjoyable evening.” educational, particularly if linked with a process planning session ☞ terms. It includes limited Laura Dotson ( Process planning session). Providing a framework may be Interior designer helpful (ie arranging publicity and venue in advance). information on methods not Student organiser of a covered in the Methods A–Z community planning forum at $ Main costs: Venue hire; advertising leaflet production. and provides cross-references. Richmond, Virginia, USA, 1996. 40 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK Sources of further information are in the Publications and film A–Z and Contacts A–Z. Useful formats and Useful Inspiration and $ Costs Tips checklists contain documents insight Comment on Helpful which may save you time. Quotes from resources needed hints participants or Finally, the Feedback section interesting facts makes it easy for you to tell us Sample documents about how to make future Fliers, posters, editions of this book better. newspaper cuttings

8 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages i-21 10/7/06 12:41 Page 9

Sample formats Layouts Timescale Activities Timetables, procedures, Room layouts, Rough Sequence Features forms, other detailed physical timing of ᔢ and brief The method’s main information arrangements activities description characteristics

SCENARIOS I

Inner city Rejuvenation of a deprived inner city area dominated by M METHODS C regeneration blocks of local authority flats and lacking amenities. months 0 Tenant management organisation formed entrance 3 Authority hands over management of flats to 6 tenants. Tenants appoint community architect. 9 Sample Community 12 ់ Neighbourhood planning office opened ☞ p84 15 For tenant committees and consultants. Planning Forum Format 18 displays displays 21 ់ 24 Housing estate improvement programme Scheme developed using Planning for Real 1 Interactive displays 27 ☞ p100 and choice catalogues ☞ p36. As people arrive they are guided towards a 30 33 ់ 36 New housing H variety of interactive displays where they Designed and built by a local housing association 39 after a planning day ☞ p98. are encouraged to make comments using 42 45 ់ Post-its, marker pens or stickers 48 Open space projects Devised by special projects committee using workshop workshop 51 (☞ Interactive display). General mingling design games ☞ p48. tables tables 54 and discussion. Refreshments. (45 mins) 57 ់ 60 Community arts and young people’s projects ☞ 63 Using arts workshops p30 and projects in schools. 2 Open forum 66 69 ់ People are seated in a horseshoe shape, Action planning event ☞ p24 72 To take stock and produce a strategy for future 75 action. With outsider and local design assistance perhaps with model, plan or drawing on a team members. Lasting several days. 78 table in the centre. Introductions by 81 ់ seating around 84 Review session ☞p110. organisers. Feed back on interactive model or plan 87 90 ់ displays by pre-warned rapporteurs. Open 93 Masterplan Drawn up by development partnership and local debate chaired by organiser. (45 mins) 96 development trust ☞ p52. Ideal layout in a large hall 99 3Workshop groups THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 145 People are divided into groups and work around tables on various topics/areas, Scenario layout either pre-selected or agreed during the open forum. (45 mins) Possible strategy for a 4 Networking particular development Informal mingling and discussion. Refreshments. (45 mins) situation 5 Feedback (optional) Reports from workshop groups to plenary. (Or separate presentation session later.) Total running time: 3 hours minimum Ideal numbers 30 – 150 Images Open forum Debate in a horseshoe arrangement following a Explanatory photos warm-up interactive display and before dividing from case studies. up into workshop groups. “ Locations are identified Key roles at a planning forum on page 220 ᔤ Chairperson for open forum ᔤ Facilitator/stage manager ᔤ Hosts as people arrive FURTHER INFORMATION ᔤ Photographer ☞ Methods: Elevation montage. Interactive display. Table scheme display. Task force. ᔤ Reporters for each interactive display Scenarios: Community centre. Village ᔤ Workshop and forum recorders revival. Where to find more details ᔤ Workshop facilitators Richard John Ϡ  Method or scenario pages with related information THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 41 ” Publication or film title. Refer to pages 203–208 Checklists for further details Roles, equipment lists, b Contact organisation. things to remember Refer to pages 209–217 for further details Ϡ Contributors to this page. Special thanks

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 9 CPH pages i-21 10/7/06 12:41 Page 10

Project stages

Initiate ៉ Plan ៉ Implement ៉ Maintain ៉

Self Help Community Community Community Community Community initiates action plans alone implements maintains control alone alone alone

Partnership Authorities Authorities Authorities Authorities Shared working & community & community & community & community and decision- jointly initiate jointly plan jointly jointly making action and design implement maintain

Consultation Authorities Authorities Authorities Authorities Authorities ask initiate action plan after implement maintain with community for after consulting with community opinions consulting community community consultation community consultation

Information Authorities Authorities Authorities Authorities One way ﬂow initiate action plan and implement maintain alone of information design alone alone

Level of communityPublic involvement relations

Participation matrix A simple illustration of how different levels of participation are appropriate at different stages of a project. Most community planning operates in the shaded areas. Any party may initiate action but the crucial ingredient is joint planning and design, shown in the dark square. Implementation and maintenance will either be carried out jointly or by the authorities after consulting the community. (‘Ladder of Participation’ in the Glossary.)

10 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages i-21 10/7/06 12:41 Page 11

General principles A–Z

Whatever community planning approach you choose, there are general principles which apply to most situations. This section summarises some of the most important. Adopt and adapt as appropriate.

Accept different agendas 12 Now is the right time 17 Accept limitations 12 Personal initiative 17 Accept varied commitment 12 Plan your own process carefully 17 Agree rules and boundaries 12 Plan for the local context 17 Avoid jargon 13 Prepare properly 17 Be honest 13 Process as important as product 18 Be transparent 13 Professional enablers 18 Be visionary yet realistic 13 Quality not quantity 18 Build local capacity 13 Record and document 18 Communicate 14 Respect cultural context 18 Encourage collaboration 14 Respect local knowledge 19 Flexibility 14 Shared control 19 Focus on attitudes 14 Spend money 19 Follow up 14 Think on your feet 19 Go at the right pace 14 Train 20 Go for it 15 Trust in others’ honesty 20 Have fun 15 Use experts appropriately 20 Human scale 15 Use facilitators 20 Involve all those affected 15 Use local talent 20 Involve all sections of community 16 Use outsiders, but carefully 21 Learn from others 16 Visualise 21 Local ownership of the process 16 Walk before you run 21 Maintain momentum 16 Work on location 21 Mixture of methods 17

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 11 CPH pages i-21 10/7/06 12:41 Page 12

A PRINCIPLES

Accept different agendas People will want to be involved for a variety of reasons, for instance: academic enquiry, altruism, curiosity, fear of change, ﬁnancial gain, neighbourliness, professional duty, protection of interests, socialising. This need not be a problem but it helps to be aware of people’s different agendas.

Accept limitations No community planning activity can solve all the world’s problems. But that is not a reason for holding back. Limited practical improvements will almost always result, and community planning activity can often act as a catalyst for more fundamental change.

Accept varied commitment Far too much energy is wasted complaining that certain people do not participate when the opportunity is provided. All of us could spend our lives many times over working to improve the local environment. Everyone has their own priorities in life and these should be respected. If people do not participate it is likely to be because they are happy to let others get on with it, they are busy with things which are more important to them or the process has not been made sufﬁciently interesting.

Agree rules and boundaries There should be a common understanding by all main interest groups of the approach adopted. Particularly in communities where there is fear – for instance that others may be trying to gain territorial advantage – it is vital that the rules and boundaries are clearly understood and agreed. Be visionary yet realistic As the proverb says: ‘Where there is no vision, the people perish’.

12 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages i-21 10/7/06 12:41 Page 13

PRINCIPLES B

Avoid jargon Use plain language. Jargon prevents people from engaging and is usually a smokescreen to hide incompetence, ignorance or arrogance.

Be honest Be open and straightforward about the nature of any activity. People will generally participate more enthusiastically if they know that something can be achieved through their participation (eg if there is a budget for a capital project). But they may be quite prepared to participate ‘at risk’ providing they know the odds. If there is only a small chance of positive change as a result of people participating, say so. Avoid hidden agendas.

Be transparent The objectives and people’s roles should be clear and transparent at events. For instance, it may seem trivial but the importance of name badges to prevent events being the preserve of the ‘in-crowd’ can never be stressed enough. JOB VACANCY Be visionary yet realistic Project worker Nothing much is likely to be achieved without raising 4 months part-time expectations. Yet dwelling entirely on the utopian can be frustrating. Strike a balance between setting To coordinate community planning visionary utopian goals and being realistic about the event in June practical options available. Applications from local residents especially Build local capacity welcome Long-term community sustainability depends on Details from: PO Box 5 developing human and social capital. Take every Anytown 2246987 opportunity to develop local skills and capacity. Involve local people in surveying their own situation, running Build local capacity Employing residents to their own programmes and managing local assets. organise community planning activity is invariably worthwhile.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 13 CPH pages i-21 10/7/06 12:41 Page 14

C PRINCIPLES

Communicate Use all available media to let people know what you are doing and how they can get involved. Community newspapers or broadsheets in particular are invaluable.

Encourage collaboration Create partnerships wherever possible between the various interest groups involved and with potential contributors such as ﬁnancial institutions.

Flexibility Be prepared to modify processes as circumstances dictate. Avoid inﬂexible methods and strategies.

Focus on attitudes Behaviour and attitude are just as, if not more, important than methods. Encourage self-critical awareness, handing over control, personal responsibility and sharing.

Follow up Lack of follow-up is the most common failing, usually due to a failure to plan and budget for it. Make sure you set aside time and resources for documenting, publicising and acting on the results of any community planning initiative.

Go at the right pace Rushing can lead to problems. On the other hand, without deadlines things can drift. Using experienced external advisors may speed up the process but often at the expense of developing local capacity. Get the balance right.

Communicate Let people know what you are doing and how they can get involved.

14 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages i-21 10/7/06 12:41 Page 15

PRINCIPLES I

Go for it This is the phrase used most by people who have experienced community planning when asked what their advice would be to others. You are bound to have doubts, it is usually a leap in the dark. But you are unlikely to regret taking the plunge.

Have fun Getting involved in creating and managing the environment should not be a chore. It can be a great opportunity to meet people and have fun. The most interesting and sustainable environments have been produced where people have enjoyed creating them. Community planning requires humour. Use cartoons, jokes and games whenever possible.

Human scale Work in communities of a manageable scale. This is usually where people at least recognise each other. Where possible, break up larger areas into a series of smaller ones.

Involve all those affected Community planning works best if all parties are committed to it. Involve all the main interested parties as early as possible, preferably in the planning of the process. Activities in which key players (such as landowners or planners) sit on the sidelines are all too common and rarely achieve their objectives completely. Time spent winning over cynics before you start is well worthwhile. If there are people or groups who cannot be convinced at the outset, keep them informed and give them the option of joining in later on. Have fun Planning your environment can be enjoyable. Community planning in the Philippines (top) and in the UK (bottom).

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 15 CPH pages i-21 10/7/06 12:41 Page 16

I PRINCIPLES

Involve all sections of the community People of different ages, gender, backgrounds and cultures almost invariably have different perspectives. Ensure that a full spectrum of the community is involved. This is usually far more important than involving large numbers.

Learn from others There is no need to re-invent the wheel. One of the best sources of information is people who have done it before. Don’t think you know it all. No one does. Be open to new approaches. Get in touch with people from elsewhere who have relevant experience. Go and visit them and see their projects; seeing is believing. Do not be afraid of experienced ‘consultants’ but choose and brief them carefully.

Local ownership of the process The community planning process should be ‘owned’ by local people. Even though consultants or national organisations may be providing advice and taking responsibility for certain activities, the local community should take responsibility for the overall process.

Maintain momentum Involve all sections of the Regularly monitor progress to ensure that initiatives are community Non-literate women draw a built on and objectives achieved. Development systems diagram, Pakistan processes are invariably lengthy, the participation (top). Children present ideas for the future of their process needs to stay the course. If there has to be a community, UK (bottom). break, start again from where you left off, not from the beginning. Periodic review sessions can be very valuable to maintain momentum and community involvement.

16 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages i-21 10/7/06 12:41 Page 17

PRINCIPLES P

Mixture of methods Use a variety of involvement methods as different people will want to take part in different ways. For instance, some will be happy to write letters, others will prefer to make comments at an exhibition or take part in workshop sessions.

Now is the right time The best time to start involving people is at the beginning of any programme. The earlier the better. But if programmes have already begun, participation should be introduced as soon as possible. Start now.

Personal initiative Virtually all community planning initiatives have happened only because an individual has taken the initiative. Don’t wait for others. That individual could be you!

Plan your own process carefully Careful planning of the process is vital. Avoid rushing into any one approach. Look at alternatives. Design a process to suit the circumstances. This may well involve combining a range of methods or devising new ones.

Plan for the local context Learn from others Seeing is believing. Group of Develop unique strategies for each neighbourhood. farmers visit a farm where Understand local characteristics and vernacular innovation is taking place, Honduras (top). Group of traditions and use them as a starting point for residents visit a housing planning. Encourage regional and local diversity. scheme before designing their own new homes, UK (bottom). Prepare properly The most successful activities are invariably those on which sufﬁcient time and effort have been given to preliminary organisation and engaging those who may be interested.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 17 CPH pages i-21 10/7/06 12:41 Page 18

P PRINCIPLES

Process as important as product The way that things are done is often as important as the end result. But remember that the aim is implementation. Participation is important but is not an end in itself.

Professional enablers Professionals and administrators should see themselves as enablers, helping local people achieve their goals, rather than as providers of services and solutions.

Attendance: Quality not quantity Exhibition of plans There is no such thing as a perfect participation Monday 27 May 2000 process. The search for one is healthy only if this fact is accepted. Generally, the maximum participation by the Name Organisation Contact Comments (if any) details maximum number of people is worth aiming at. But any participation is better than none and the quality of participation is more important than the numbers involved. A well organised event for a small number of people can often be more fruitful than a less well organised event for larger numbers.

Record and document Record and document So easily forgotten. Make sure participation activities are properly recorded and documented so that it can be clearly seen who has been involved and how. Easily forgotten, such records can be invaluable at a later stage.

Respect cultural context Make sure that your approach is suitable for the cultural context in which you are working. Consider local attitudes to gender, informal livelihoods, social groupings, speaking out in public and so on.

18 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages i-21 10/7/06 12:41 Page 19

PRINCIPLES T

Respect local knowledge All people, whether literate or not, whether rich or poor, whether children, women or men, have a remarkable understanding of their surroundings and are capable of analysing and assessing their situation, often better than trained professionals. Respect local perceptions, choices and abilities and involve local people in setting goals and strategies.

Shared control The extent of public participation in any activity can vary from very little to a great deal. Different levels are appropriate at different stages of the planning process but shared control at the planning and design stage is the crucial ingredient (participation matrix, page 10).

Spend money Effective participation processes take time and energy. There are methods to suit a range of budgets and much can be achieved using only people’s time and Spend money energy. But over-tight budgets usually lead to cutting Demolition of perfectly sound buildings because people do corners and poor results. Remember that community not want them; an all too planning is an important activity, the success or failure frequent occurrence. The cost of failing to involve people of which may have dramatic implications for future properly in planning and generations as well as your own resources. The costs design can be astronomical. of building the wrong thing in the wrong place can be astronomical and make the cost of proper community planning pale into insigniﬁcance. Budget generously.

Think on your feet Once the basic principles and language of participatory planning are understood, experienced practitioners will ﬁnd it easy to improvise. Avoid feeling constrained by rules or guidance (such as this handbook)!

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 19 CPH pages i-21 10/7/06 12:41 Page 20

T PRINCIPLES

Train Training is invaluable at all levels. Encourage visits to other projects and attendance on courses. Build in training to all your activities.

Trust in others’ honesty Start from a position of trusting others and generally this will be reciprocated. Lack of trust is usually due to Visualise lack of information. Venn diagram of village institutions, Sri Lanka (above). Before and after of proposed Use experts appropriately changes to a public square, The best results emerge when local people work Czech Republic (below). closely and intensively with experts from all the necessary disciplines. Creating and managing the environment is very complicated and requires a variety of expertise and experience to do it well. Do not be afraid of expertise, embrace it. But avoid dependency on, or hijacking by, professionals. Keep control local. Use experts ‘little and often’ to allow local participants time to develop capability, even if it means they sometimes make mistakes.

Use facilitators Orchestrating group activities is a real skill. Without good facilitation the most articulate and powerful may dominate. Particularly if large numbers of people are involved, ensure that the person (or people) directing events has good facilitation skills. If not, hire someone who has.

Use local talent Make use of local skills and professionalism within the community before supplementing them with outside assistance. This will help develop capability within the community and help achieve long-term sustainability.

20 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages i-21 10/7/06 12:41 Page 21

PRINCIPLES W

Use outsiders, but carefully A central principle of community planning is that local people know best. But outsiders, if well briefed, can provide a fresh perspective which can be invigorating. Getting the right balance between locals and outsiders is important; avoid locals feeling swamped or intimidated by ‘foreigners’.

Visualise People can participate far more effectively if information is presented visually rather than in words, A great deal of poor development, and hostility to good development, is due to people not understanding what it will look like. Use graphics, maps, illustrations, cartoons, drawings, photomontages and models wherever possible. And make the process itself visible by using ﬂipcharts, Post- it notes, coloured dots and banners.

Walk before you run Developing a participatory culture takes time. Start by using simple participation methods and work up to using more complex ones as experience and conﬁdence grow.

Work on location Wherever possible, base community planning activities Work on location Village improvement physically in the area being planned. This makes it consultations, Kenya (top). much easier for everyone to bridge the gap from Community garden design concept to reality. workshop, UK (bottom).

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 21 CPH pages 22-43 10/7/06 12:46 Page 22 CPH pages 22-43 10/7/06 12:46 Page 23

Methods A–Z A selection of the most effective methods for helping people to get involved in physical planning and design.

Action planning event 24 Microplanning workshop 78 Activity week 26 Mobile unit 80 Architecture centre 28 Models 82 Art workshop 30 Neighbourhood planning office 84 Award scheme 32 Newspaper supplement 86 Briefing workshop 34 Open house event 88 Choice catalogue 36 Open space workshop 90 Community design centre 38 Participatory editing 92 Community planning forum 40 Photo survey 94 Community profiling 42 Planning aid scheme 96 Design assistance team 44 Planning day 98 Design fest 46 Planning for Real 100 Design game 48 Planning weekend 102 Design workshop 50 Prioritising 104 Development trust 52 Process planning session 106 Diagrams 54 Reconnaissance trip 108 Electronic map 56 Review session 110 Elevation montage 58 Risk assessment 112 Environment shop 60 Road show 114 Feasibility fund 62 Simulation 116 Field workshop 64 Street stall 118 Future search conference 66 Table scheme display 120 Gaming 68 Task force 122 Ideas competition 70 Urban design studio 124 Interactive display 72 User group 126 Local design statement 74 Video soapbox 128 Mapping 76

People’s wall at a design fest, Hong Kong, 1998

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 23 CPH pages 22-43 10/7/06 12:46 Page 24

A METHODS You are Action planning event invited to an Action planning events allow people to ACTION Y produce plans of action at carefully structured PLANNING DA sessions at which all those affected work creatively together. They can be used at any stage of the development process and provide Community Planning Forum an alternative to reliance on bureaucratic planning.

ᔢ The nature of the action planning event is decided on and agreed by the main parties involved. There DESIGN FEST are many common types (see left) and the scope for inventing new formats is unlimited. Events may last Design W for an afternoon, a weekend, a week or a month. orkshop ᔢ Preparation takes place including arranging timetables, venues, publicity, equipment, technical FUTURE SEARCH support, background information. CONFERENCE ᔢ The event is held, often assisted by a facilitator or team of facilitators from elsewhere. Proposals for Microplanning action result. Workshop ᔢ The event is followed up to ensure that proposals are put into action. OPEN SPACE WORKSHOP Careful planning and preparation are essential. Try and get some documented research and preliminary consultation input from Planning for Real key interested parties prior to an event. The creative burst is always part of – albeit a key part of – a longer process. Session Imaginative timetabling is crucial. Try linking up with other activities such as local festivals, anniversaries, conferences, etc.

PLANNING $ Costs vary immensely from virtually nothing to tens of thousands WEEKEND of dollars. There is usually an event suited to most budgets, and scope for securing support in kind from interested parties.

24 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 22-43 10/7/06 12:46 Page 25

METHODS A

Working together Local residents, business people, professionals, ofﬁcials and politicians all work creatively together for an intensive period. Conventional boundaries tend to break down, releasing spirit, humour, Action planning event imagination, positive thinking and collective timetable structure creativity. Photos such as this are often taken to Common for many events, regardless celebrate this energy. of length.

1 Introduction Tours, brieﬁngs, icebreakers, launch. 2 Problems/Issues Workshops, plenaries, individual and group working. FURTHER INFORMATION 3 Solutions/Options Workshops, plenaries, design sessions,  Methods: Community planning forum. individual and group working. Design fest. Design workshop. Future 4 Synthesis/Analysis search conference. Microplanning Individual and group working. workshop. Open space workshop. 5 Production Planning day. Planning for Real. Planning Report writing, photo selection, weekend. Roadshow. Task force. drawing, model-making. Scenarios: Inner city regeneration. Local 6 Presentation neighbourhood initiative. Slide show, ﬁlm, public meeting, symposium. ” Action Planning. Plan for Action.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 25 CPH pages 22-43 10/7/06 12:46 Page 26

A METHODS Activity week

Activity weeks are a way of focusing energy and attention on the local environment and initiatives to improve it. They are particularly effective if they become an annual event and even more so if part of a national programme.

ᔢ A programme of events and activities is produced on a suitable theme. One week is a good length for making an impact but it can be longer or shorter.

ᔢ Organisations and individuals are invited to organise activities and events during the week and have Public focus Local newspaper promotes an them advertised in the programme. ‘Environment Week’ programme. Other common themes are ‘Architecture ᔢ The programme is promoted by a coordinating body Week’, ‘Urban Design Week’, which may be a partnership, preferably including ‘Preservation Week’. local media.

Organising a ﬁrst activity week will take a lot of effort. Once established as an annual event, they become relatively easy to organise as participating organisations know what is expected of them. The main coordinating task then involves compiling the programme.

Make sure the programme is produced well in advance and Fact: Over half a million pieces widely publicised. Get it printed in the local paper in full, of publicity were printed by the preferably as a pull-out. Civic Trust for ‘Environment Week 1991’ which included It helps if national organisations can provide an overall framework 350,000 leaﬂets, 50,000 ideas and get local organisations to co-ordinate local programmes. for action booklets, 250,000 badges, 40,000 window If you have an event longer than a week (one month, one year), stickers, 65,000 posters, 500 make sure you have the stamina to maintain the momentum. balloons and 100 banners. Over 3,000 events were held throughout the UK. Interviews $ Core costs: printing programme, co-ordination (several person were screened on 13 national weeks), launch event. Costs of individual activities should be TV programmes and at least covered by participating organisations. Plenty of scope for 2,200 items published in securing sponsorship. newspapers.

26 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 22-43 10/7/06 12:46 Page 27

METHODS A

Activity week activities ANYTOWN URBAN DESIGN WEEK 2 to 9 April 2004 ᔤ Award ceremony For most imaginative local project, group Making places work better or individual. Co-ordinated by Anytown Urban Forum ᔤ Competition Sponsored by Viz Inc and The Herald For best kept gardens or shopfronts, best improvement ideas, best kids' drawings, etc. Day Time Event details Organiser ᔤ Exhibition Mon 2.30 Town Centre Walk. Planning Dept. Exhibitions on week theme by local See the latest plans with the City Planner. Meet in Town Square. businesses, voluntary groups, artists, etc. All day Exhibition. Competition entries Old Town Trust ᔤ Guided tour for Broadway. At Space Gallery. Around area of interest. Or for 18.00 Prize giving and party. The Herald birdwatching, looking at wild flowers, etc. For Broadway competition. At Space Gallery ᔤ Launch reception Tues 10.00 Rubbish clearance. Downs Park. Down residents Pre-week gathering for organisers, Sacks and refreshments provided. exhibitors, sponsors, the media, etc. 12.00 etc etc ᔤ Lecture or film show On subject of interest. ᔤ Litter-pick Help clear up an eyesore. Bags provided. ᔤ Open day For projects, organisations, professional offices, etc. ᔤ Open building or garden See round fine local buildings or gardens. ᔤ Opening ceremony Formal event for press, dignatories, etc. ON ALL WEEK Party ᔤ Open House See how the Duke Street project office works, End of week celebration for organisers, etc. 7 Duke Street, 10.00 to 17.00 Project opening or launch ᔤ Gardening Help Love Lane residents create a community Unveil a plaque for a recently completed garden on the derelict sidings land. Tools project or launch a new initiative. provided. 11.00 to 18.00 daily. ᔤ Public meeting On a theme of current interest, inaugural Further information: 446488 meeting of new group, new initiative, etc. Sample programme format ᔤ Reception or ‘coffee morning’ Key ingredients: Theme; dates; timetable of Refreshments with a relevant theme. activities; map with location of activities; credits; ᔤ Self build project further info contact. A way of suggesting ideas Create a garden, build a play structure, dig for next year’s programme could also be added. a ditch, paint a mural, clear a pond, etc. ᔤ Street party Clear out the cars for an evening. FURTHER INFORMATION ᔤ Workshop, Forum, Symposium, Debate On relevant subjects.  Scenario: Urban conservation. b Civic Trust (Environment Week). Plus normal festival activities: facepainting, Royal Institute of British Architects music, dancing, juggling, theatre, poetry (Architecture Week). Urban Design readings, sculptures, races, and lots more. Group (Urban Design Week).

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 27 CPH pages 22-43 10/7/06 12:46 Page 28

A METHODS Architecture centre

Architecture centres are places set up to help Any Town people understand, and engage in, the design Architecture of local buildings and the built environment. Centre They can become focal points for local • improving understanding environmental initiatives and a shop window • involving communities and meeting place for all those involved in • raising standards • helping communication shaping the future of their surroundings.

Bookshop • Competitions Debates • Development ᔢ A suitable building is found with space for proposals Digital models • exhibitions, seminars, and social activities. It will Exhibitions Evening classes • Films • Initiatives • Lectures • normally be a building of architectural or historic Library Models • Publishing interest. Seminars Talks • Tours • Trails Visits • Workshops

School parties welcome ᔢ Permanent and temporary exhibits are mounted Cafe & Bar relating to the local built environment. Open 10am to 10pm daily

Sample promotional poster ᔢ A programme of activities is organised designed to stimulate interest, start initiatives and provide “You just want to reach out educational experiences for young people. and touch and play with all the displays. I never knew buildings could be so exciting.” Janet Ullman, resident, Lots of space is needed in order to be able to house models and London, on Hackney Building exhibits. Exploratory, London, 1998. Centres need time to generate momentum. At least a three-year “The number of visitors we’ve set up timetable is advisable. had in our ﬁrst two years – 30,000 – shows there is a real Centres can be themed depending on the needs of the locality. A public demand for what we historic area might be better off calling it a ‘Conservation Centre’ have to offer.” or ‘Heritage Centre’ and focusing the exhibits and activities Sasha Lubetkin, Director, accordingly. Where the emphasis is entirely on education, it Bristol Architecture Centre, ‘98. might be called an ‘Urban Studies Centre’. “These organisations are the key to greater public participation Centres can be set up by local authorities, education institutes or and access to the wider debates local amenity societies. They are likely to work best if they are on architecture and related independent, perhaps starting off as a partnership venture. social and political issues.” Marjorie Allthorpe-Guyton Director of Visual Arts, Arts $ Main costs: building and running costs, staff, exhibits. Scope for Council of England, Report, ‘99. sponsorship from the building industry and educational grants.

28 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 22-43 10/7/06 12:46 Page 29

METHODS A

Architecture centre exhibit ideas

ᔤ Aerial photo. Of local area (people love aerial photos of where they live). ᔤ Building date maps. Showing what was built when. ᔤ Building models and plans. For typical or interesting local buildings. ᔤ Conservation map. Showing location of historic buildings and landscapes. ᔤ Construction models. Models of vernacular building methods, brick bonds, window details, etc. ᔤ Development proposals and ideas. Drawings and models of proposed new construction in the local area with comment facilities. ᔤ Electronic or digital map. Computer terminal (p 56). ᔤ Geological model. Showing rock strata. ‘What is beneath your home?’ ᔤ Historical maps. Showing development of the area, war damage, etc. ᔤ House-type photos. ‘Put a sticker on the house you would most like to live in’ (distinguish between adults, children, visitors). ᔤ Local area map. ‘Stick in a pin to show where you live.’ ᔤ Local area model. Accurate and detailed or conceptual (see photo right). ᔤ Neighbourhood jigsaw. Lift up pieces based on district boundaries to reveal street plans, transport links, sewage Bringing the built environment alive systems, etc. Discussion takes place around a model of the ᔤ Site models. Block models of a range of local area built from recycled materials over 6 different styles of development in the area. months by 350 school children. ‘Guess which is which?’ ᔤ Space photo. The view from a satellite. FURTHER INFORMATION Good crowd puller. ᔤ Technical services. Displays showing how  Methods: Community design centre. things work; plumbing, insulation, electrics. Environment shop. Scenarios: New ᔤ Tracing paper ideas. ‘Sketch your ideas neighbourhood. Regeneration on overlays of maps or drawings’. infrastructure. Urban conservation. ᔤ World map. Stick in pins to show where b your parents come from. Architecture Centres Network. Hackney ᔤ ...... Building Exploratory...... Ϡ Polly Hudson. Barry Shaw.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 29 CPH pages 22-43 10/7/06 12:46 Page 30

A METHODS Art workshop

Art workshops allow local people to help design and construct artworks to improve their environment. This can be an end in itself or part of a wider regeneration effort. Community arts projects are particularly useful for helping people express their creativity and develop skills, a sense of identity and community pride.

ᔢ Ideas are generated by local people working closely with community artists and sculptors in studio workshop sessions. People of all ages, backgrounds and abilities can be involved.

ᔢ Architects, landscape designers and other technical experts ensure that the designs are buildable.

ᔢ The community chooses which of the design options generated should be built, usually through some form of voting at an exhibition.

Community art Street lights designed by local ᔢ The artworks are manufactured and installed, often residents with community with the assistance of local residents. artists. ᔢ A celebration is held to mark completion.

Good way of involving people in development who might not be attracted by more conventional consultation methods. Can break down social barriers and help communities form a common vision.

Finding artists willing and able to work with community groups is “Community arts was a way of essential. Providing leadership without dominating is a vital skill. communicating more easily and excitingly and to get real ideas from people.” $ Can be relatively expensive in professional input and project Waheed Saleem, Chair, costs. Needs to be seen as a cultural and educational initiative as Caldmore-Palfrey Youth well as a way of achieving environmental improvements. In this Forum, Walsall, UK way costs can be partially covered by education or other Free Form Update, 1998. budgets. Using recycled or scrap materials can reduce costs.

30 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 22-43 10/7/06 12:46 Page 31

METHODS A

Designing Making School children work with artists in studio The mosaic is made by local people with no workshops developing designs for a pavement previous experience under the supervision of mosaic using poster paints, cardboard and artists and architects. scissors.

Community arts opportunities

ᔤ Bicycle paths ᔤ Bridge decoration ᔤ Community gardens and parks ᔤ Fountains ᔤ Murals ᔤ Paving ᔤ Play areas ᔤ Railings and gateways ᔤ School buildings ᔤ Sculptures and statues ᔤ Street lighting ᔤ ......

Celebration FURTHER INFORMATION Local people celebrate an attractive improvement to the street scene which has been designed and  Scenarios: Derelict site re-use. made with their help. In contrast to much Environmental art project. Inner city corporate artworks, such initiatives provide a regeneration. visible sign of local communities’ participation in the environment and can help create places b Free Form Arts Trust. Candid Arts Trust. which are successful, safe and respected. Ϡ Sonia Kahn.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 31 CPH pages 22-43 10/7/06 12:46 Page 32

A METHODS Award scheme

Award schemes provide a way to stimulate Do you know of a activity and spread good practice at a local, community national or even international level. They can planning project be set up by any organisation from a local worthy of an community group to an international agency. award?

Entry forms from: Community Planning Awards ᔢ The organisers establish the purpose of the scheme PO Box 7, Anytown and assemble partners and sponsors. Organised by Environment Agency Sponsored by Glass Ltd, Big Land and Grassroots Foundation ᔢ An entry form is drafted setting out the themes,

Closing date for entries: categories (if any), entry criteria, judging procedure 7 May 2002 and prizes and the scheme is widely publicised to attract entries.

“The awards are an uplifting ᔢ Entries are judged and an award ceremony is held experience. They raise the to focus publicity on the winning entry and the spirits of those of us who are themes behind the awards. fortunate enough to be short- listed. They raise the horizons of those who miss out this time ᔢ Procedures are refined and the awards held on a but look on and think ‘we could do that’ and have a crack regular, often annual, basis. next time. And they raise the profile of our kind of work amongst a much wider Financial incentives are not usually necessary. People will enter audience than we might ever for the prestige. But a good plaque or framed certificate which otherwise hope to address.” can be publicly displayed will be highly valued. David Robinson, Director, Community Links, London High profile patrons are very helpful in attracting entries and Acceptance speech, 1.3.94. getting publicity. eg Royalty or local mayor.

“All over the country there are Use schemes to develop a catalogue of case studies for remarkable groups of people information exchange. working incredibly hard to make a real difference to their Judging can be highly educational. Have as many judges as communities. The whole object possible and get them to visit short-listed schemes. Such visits of these awards is to reward can be valuable for both the judges and local projects. and recognise all these unsung heroes.” $ Local schemes: few costs involved. National schemes can be HRH The Prince of Wales, complex and involve considerable administration. The more Chairman, UK Community successful they become, the more administration is required to Enterprise Awards, 1995 ensure fairness and impartiality. Great scope for sponsorship.

32 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 22-43 10/7/06 12:46 Page 33

METHODS A

National Anytown community Shopfront enterprise award award presented to Category Community buildings

by presented to by dated dated

An annual award for the most An annual award for the best enterprising and sustainable shopfront improvements in community projects in Anycountry. Anytown. Patrons: Princess Mary, Sir John Knevitt. Organised by the Housing Institute and Sponsored by the Anytown Trust and Planners Network. Sponsored by Glass Ltd, Anytown Chamber of Commerce Big Land and Grassroots Foundation.

Local award certiﬁcate National award certiﬁcate

Sample judging criteria For community projects ᔤ Need or value The project’s value to the community for which it is designed. Spreading the word ᔤ Community involvement Securing an award, or even just being considered The quality of community involvement in for an award, can generate publicity for a project the project’s initiation and development. which can help with funding and other support. ᔤ Design The appropriateness of the design solution FURTHER INFORMATION adopted. ᔤ Sustainability  Scenarios: Regeneration infrastructure. The ability for the project to be maintained Urban conservation. over time. b Business in the Community.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 33 CPH pages 22-43 10/7/06 12:46 Page 34

B METHODS Brieﬁng workshop

Brieﬁng workshops are simple, easy-to-organise working sessions held to establish a project agenda or brief. Simultaneously they can: • introduce people to the project; • help establish the key issues; • get people involved and motivated; • identify useful talent and experience; • identify the next steps needed. They are useful at the start of a project or action planning event and can act as a public launch.

ᔢ Potential users of the project are invited to attend a workshop, usually lasting around 1.5 hours. Similar workshops may be held with different interest groups (eg: staff, leaders, young people, etc) or on different topics (eg: housing, jobs, open space, etc).

ᔢ The workshop is facilitated by one or more individuals who will have planned a format to suit the context (example, right).

ᔢ A record is kept of those who attend, the points made and key issues identiﬁed.

ᔢ People’s contributions are unattributable unless agreed otherwise.

If people find it hard to get started, say “Just write down the first Main steps thing that comes into your head, however big or small.” 1 Individual brainstorm on Post-it notes or cards; The record should ideally include typing up all Post-it notes and 2 Categorising in small groups flip-chart sheets as well as key points from all debate. sitting round a table or on the floor; Follow up by circulating a summary to all participants. 3 Presenting the results; 4 General discussion and $ Core costs: Facilitator’s fees; venue hire; typing up workshop planning the next steps. notes (allow one person day per workshop).

34 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 22-43 10/7/06 12:46 Page 35

METHODS B

Briefing workshop format Sample covering most contexts. 1 Introduction Purpose of event explained by facilitator. Everyone introduces themselves and explains briefly their interest. Notetaker and flipcharter identified. (15 mins)

2 Individual brainstorm Everyone is given Post-it notes or cards of 3 different colours and asked to write down their responses, in relation to any given topic, to 3 questions:

What is What is How wrong? your can it dream? happen?

Each Post-it note should contain only one response. A limit can be set for the number of responses per person to make the total manageable. Symbols can be used if people are illiterate. (15 mins)

3 Categorising Facilitated categorising People divide into three sub-groups. Each A team of facilitators (who may be volunteers) sub-group categorises Post-its of one read out responses one by one and place them in colour by arranging them on large sheets categories on wall sheets. An alternative to the of paper and making headings. Graphics procedure outlined left, useful when there are can be added if helpful. (20 mins) large numbers.

4 Presenting Each sub-group explains its findings to the Briefing workshop props whole group. (20mins) ᔤ Attendance sheets ᔤ Banners with workshop title 5 Discussion ᔤ Display material, eg maps, photos, plans On the results and next stage in the ᔤ Flip-chart (or paper on wall) process. Strategic recommendations and ᔤ Felt-tip markers (or chalk) immediate action identified. (20 mins) ᔤ Pens or pencils ᔤ Post-it notes (or small pieces of paper or If the workshop is part of a larger action card) in three colours planning event, a report back will then be ᔤ Tape (or drawing pins or Blu-tack) made to a plenary session.

Running time: 1.5 hours. FURTHER INFORMATION Ideal numbers: 9 – 24. With larger numbers, split up into more subgroups for  Method: Design workshop. categorising or have a facilitating team Scenarios: Community centre. Housing doing the categorising (see right). development.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 35 CPH pages 22-43 10/7/06 12:46 Page 36

C METHODS Choice catalogues

Choice catalogues provide a way to make design choices within a predetermined structure. They are particularly useful for helping people understand the range of options available and provide a way for making choices where large numbers of people are involved.

ᔢ Choice catalogues can be used to make design choices at a range of levels; from housing layouts to sanitary ﬁttings.

ᔢ Options available are worked out by the experts in consultation with a small group of residents.

ᔢ The options are presented in the form of a simple menu made as visual as possible, using photographs or simple sketches. Choices can be costed using a simple points system if necessary.

Fixtures and ﬁttings options ᔢ People make choices based on the catalogue. This Catalogues used by future may be done individually or in groups using occupants of a large housing development. Standard choices workshop procedures. can be made which have no real cost effect. Residents can choose up to 400 points-worth of other items. Makes it possible to give residents of large housing developments individual choice, particularly using computers to log people’s selections.

Can be used as a way of generally ﬁnding out people’s attitudes to design issues as well as for making speciﬁc selection.

$ Dependant on scale of consultation. Main costs: graphics; printing; distribution. If well managed and planned at an early stage, providing choice on large housing schemes need not add to overall capital costs. Indeed savings can be made by avoiding the provision of items that some people do not want.

36 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 22-43 10/7/06 12:46 Page 37

METHODS C

What would you like your What room arrangement housing to look like? do you want?

Instructions Instructions 1 Select the images you like most and least. 1 Select the options you prefer. 2 Discuss your selection in a group. 2 Fill in the points score and add up. 3 Make a group decision on the group’s 3 Revise until the total score is less than 41 most and least liked images. OR 3 The cost of your home will be roughly the number of points multiplied by $..,......

1a 18 1b 20 1c 22

2a 10 2b 6 2c 4

3a 8 3b 6 5 3

4a 5 4b 3 6 2

Options Score 1a Living/dining & kitchen អអ 1b Living & dining/kitchen អ2អ0 1c Living & dining & kitchen អអ 2a Large children’s bedroom/play area អអ 2b Large children’s bedroom អ 2c Small children’s bedroom អ4 3a Large parents’ bedroom អ House image options 3b Small parents’ bedroom អ6 Choice menu format for use by future residents of 4a Bathroom អ5 a housing scheme in a group. Useful for brieﬁng 4b Half bathroom អ an architect. Images are selected which reﬂect 5 Storage room អ3 locally available options. 6 Greenhouse អ Total អអ38

Uses for choice menus Room layout options Choice menu for selecting alternative room layouts. ᔤ Bathroom ﬁttings FURTHER INFORMATION ᔤ Front entrance ᔤ House image  Scenario: Housing development. ᔤ House type ” Building Homes People Want. Participatory Design. ᔤ Light ﬁttings b North Carolina State University. ᔤ Room layout Wilkinson Hindle Hallsall Lloyd. ᔤ Security equipment Ϡ Bill Hallsall. Henry Sanoff.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 37 CPH pages 22-43 10/7/06 12:46 Page 38

C METHODS Community design centre

Are you Community design centres are places where • a community organisation? communities can get affordable technical help • a tenants’ association? • a residents’ association? to plan and manage their environment. They • an ethnic organisation? are the environmental equivalent of health • a women’s group? centres and are invaluable for helping local Do you want to • Clear up an eyesore? people design and implement environmental • Build a community hall? projects, particularly in poor communities. • Build a women’s refuge? • Develop a play area? • Landscape a derelict site? ᔢ Community design centres are staffed by people We can provide with a range of the technical skills needed for • Architects • Planners environmental management. They are also known • Surveyors • Ecologists as ‘community technical aid centres’. • Project management • Help with fundraising and constitutions ᔢ Centres provide services to local voluntary groups – • Publications and videos and sometimes individuals – covering all aspects of Contact environmental management. Services will normally Anytown Community be free unless groups are able to afford to pay for Technical Aid Centre 01234 666444 them or fees can be built into capital project bids.

A free service to community groups funded by Anytown ᔢ Centres will normally be independent charitable City Council, Ministry for agencies funded by governments, local authorities, Environment and Jet plc universities, charities or private sponsors. Sometimes they are controlled by the groups to whom they “What makes the community architect different from the provide services. Independent consultants may also traditional architect is that he’s provide the same service, subsidised by other work. available, he’s there – seven days a week, twenty-four hours a day to feel the vibration and Securing funding is a constant headache. Centres are most likely pulse of the community. The to be sustainable if they carry out fee earning work as well as architect’s presence on site is providing free services. essential. That very presence is wealth – not just for the architect but for the whole community.” $ Dependent on the number of paid staff and cost of premises. For Rod Hackney, Community instance a well equipped centre with 5 full-time technical staff architect could cost US$200,000 per annum. A centre run by volunteers Architects Journal, 20.2.1985. or secondees using free accommodation could cost very little.

38 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 22-43 10/7/06 12:46 Page 39

METHODS C

management link with Community design committee national of voluntary group funding support centre services ៉៊and funder representatives association Customise to satisfy local needs. ᔤ Action planning ់ ᔤ Art and graphics Community arts ᔤ Staff ᔤ Competition management architect ᔤ Construction work supervision ecologist, engineer ᔤ Design of buildings and landscape landscape designer ᔤ Employment generation administrator ᔤ Feasibility studies; buildings and landscape fundraiser ᔤ Fundraising ᔤ Maintenance of buildings and landscape services ᔤ Organisation formation and development ᔤ Planning advice and advocacy services

់ services ᔤ Plant nursery development and maintenance ់ ᔤ Property management and development ᔤ Rectifying building defects ᔤ Strategic planning voluntary groups ᔤ Training in environmental management and design Organisation chart for a community design centre ᔤ ...... managed by a committee of representatives of groups that use it and funders.

Technical expertise FURTHER INFORMATION A community-based nerve centre providing skills and experience on environmental management.  Methods: Environment shop. Neighbourhood planning ofﬁce. Urban design studio. Scenarios: Derelict site re- use. Regeneration infrastructure. Shanty settlement. Urban conservation. b Association for Community Design. Association of Community Technical Aid.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 39 CPH pages 22-43 10/7/06 12:46 Page 40

C METHODS Community planning forum

HELP PLAN THE FUTURE OF MONROE Community planning forums are open, THE MONROE SOCIETY multipurpose events lasting several hours. INVITES YOU TO A COMMUNITY The three-stage format is designed to secure PLANNING FORUM information, generate ideas and create ON MONROE’S OPEN SPACES interaction between interest groups with a AT BOLLING HOUSE, 211 EAST STREET 5.00PM THURSDAY 8 AUGUST 1996 minimum of advance planning.

ᔢ Community planning forums can be organised at any time but are particularly useful at an early stage in a participation or development process. ALL WELCOME GIVE US YOUR IDEAS FOR IMPROVING THIS NEIGHBOURHOOD ᔢ Forums can be organised by any interested party Sample advertising leaﬂet. and can be organised at short notice. Key components: Slogan summarising overall purpose; venue; time; date; statement of ᔢ The format combines interactive displays, an open immediate objectives and perhaps some background forum, workshop groups and informal networking. information; map of area with venue marked; name of Key ingredients are a leaﬂet advertising the event, a organisers. ᔢ means of distributing it, a venue and a facilitator.

Keep the atmosphere informal to get best results. Good refreshments worthwhile.

“It was a very effective formula. Particularly useful events for students engaged in urban design It allowed us, as a group, to projects because they do not necessarily need to relate to any ﬁnd out what the inhabitants ‘real’ development timetable or be organised by local people. expected of their place for the They can be organised by anyone at any time (though they will future. And it didn’t impose normally work better if locals assist). too much on people’s time. In fact I think everyone had a very Getting students to organise the format themselves can be highly enjoyable evening.” educational, particularly if linked with a process planning session Laura Dotson (Process planning session). Providing a framework may be Interior designer helpful (ie arranging publicity and venue in advance). Student organiser of a community planning forum at Richmond, Virginia, USA, 1996. $ Main costs: Venue hire; advertising leaﬂet production.

40 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 22-43 10/7/06 12:46 Page 41

METHODS C

entrance Sample Community Planning Forum Format displays displays 1 Interactive displays As people arrive they are guided towards a variety of interactive displays where they are encouraged to make comments using Post-its, marker pens or stickers workshop workshop (Interactive display). General mingling tables tables and discussion. Refreshments. (45 mins) 2 Open forum People are seated in a horseshoe shape, perhaps with model, plan or drawing on a table in the centre. Introductions by seating around organisers. Feed back on interactive model or plan displays by pre-warned rapporteurs. Open debate chaired by organiser. (45 mins) Ideal layout in a large hall 3 Workshop groups People are divided into groups and work around tables on various topics/areas, either pre-selected or agreed during the open forum. (45 mins) 4 Networking Informal mingling and discussion. Refreshments. (45 mins) 5 Feedback (optional) Reports from workshop groups to plenary. (Or separate presentation session later.) Total running time: 3 hours minimum Ideal numbers 30 – 150

Open forum Debate in a horseshoe arrangement following a warm-up interactive display and before dividing up into workshop groups. Key roles at a planning forum ᔤ Chairperson for open forum ᔤ Facilitator/stage manager ᔤ Hosts as people arrive FURTHER INFORMATION ᔤ Photographer  Methods: Elevation montage. Interactive display. Table scheme display. Task force. ᔤ Reporters for each interactive display Scenarios: Community centre. Village ᔤ Workshop and forum recorders revival. ᔤ Workshop facilitators Ϡ Richard John

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 41 CPH pages 22-43 10/7/06 12:46 Page 42

C METHODS Community proﬁling

Community proﬁling involves building up a picture of the nature, needs and resources of a community with the active participation of that community. It is a useful ﬁrst stage in any community planning process to establish a context which is widely agreed.

ᔢ A range of methods are used to enable the community to develop an understanding of itself.

ᔢ The methods combine group working and group interaction techniques with data collection and presentation techniques. Taking stock . Government ofﬁcials analysing ᔢ The focus is on methods which are visual in order to information gained from the community analysing itself generate interest and make the process accessible using a variety of proﬁling to the illiterate and those unused to verbal methods. communication.

ᔢ The results are in the public realm. Reports include as many of the words, writings and pictures of local people as possible.

Good facilitation is particularly important to avoid manipulated or simply poor results. A strategy is often needed to prevent domination by the more powerful or aggressive. Facilitators should listen and learn at all times. Even when relaxing, insights into local dynamics can be gained. “The beneﬁt of using this method is the diverse number Closer attention and differing sessions may be needed to obtain of people who can work the views of women and any under-represented groups. together and still achieve an outcome which involves Informal observation is a powerful source of information on local everyone.“ dynamics. Pat Jefferson, Carlisle City Council Tidelines newsletter, Solway $ Cost effective compared with conventional analysis by outside Firth Partnership, 1997. consultants. Main cost: facilitators’ fees.

42 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 22-43 10/7/06 12:46 Page 43

METHODS C

Community profiling ᔤ Organisation review. Review of existing methods groups and organisations to assess their ᔤ Activity chart. Plotting people’s activities roles, membership, plans and potential. each day, or each week. Useful for ᔤ Personal history. Recording detailed oral understanding divisions of labour, roles and accounts of individuals’ lives, perhaps responsibilities in a community. asking them to emphasise specific issues. ᔤ Building survey. Recording the state of ᔤ Problem tree. Analysing the inter- repair of buildings. relationships among community issues and ᔤ External relationship profiling. problems using a graphic based on a tree. Examining the roles and impact of external (Glossary, and illustration, below) organisations. ᔤ Role play. Adopting the role of others and ᔤ Gender workshop. Separate sessions for acting out scenarios. (Gaming) women (or sometimes men) to analyse ᔤ Seasonal calendar. Exploring changes their situation, needs and priorities. taking place throughout the year, eg in ᔤ Historical profile. Identifying and listing work patterns, production. (Diagrams) key events, beliefs and trends in a ᔤ Semi-structured interview. community’s past and their importance for Conversational open discussion using a the present. checklist of questions as a flexible guide ᔤ Household livelihood analysis. instead of a formal questionnaire. Different Comparing sources of income and support types include; individual, group, focus group, with expenditure patterns and looking at and key informant. (Glossary) coping strategies for times of hardship. ᔤ Simulation. Acting out a real event or ᔤ Informal walk. Walking in a group activity in order to understand its effect. without a definite route, stopping to chat (Simulation) and discuss issues as they arise. ᔤ Skills survey. Assessing skills and talent in (Reconnaissance trip) a community. (Glossary, and p175) ᔤ Mapping. Making maps showing various ᔤ Transect walk. Systematic walk through characteristics, eg resources. (Mapping) an area to observe and record key features, for instance land use zones. (See also Reconnaissance trip) ᔤ Well-being or wealth ranking. Assessing Out-Migration levels of well-being of different households Malnutrition Low income using pile sorting. (Glossary)

FURTHER INFORMATION

 Methods: Diagrams. Gaming. Mapping. Reconnaissance trip. Simulation. Landslides Low soil Earthquakes Scenarios: Community centre. Village Fertility Floods revival. Unequal Erosion Deforestation land ownership ” Participatory Learning & Action. 4B. Problem tree Ϡ Roger Bellers. Nick Hall. Simple graphic used to analyse complex issues.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 43 CPH pages 44-71 10/7/06 12:52 Page 44

AD METHODSMETHOD Design assistance team

Assistance teams comprise a number of Team specialists from a variety of relevant disciplines members’ who visit an area and take part in a luggage participation process (for instance, a planning weekend). They are particularly useful for ᔤ Camera. providing a fresh and independent viewpoint. ᔤ Clothes with lots of pockets for camera, notebook, pens, etc. ᔢ Assistance teams are invited in by local people or ᔤ Favourite drawing pens. agencies and provided with a brief. This may be ᔤ Material for special presentation if required. simply to listen and advise, or to act as facilitators. ᔤ Pocket notebook. ᔤ Useful general facts and ﬁgures or illustrative ᔢ Teams will normally be multidisciplinary and be led material likely to be by a team chairperson. relevant. ᔤ …………………… ᔤ …………………… ᔢ Team members are often paid expenses only, to ensure independence. If they are paid a fee, this needs to be made clear.

ᔢ The team will usually prepare a report with their recommendations before leaving.

Independent expertise Good brieﬁng beforehand is essential; on both content and Team members discuss options process. with a local landowner. Strong leadership is vital to keep events moving forward. Give team members roles (see box, right) to focus people’s energy.

Get each team member to supply quotes (soundbites) and recommendations to standard bullet point format, in 3 categories: Background; issues; recommendations (to make sure they listen and provide evidence of their contribution). “We owe thanks to all our ‘outsiders’. They were so Ensure that team members commit themselves to attending for friendly from the start. It was the whole event. like one big happy family.” Local resident, Ore Valley Action Planning Weekend, $ Main costs for team: Travel; accommodation; meals; ﬁlm; 1997. equipment and supplies.

44 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 44-71 10/7/06 12:52 Page 45

METHODS AD

Assistance team roles Team synthesis process For large action planning events where the Sample process for drawing up proposals team is facilitating and preparing a report. after public workshops or planning day. Several compatible roles may be taken by one 1 Roles and responsibilities meeting individual. Not all roles will be needed in every Team only. Determine tasks, report event. Customise. structure and division of roles. ᔤ Contacts person. Keep names and phone 2 Individual team working numbers of useful resource people. All workshops analysed to standard format ᔤ Diplomats. Liaise between different summarising points made and identifying workshops to create linkages. key themes. Proposals drawn up to ᔤ Follow-up co-ordinator. Ensure follow- standard format (heading plus one up takes place and publicise. summary paragraph). ᔤ Photographer. Ensure key events are photographed (slides and prints). 3 Team participatory editing Text and graphics displayed on wall for ᔤ Report editor. Commission, gather and edit copy and illustrations. comment (using pens and Post-its). ᔤ Report subeditor. Subedit copy. Assist 4 General participatory editing editor. Non team members return (eg local ᔤ Report production manager. Liaise with enthusiasts) to make comments. printer and photo lab. 5 Review session ᔤ Slide show editor. Select slides for presentation. Open workshop session to discuss any major omissions or controversial issues. ᔤ Sound recorder. Tape key sessions and index tapes. 6 Final editing and production ᔤ Stage manager. Co-ordinate pool of Team only people for errands etc. Total running time: 1 day ᔤ Team chairperson. Provide leadership, orchestrate event, take responsibility. ᔤ Team facilitator. Keep roving eye on FURTHER INFORMATION group dynamics, reporting back to team chairperson.  Methods: Participatory editing. Planning ᔤ Workshop facilitators. Steer workshop day. Planning weekend. Scenarios: sessions (one per workshop). Industrial heritage. Local neighbourhood. ᔤ Workshop note-takers. Prepare notes of workshops in format for ﬁnal report. ” Action Planning. Creating a Design ᔤ ...... Assistance Team for Your Community.

Expertise needed on design assistance team Checklist of skills and professional backgrounds likely to be useful. Customise for each event.

ᔤ Architecture ᔤ Journalism ᔤ Property development ᔤ Community development ᔤ Landscape design ᔤ Sociology ᔤ Ecology ᔤ Law ᔤ Urban design ᔤ Economics and ﬁnance ᔤ Management ᔤ ...... ᔤ Historic preservation ᔤ Planning ᔤ ...... It helps if people are also good at writing, drawing, organising, analysing and working as a team.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 45 CPH pages 44-71 10/7/06 12:52 Page 46

AD METHODS Design fest

Design fests produce creative concepts for the Exhibition future of an area by getting multidisciplinary Pacific shopping centre 2-5 Jan 99 - 8 to 21hrs design teams to develop and present their Workshop ideas in public. They are a good way to Pacific shopping centre 4-5 Jan 99 - 10 to 21hrs stimulate debate and develop imaginative Symposium solutions, particularly on controversial issues. Ocean conference centre 6 Jan 1999 10.00 to 17.00 ᔢ Organisers decide on a theme that needs exploring and determine a brief. A specific, challenging site will normally be selected to focus creativity towards practical solutions. Organised by Anytown University Planning School and Anytown Civic Society ᔢ Multidisciplinary design teams are selected and Sponsors Eagle Properties briefed. The teams are likely to comprise Blue Island Cement Chamber of Commerce architecture or planning students as well as Enquiries 01234 976543 practising professionals from a range of disciplines. Designing Anytown Sample poster Key ingredients: Theme; logo; ᔢ The teams hold an intensive design workshop (or visual image; details of activities; organisers, sponsors; ‘charrette’) in public, coinciding with a public further information. exhibition on the theme. The public are encouraged to respond to the theme and the team’s ideas as they emerge and to develop their own.

ᔢ A high proﬁle public symposium is held immediately after the workshops when the ideas generated are presented and debated by a prominent panel.

“As the Saturday night ᔢ The results are published and widely distributed. deadline drew near, the pace was frenzied. Some drawings were coloured by up to six Ideally suited to being organised by university architecture and people at a time, models were planning schools. Students learn a lot by taking part in teams, being glued together, slides organising exhibition material, doing surveys of the public and being taken for presentation at helping the public to engage in design issues. the Sunday symposium.” Designing Hong Kong $ A well organised, high proﬁle design fest could cost US$40,000. report poster, 1998. But there is a great deal of scope for securing sponsorship.

46 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 44-71 10/7/06 12:52 Page 47

METHODS AD

Designing in public Multidisciplinary design teams develop ideas in three small cubicles erected inside a large shopping centre. Members of the public view the teams at work from the balconies above, explore exhibition material and interactive displays pinned to the outside of the screens, are interviewed by team members and develop and pin up their own ideas in a fourth cubicle (shown left above). The teams also have the use of a private resource room (not shown) with photocopying and other facilities. They are told to produce simple, straightforward and graphic presentation material to capture the attention of the viewing public on the balcony. The workshop may last for one or several days. Then, slides are made of the FURTHER INFORMATION drawings and all the ideas emerging are presented and debated at a public symposium.  Methods: Design workshop. Interactive display. b Chinese University of Hong Kong (Department of Architecture) Ϡ Jack Sidener

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 47 CPH pages 44-71 10/7/06 12:52 Page 48

AD METHODS Design game

Design games are like jigsaw puzzles. They are a highly visual way of allowing people to explore physical design options for a site or internal space. They are particularly useful for designing parks and room layouts and can also be used for land-use planning. They can be used in isolation or as part of a broader participation process.

ᔢ A base map of a site or room is prepared.

Movable pieces Residents move pieces around ᔢ Cut-out pieces representing items that could be until they are happy with their incorporated are made to the same scale. Materials design. for making pieces are kept at hand to allow new items to be made as desired.

ᔢ Individuals or groups move pieces around until they are happy with the design, which is then photographed.

ᔢ Layouts produced by different individuals or groups are discussed and analysed as a basis for drawing up sketch designs and costings.

“The most vital aspect of our approach was the design Cut-outs are normally simple two-dimensional, hand-drawn game: it was intended to be, illustrations, using coloured felt-tip on cardboard. Three- and was, fun; this made it less dimensional cut-outs are even better but take more time. threatening, and thus more accessible.... Playing the game Putting capital and revenue costings on pieces can make the illustrated far better than design process more realistic. words spoken by either side ever could, both the urban Make sure the pieces are visually explanatory so that design principles discussed and photographs of the designs will make sense. Exhibiting or residents’ own preferences for publishing photos of the designs of different groups can be a the site.” useful next step. Robert Brown, Architect Urban Design Quarterly, January 1998. $ Depends on standard of design. Can be done very simply.

48 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 44-71 10/7/06 12:52 Page 49

METHODS AD

Park design One resident group’s design for a park showing layout of fencing, children’s play facilities and planting.

FURTHER INFORMATION

 Method: Planning for Real. Scenario: Inner city regeneration. ” Good Practice Guide to Community Planning and Development. Participatory Design. Ϡ Alexandra Rook. Dee Stamp. Michael Comparing options Parkes. Henry Sanoff. Discussion of layouts prepared by different groups.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 49 CPH pages 44-71 10/7/06 12:52 Page 50

AD METHODS Design workshop

Design workshops are hands-on sessions allowing small groups of professionals and non-professionals to work creatively together developing planning and design ideas. They will normally be held as part of a planning day or other action planning event.

ᔢ People work in groups around a table with plans or Hands-on a ﬂexible model. Different groups can deal with Residents and architects devise different areas or the same area at different scales. improvements to a housing estate together. Groups can be allocated a topic such as transport, open spaces or housing. Groups can vary in size (8 – 10 is a good average to aim at).

ᔢ Everyone is encouraged to develop their ideas by drawing or making adjustments to the model. Each group usually needs a facilitator, a note-taker and a mapper (who marks points on a map or plan).

ᔢ A structured workshop procedure is often followed, Report back Participant explains design especially if people have not worked together workshop outcome to a before (sample format opposite). plenary session.

Using plans is often more suitable than models because little preparation is needed. People generally find it surprisingly easy to read plans once they have started working with them. It helps “Brief intensive brainstorming though if the facilitator has previous experience of design workshops can be enormously workshops and urban design expertise. productive – people of mixed backgrounds, grouped Design workshops often work best if people have done a briefing together for the first time, with workshop first (Briefing workshop). clear challenges, find that they can focus their minds and tap Get people going by telling them that “no idea is too big, no hidden reservoirs of creativity.” idea too small”. At the end everyone should sign drawings and it Jack Sidener, Professor of is often useful to draw up a tidy version for presentation. Architecture, Chinese University of Hong Kong $ Main costs: Planning and preparation; facilitator’s fees; supplies workshop brief, 1998. (see box, right).

50 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 44-71 10/7/06 12:52 Page 51

METHODS AD

Creative working Participants use tracing paper over a plan, mini Post-it notes and felt-tip pens to explore options for an inner city neighbourhood. Most have no previous design experience.

Design workshop format Design workshop supplies Sample to suit most contexts. On table 1 Arrangements ᔤ Base plan of area. People choose a workshop group and sit ᔤ Tracing paper overlays (large sheets and round tables with plan or model. (5 mins) A4 pads) taped with masking tape. 2 Introductions ᔤ Felt-tip coloured pens. Different colours. People brieﬂy introduce themselves. (10 ᔤ Mini Post-it notes or small cards. mins) ᔤ Ball point pens or pencils (one per person) 3 Getting started ᔤ Lined A4 writing pads (2 per group) Facilitator asks people to write ideas on mini Post-it notes or cards and place them on To one side the plan. Responses to questions such as: ᔤ Flipchart and marker pens. • Where are the problems? ᔤ Pin-up space (Blu-tack or pins needed). • Where are the opportunities? ᔤ Attendance sheets. • Where do you want things to happen? ᔤ Site photographs. (15 mins) If using model 4 Design ideas ᔤ Base model with movable parts. People use coloured pens to sketch ideas, ᔤ Spare cardboard or polystyrene. discussing things as they do so. Different ᔤ Scissors. options can be drawn on separate sheets ᔤ Post-it notes and cocktail sticks. of tracing paper. (50 mins) 5 Prepare summary FURTHER INFORMATION Summary drawings prepared of main suggestions. (10 mins)  Methods: Action planning event. Brieﬁng Running time: 90 mins. workshop. Planning day. Planning Ideal numbers: 8-10 per workshop. weekend. Planning for Real.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 51 CPH pages 44-71 10/7/06 12:52 Page 52

AD METHODS Development trust

Anytown Development trusts provide a mechanism for communities to undertake regeneration and Environment development projects themselves. They make Trust it possible to achieve the long-term sustained effort that is needed to evolve a community’s • Become a member own plans and put them into action. • Become a volunteer • Start a local project • Offer your expertise ᔢ Development trusts are community-based • Donate equipment • Lend premises organisations working for the regeneration of their • Second a staff member areas. They may undertake a speciﬁc project or, • Sponsor a project more likely, a range of economic, environmental, • Leave a bequest in your Will cultural or social initiatives. Environmental improvements Property management Community facilities ᔢ Development trusts are independent bodies with Regeneration expertise management structures ensuring accountability to Environmental education local people. They are not-for-proﬁt bodies, often

HELPING PEOPLE IMPROVE with charitable status, making it possible to attract THEIR ENVIRONMENT resources from public, private and charitable sectors. Sample promotion leaﬂet Key components: Name of ᔢ Administrative structures are designed to allow organisation; what it can do; how people can get involved; development trusts to own and manage property, slogan summarising aim. employ staff and develop efﬁcient project management capability.

Funding is easiest to secure at the outset in the form of grants from government and local authority regeneration budgets. The challenge is to build up a secure asset base, some committed “The strength of development sponsors and income generating capacity before grants expire. trusts is that they can Having a linked trading company is often useful to make it demonstrate the creativity and possible to earn income without losing charity status. added competence that comes from bringing together Having a clear focus, based on local priorities, is important to expertise and enthusiasm from attract support. Select a name, slogan and style to reﬂect this. public, private, voluntary and community sectors.” David Wilcox $ Essential core costs: Manager’s wages, premises, ofﬁce running. The Guide to Development Desirable to have several staff and a project seed fund. Aim at Trusts and Partnerships, 1998. £100,000 per annum but be prepared to start with volunteers.

52 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 44-71 10/7/06 12:52 Page 53

METHODS AD

National Professional Typical development Associations Institutions Training Government trust activities Agencies Quangos

Administering grant schemes International Government ᔤ Agencies Departments ᔤ Building and managing workspace ᔤ Developing community plans Anytown Pressure Charitable ᔤ Environmental education programmes Groups Development Trusts ᔤ Holding training programmes Trust ᔤ Organising competitions Voluntary Residents ᔤ Organising events Organisations and ᔤ Preserving historic buildings Traders ᔤ Promoting community development Land and Schools Property ᔤ Providing sports and recreational facilities Business Owners Local and ᔤ Running childcare centres Authorities ᔤ Running award schemes Industry ᔤ Running resource centres ᔤ Setting up and managing arts facilities ᔤ Setting up community enterprises ACTION FOR IMPROVING THE ENVIRONMENT ᔤ Supporting community groups Concept ᔤ Supporting small businesses Bringing together national, regional and local agencies – in the public, private and voluntary sectors – to promote action by local people to improve the environment.

Initial vision Individual Organisation Local National members members government agencies

5 elected 4 elected 2 nominated 2 co-opted ់ members members members members Form steering group Board of management

Manager ់ ់ Appoint Prepare business plan Development Ofﬁcer staff volunteers secondments trainees Typical democratic management structure ់ Elected local members have a majority on the Board Arrange legal status to ensure local accountability. Elections are usually held annually with members serving two years each.

់ ់ Prepare Membership drive FURTHER INFORMATION Publicity  Scenarios: Inner city regeneration. Local ់ neighbourhood initiative. Urban conservation Launch b Development Trusts Association. ” The Guide to Development Trusts and Setting up Partnerships. The main steps. Likely to take at least one year.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 53 CPH pages 44-71 10/7/06 12:52 Page 54

AD METHODS Diagrams

Diagrams and charts are a highly effective visual way to collect, discuss and display information at all stages of the planning process.

ᔢ Individuals or groups use the construction of diagrams as a basis for gathering and analysing information. Fairly complex issues or processes can be represented simply if the right type of diagram is chosen.

Venn diagram ᔢ The diagrams provide a focus for discussing issues – Showing relationships between by both literate and non-literate people – and help village institutions. stimulate creative thinking.

ᔢ The diagrams are used for ordering and presenting information, prioritising issues, decision making and monitoring.

ᔢ Making diagrams can form part of a workshop or be undertaken as an activity in its own right. A group diagramming process is similar to a group

Mind map mapping process (Mapping). Showing perceptions of trends and linkages. If diagrams are made on the ground, photograph or draw them to keep a record.

Involve people who are particularly knowledgeable, and involve as many others as possible. Facilitators should sit back and watch, not interfere too much.

Minimise text. Use colour coding, symbols and local materials wherever possible.

$ Few expenses necessary. Main cost: facilitators’ fees. May be worth spending money on materials to improve presentation.

54 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 44-71 10/7/06 12:52 Page 55

METHODS AD

Common diagram types and their uses

• Calendar. For understanding seasonal patterns, eg planting, tourism or rainfall.

• Flow diagram. Showing the components of any activity and the linkages between them. For understanding the impact of an initiative.

• Matrix. Grid allowing comparison of two Calendar variables. Used for assessing options and Showing seasonal changes in work patterns by prioritising. plotting people’s activities on a monthly basis. • Mind map. Showing people’s perceptions of trends and linkages. Used for collective brainstorming to develop common outlook.

• Network diagram. Showing ﬂows and linkages between people, organisations or places. Used for highlighting strengths and weaknesses in institutional relationships.

• Organisation chart. Showing who is responsible for what. Used for understanding how organisations work. Matrix Assessing the value of different tree species by • Pie chart. Dividing a circle into different placing stones to score various attributes. sized segments. For showing population structure, distances to work and so on.

• Time-line. List of events over time. For understanding historical trends.

• Timetable. For analysing daily routines, street activity and so on.

• Venn diagram. Using circles of different sizes to indicate roles of different organisations and the relationships between them.

FURTHER INFORMATION

Methods: Community proﬁling. Mapping. Network diagram  Identifying institutional changes needed by ” Participatory Learning & Action. plotting ﬂows and links between villages.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 55 CPH pages 44-71 10/7/06 12:52 Page 56

AE METHODS Electronic map

Electronic maps allow people to explore an area and make comments at computer terminals with specially created software. They have immense potential for helping people to visualise proposals and make their views known.

ᔢ Electronic maps are created as software which can be run on desk-top computers or touch screen monitors.

Digital age participation Finding out what is going on in ᔢ Aerial photography, maps, video clips, sounds, your neighbourhood and photos and 3-dimensional visualisations can all be making your views known at a computer terminal. incorporated to build up a series of images of an area from a variety of perspectives.

ᔢ People can explore the map at computer terminals in libraries, cafes and cultural centres and add their own comments.

ᔢ The maps can be continually adapted to provide an Technical data ongoing information service and consultation process. Based on a custom geo- location database engine with SQL interface. Great potential for linking up with maps in different areas and Scaleable and modular  for accessing via the Internet. design allows limitless adaptation and inﬁnite Gathering the content for maps is itself a part of the exploration extension of map area.  and participation process. Performs on low spec machines due to low memory overheads with no Developing software from scratch could cost as much as more than 1.5MB on screen $ US$80,000. But it should soon be possible to purchase software at any time. Works on under license for a few hundred pounds. Then cost is reduced to ordinary desk-top gathering the raw material for your map. This could cost around machines, both mac and pc US$15,000 or much less if you use material already available. formats.

56 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 44-71 10/7/06 12:52 Page 57

METHODS AE

Exploring an electronic map: a step by step example

1 Bird’s eye view. Start with an aerial photo on 2 Map layers. Superimpose maps on the aerial screen. Use cursor keys to move about and to photo or view them separately. Maps might zoom in to the place you are interested in. include: regeneration initiatives (as shown), cultural facilities, proposed new buildings.

3 Street level walkabout. Click on a place you 4 Video clips. See live action through video want to view and it ﬁlls the screen. It may be a clips. This might include presentations, art photograph, drawing, photomontage or model works, interviews with people (as shown), of how it could be. Click arrows to move about. street scenes, performances.

FURTHER INFORMATION

 Scenario: New neighbourhood. b Architecture Foundation. Ϡ Example based on a map of Hackney, London by Muf Architects and 5 Comment. See and hear what other people ShoeVegas for Hackney Council. think. Add your own comment by typing or speaking.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 57 CPH pages 44-71 10/7/06 12:52 Page 58

E METHODS Elevation montage

Elevation montages show the facade of a street by assembling photos of individual buildings. They can be useful for helping people gain an understanding of the building fabric and devise improvements.

ᔢ An elevation of a street is created by assembling a series of individual photographs. Both sides of a street can be done and pasted either side of a plan.

ᔢ Simple instructions ask people to make comments on Post-it notes or cards and place them underneath the relevant section (what they like/don’t like/would like to see).

ᔢ The build up of Post-it notes or cards generates a dialogue amongst participants and useful data for Wall-mounted later discussion and analysis. Residents pasting Post-it notes on a wall-mounted montage.

Table-mounted displays make it possible to have both sides of a street opposite each other on a plan. Wall mounted displays only work if it does not matter treating both sides separately.

Useful debates can take place around the exhibit. Keep a notepad or tape recorder handy.

Very useful as an ice-breaker at the beginning of a workshop, and as a visual prompt for all participants during a workshop. Also useful as part of an open house event.

Detail of above with comment. $ Main costs: Film processing and purchase. Preparation time (2 person days).

58 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 44-71 10/7/06 12:52 Page 59

METHODS E

Advantages of Tips on montage making elevation montages Stand the same distance from the building line when taking all photos unless there • Good icebreaker at the beginning of are setbacks in the buildings, when you workshop sessions should move closer. • Helps participants and design professionals If relating to a plan, then it is best to mount gain a visual understanding of the the montage on a long table. If on a wall, environment they are dealing with. then one elevation will be upside down. • Secures the views of people lacking the Digital mapping which can be re-scaled is conﬁdence to speak in group discussions. useful for adjusting the plan to ﬁt the elevation. • Can be left as part of an unmanned exhibition over a period of time. The plan is more understandable if photos are placed directly on the building line. Disadvantages Elevations are more understandable if • Can be costly to prepare and may not be photos are stuck together so that shop cost-effective compared with other signs are readable even if there is some methods. mismatch at roof level.

Table-mounted Photomontages as part of a workshop aimed at generating urban design proposals.

FURTHER INFORMATION

 Methods: Interactive display. Open house event. Photo survey. Ϡ Julie Withers, Kathryn Anderson, Roger Evans Associates.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 59 CPH pages 44-71 10/7/06 12:52 Page 60

AE METHODS Environment shop

Local environment shops provide a permanent Visit our way to disseminate information and create Environment dialogue. They can be independent outﬁts or part of a local regeneration agency or Shop community centre.

For information and ᔢ Ideally, a shop premises in a prominent location with advice on how to a large window area is chosen, perhaps with ofﬁces improve your behind or above. Alternatively, an open air stall or environment spare space in a building is used.

Books • T-shirts ᔢ The shop combines the sale of useful material on Leaﬂets • Posters • Gifts environmental improvement with displays and Noticeboards • Postcards Guides • Window stickers information on local initiatives and projects. Resource packs • Videos Education packs ᔢ The shop provides a ﬁrst port of call for local people on how they can improve their environment, and 20 High Street, Anytown perhaps a public face and reception area for a local Open Mon to Sat, 10am to 5pm regeneration agency or community centre as well.

Mobile shop We can arrange a stall at Setting up can take time and be complicated but, once your local event. established, shops can easily be manned by volunteers. Start with Call for details. a small range of stock and build up slowly.

Sample promotion leaﬂet Once up and running, shop material can easily be taken out to local festivals, markets and conferences.

If ‘Environment shop’ is not the right name for your area try ‘Regeneration shop’, ‘Conservation shop’, etc

$ Main need is for capital to purchase stock and display ﬁttings. ‘Sale or return’ terms can be arranged for many items but requires more administration. Don’t expect environment shops to make large proﬁts although they can bring in useful income. Their value is as a local resource and in helping an agency get its act together (by putting it on show). If well organised they can ultimately relieve pressure on agency staff by allowing people to help themselves.

60 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 44-71 10/7/06 12:52 Page 61

METHODS AE

Shop interior Bird’s eye view photo of neighbourhood; display boards on local projects; publications for loan or sale; somewhere to sit. (Not all shops need to be as smart and tidy as this one.)

Environment shop stock Environment shop features

Books, pamphlets, videos, manuals, postcards, ᔤ Bird’s-eye view photograph of local models, T-shirts relating to: area (very useful for discussing issues and ᔤ Building – how-to-do-it information on always a popular attraction, especially if lit local vernacular building and architecture. up at night and visible from the street). ᔤ General merchandise – to attract people ᔤ Community noticeboard for job ads, in (eg environmental T-shirts, local crafts). competitions, events. ᔤ Local interest – items on past, present ᔤ Magazine rack for periodicals. and future of local environment. ᔤ Model of local area and developments. ᔤ Regeneration generally – how-to-do-it ᔤ Project information board for info on material on community regeneration. local regeneration projects. ᔤ Visitor information – items specifically ᔤ Reception desk for info, access to project, for visitors to the area. purchasing items. ᔤ ...... ᔤ Reference library for items not for sale. ᔤ Seating area for reading and chatting. ᔤ Window display promoting merchandise. ᔤ Window noticeboard with constantly Benefits of shops changing posters on local activities. ᔤ ...... • Addition to local trading environment. • Helps agencies to become user friendly by displaying what they can offer. FURTHER INFORMATION • Helps people to help themself rather than be dependent on development workers.  Methods. Architecture centre. • Provides outlet for local publishers. Community design centre. • Raises profile of local environmental issues Neighbourhood planning office. and projects. Scenario: Urban conservation. • Source of revenue for community development organisations (long-term). Ϡ Photo: Edinburgh World Heritage Trust.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 61 CPH pages 44-71 10/7/06 12:52 Page 62

AF METHODS Feasibility fund

Feasibility funds provide money to community If you need organisations for paying experts to undertake professional advice feasibility studies on possible projects. They to get started on a are a highly effective way of kick-starting local community project initiatives, by getting projects to a stage where they can attract capital funding and support. BUT

ᔢ A Fund is established by a professional institute or Can’t afford the fees other suitable local, regional or national organisation. Sponsors might include companies, local authorities, THEN CONTACT government departments or charities.

The Community Projects Fund ᔢ The scheme is advertised and community groups Institute of Architects invited to apply for funding. High Street, Anytown 000 111 22222 ᔢ Grants are awarded and feasibility studies undertaken. The study will establish whether the ideas are workable, the best options and the costs. “A helping hand at the initial stage has been to us what the first steps are to a child, and ᔢ If projects succeed in attracting capital funding, the today we are walking tall.“ grant money is repaid to the organising body. Celeste Nre, Wandsworth Black Elderly Project, UK RIBA Report, 1995. Grants need not be large to be effective. Depending on the “The Fund satisfies a growing nature of the project, US$1,500 – 5,000 is usually enough to demand for communities to enable a group to produce a highly professional study. The Fund get involved and have a say in can offer the total amount or a proportion. generating something for themselves.“ Money is not the only benefit. The award of a grant can also be Ian Finlay, Chair, RIBA a tremendous boost to community organisations, providing Community Projects Fund confidence and credibility. Report 1986. Award schemes are a good way of generating case study Fact:A feasibility fund run by material for exchanging good practice. the Royal Institute of British Architects triggered US$160 million for 150 projects over $ An initial tranche of funding is required to establish the fund and 12 years from an outlay of less operate it for a few years. Once up and running, quite a high than $2.4 million. proportion may eventually be paid back.

62 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 44-71 10/7/06 12:52 Page 63

METHODS AF

Feasibility fund Application form Types of projects funded Please read the Fund Guidelines before completing. Name of organisation

ᔤ Community centres. New build, or Legal status (community group, charity, etc) improvements. In urban and rural areas. ᔤ Community plans. Plans for a site or neighbourhood, perhaps Contact details as alternatives to those existing. ᔤ Education facilities. Schools, creches, heritage centres, art centres. Do you have a constitution? (if so attach copy) ᔤ Employment initiatives. Creating workspace or improved facilities. ᔤ Housing. Brief description of organisation and activities Renovations or improvements on estates, self build schemes, new housing for rent. ᔤ Landscaping. How is the community involved in the Improvements to public areas: play areas, organisation parks, streetscape, city farms, artworks. ᔤ Leisure facilities. How many people are involved? Employed អ Sports halls, youth clubs, cultural centres. Management committee អ Voluntary អ Other (specify) Project title Feasibility study Description of project Why do you want to undertake the project? A Cultural Centre for Anytown

Prepared for the Anytown Forum Who will beneﬁt from the project? by Hope Architects and Planners What will the feasibility study cover? Contents Summary Background history How much will the study cost? £ The proposal Site conditions Who will do it? (name and contact details) Design options Legal and planning Organisation Other possible sources of income for the study Timetable of activity Costings Funding sources Appendices Please submit a photo of the building or site and a Press cuttings copy of your latest annual report and accounts. Survey results

Study supported by the National Feasibility Fund FURTHER INFORMATION for Community Projects  Scenarios: Community centre, Regeneration infrastructure. Sample cover Good feasibility studies are one of the most b Community Architecture Group. effective ingredients for getting projects to happen.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 63 CPH pages 44-71 10/7/06 12:52 Page 64

AF METHODS Field workshop

Field workshops are a way for local communities to draw up plans of action where there is little data available to start with. They are particularly suited to disaster prevention work in developing countries.

ᔢ Field workshops involve a team of technical experts working closely with a handful of local facilitators, local ofﬁcials and many local residents of all ages, backgrounds and interests.

ᔢ A programme of activities lasting several days or even weeks is prepared in advance involving community proﬁling, risk assessment and plan making methods. The programme is agreed in advance by all parties but may be varied at any point to allow for results to be built on and developed.

ᔢ The aim is to develop a common understanding of the nature of the community, the issues faced and possible solutions.

ᔢ The technical team presents its recommendations to the whole community a few days after the main activity sessions.

Technical team members need to be sensitive to local cultures. Ask permission before taking photos or taping interviews.

Evolving a common view Group working. Informal walk. $ Planning a ﬁeld workshop carefully in advance is essential if Model making. Mapping. money is to be spent effectively. Materials need not cost much. The main costs will be people’s time and accommodation and travel for the team.

64 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 44-71 10/7/06 12:52 Page 65

METHODS AF

Sample field workshop format and politicians (by some). Example: Village suffering from typhoons. 13.00 - 16.00 Review session. For research team and facilitators. DAY 1 Information gathered so far 08.00 - 08.10 Ice breaker. Music. Dance. structured using a matrix. 08.10 - 10.00 Introductions. Participants Process reviewed. introduce themselves. Aims and 13.00 - 20.00 Construction workshop. process explained. Scale models of houses built by 10.00 - 12.00 Personal history. A few local carpenters to identify participants tell their history. structural problems. Queries by 12.00 - 13.00 Historical profile. Key events research team. Discussion. listed in date order. 15.00 - 19.00 Gender workshop. 14.00 - 16.00 Map drawing. Large map of Participants divide into male village drawn on paper. and female groups. Analysis of 16.00 - 17.00 Photo game. Photos of all different roles and buildings (taken previously) responsibilities. located on map. Discussion. 19.00 - 19.30 Informal walk. For research 18.30 - 21.00 Social. Music and dinner. team and facilitators. 21.00 - 23.00 Review session. Day’s DAY 4 activities reviewed. Plans revised 09.00 - 13.00 Interviews. Further questions if necessary. to key figures. DAY 2 09.00 - 13.00 Construction workshop. 07.00 - 08.00 Review of Day 1. Continued. 09.30 - 12.00 Interviews. Key public figures 09.00 - 13.00 Gender workshop. (cont.) explain their roles and are 14.30 - 16.00 Summary session. Review of questioned. activities by research team. 09.00 - 13.00 Model making. Model made 14.30 - 16.00 Next steps. Workshop groups Group A of village showing hills, rivers, prepare list of recommendations. valleys and other main features. 19.00 - 24.00 Social. Dinner and music. 09.00 - 13.00 Map making. Map made Group B showing different house types DAYS 5-9 (eg concrete, bamboo, mud, All day Research and analysis. timber). Research team prepares report 14.00 - 16.00 Simulation exercise. and presentation. Disaster simulated to DAY 10 understand people’s reactions. 20.00 - 22.00 Presentation. Research team (eg to typhoon) presents proposals to open 16.30 - 17.30 Damage classification. community meeting. Models and maps used to classify extent of damage (total Ideal numbers: destruction, damage to roof, research team 4; partial damage etc) facilitators 2; locals 20-50. 19.00 - 21.00 Review and planning. Review of activities and process. Schedule revised. FURTHER INFORMATION DAY 3 08.30 - 12.00 Reconnaissance. Of buildings  Method: Simulation. Scenario: Shanty and sites identified in previous settlement upgrading. day’s review. ” Reducing Risk. 09.00 - 12.00 Interviews. With key officials Ϡ Roger Bellers, Nick Hall.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 65 CPH pages 44-71 10/7/06 12:52 Page 66

AF METHODS Future search conference

Future search conferences are highly structured events, usually lasting 2.5 days, at which a cross-section of community members or ‘stakeholders’ create a shared vision for the future. They are more suited for dealing with general issues than speciﬁc sites.

ᔢ People representing the widest possible range of Time lines interests, or ‘stakeholder’ groups, are brought Participants create personal, together in one room, usually for 2.5 days. The ideal community and global histories by writing key events on large number is considered to be 64 since this breaks strips of paper on the walls. down into 8 groups of 8. For larger groups, This helps to make history conferences can be run in parallel. The agenda is: visible, discover patterns and understand what the past ‘The Future of ______5 to 20 years on’. means. ᔢ A highly structured 5-step procedure is adopted (as summarised in the sample timetable, right). This is “I’ve not heard so many great designed to encourage people to think globally, ideas expressed in such a focus on the future, identify common ground and variety of clever and articulate ways… I don’t know what make public commitments to action. benchmarks you use but by my lights this is the most useful, People carry out tasks individually, in small self- tangible, actionable output ᔢ that I’ve ever seen.” managed workshops and as a whole group. Dennis Alter, Chairman & CEO, Advanta Corporation Future Search Website intro, ‘99. ᔢ The results are recorded openly on ﬂipcharts.

“Staging a future search means changing our assumptions about large, diverse groups. In At least one experienced facilitator is essential plus a committed these meetings we learn that group to plan the event in advance and follow it up afterwards. most people can bridge lines of The conference must be part of a wider and longer process. culture, class, gender, ethnicity, power, status and hierarchy if Discourage non-participating observers. All those present should they will work as peers on take an active part. tasks of mutual concern.” Marvin Weisbord and Sandra Janoff $ Main costs: Venue, meals and facilitation fees. Can range from Future Search Website intro, ‘99. US$4,000 to $60,000. $8,000 – $16,000 is common.

66 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 44-71 10/7/06 12:52 Page 67

METHODS AF

1960s ៉ 1970s ៉ 1980s Future Search Global (Time Line 60 x 720cm) Mind Map

Conference Timetable 1960s

Sample to use as a basis for designing Personal your own. ៉ 1980s 1970s (T ៉ DAY 1 720cm) x 60 Line ime 13.00–18.00 Introduction. ime Line 60 x 720cm) (T ៉ 1970s Review the past 1980s ៉ Participants explore key events in the histories of themselves, Resource

their community and the world, Community Table

and present them on three 1960s time-lines. Ideal room layout Eight tables with eight chairs per table; a resource Explore the present table (for marker pens, notepads, etc); large Trends affecting the community sheets of paper on the walls for drawing three are explored and illustrated by time-lines and a mind map. creating a mind map. Groups share what they are proud of and sorry about.

DAY 2 9.00–12.00 Continue with exploring the present. 12.00–18.00 Create ideal futures Visions developed in small groups and acted out to everyone. Barriers to the visions identified. Mind mapping Identify common ground A large ‘map’ of present trends and linkages is Shared vision identified, first by created on the wall with coloured marker pens. small groups and then by Participants then fix sticky coloured dots onto everyone. Projects to achieve it those they think most important. This helps identified. everybody focus on talking about the same issues. (p54 for mind map detail.) DAY 3 9.00–13.00 Make action plans FURTHER INFORMATION Projects planned by self- selected action groups. Public  Scenario: Whole settlement strategy. commitments to action. ” Future Search (contains sample worksheets and checklists which are Ideal numbers highly recommended). 64 (8 tables of 8). b New Economics Foundation. Future Search Network.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 67 CPH pages 44-71 10/7/06 12:52 Page 68

AG METHODS Gaming

Games are a good way to help people understand the planning process and other people’s viewpoints. They are also an enjoyable way to get people working together. They are particularly useful at an early stage of any community planning activity or to prepare people for a speciﬁc challenge ahead.

Board game ᔢ Games are devised to mirror real life planning One way of discovering about scenarios or to teach speciﬁc skills. the housing development process. The game uses hurdles, gates and tradeoffs ᔢ The games are mostly played in groups, usually which players negotiate as they proceed through the planning helped by a facilitator or someone who has played process. Designed to be played them before. Many games involve role play; people at the start of a planning acting as if they were someone else. workshop to inform and “break the ice” between participants (see the book ᔢ There is usually no speciﬁc output other than Action Planning for Cities for details.) increased awareness but they may produce preliminary design proposals or an agenda for future initiatives needed.

When role playing, wearing badges with the name or title of the person being imitated and even suitable hats can help people feel at ease.

Make people play someone with a very different role to themselves. For example, a planner could play being a poor child; a female tenant could play a male housing ofﬁcer.

Sometimes it can be interesting to have the person playing a role being advised by the real thing; ie the resident playing at being a Theatre planner being advised by a real planner. Powerful architect on stilts confronts a determined tenant Games are good energisers and help overcome shyness. in a performance on a housing estate designed to engage residents in conversation about $ Main costs in use: Facilitator’s fees. Developing and producing their environment. some games can be expensive in time and artwork.

68 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 44-71 10/7/06 12:52 Page 69

METHODS AG

Urban design role play Game types game format Board games Adaptations of popular board games to Format for a role play game allowing people simulate planning and design scenarios. to explore planning issues that may arise in the coming years. Picture analysis Getting people to say what they see in a 1 Pick an issue picture and comparing notes. Facilitator introduces game and helps Role play people to agree on an issue or site as the Acting out being in someone else’s shoes. focus of the game (eg local transport improvements). (10 mins) Storytelling Reciting real or imaginary tales as a way of 2 List interests exploring hidden perceptions. All the parties with an interest in, or Theatre affected by, the issue are listed on a Performing plays to characterise real life and ﬂipchart (eg pedestrians, bus drivers, stimulate debate. transport planners, cyclists, etc). (5 mins)

3 Give out roles Everyone is given a role which is written on their name badge. (5 mins)

4 List desires and concerns People think about what someone in the role they have been given would want. (10 mins)

5 Presentation Everyone in turn presents their points to the whole group with visual explanation if possible. (20 mins)

6 Dealing Acting someone else’s role People mingle freely and attempt to make Local resident pretending to be a public ofﬁcial deals with each other. (30 mins) speaking at a planning hearing. Exercise designed to help residents deal better with a forthcoming 7 Report back hearing about their area. Everyone reports back to the whole group on what they have achieved. (15 mins)

8 Next steps FURTHER INFORMATION General debate on how to take things forward. (15 mins)  Method: Simulation. ” Action Planning for Cities. Participatory Running time: 100 mins Learning and Action. Ideal numbers: 10-20 per workshop Ϡ Urban design game format devised by Drew Mackie.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 69 CPH pages 44-71 10/7/06 12:52 Page 70

OAI METHODSMETHOD Ideas competition

Ideas competitions are a good way of ANYTOWN stimulating creative thinking and generating 2050 interest and momentum. They can be designed to allow everyone a chance to put forward Visions for their ideas or be just for professionals. Anytown ᔢ Ideas competitions are normally held at the start of Competition the development process or when there is Open competition for the opposition to a proposed scheme. They can be best ideas for improving simple and immediate or highly complex. the environment of Anytown ᔢ A brief is produced, clearly setting out the task, What could be done to make your street, your entry format and deadline, judging procedure, neighbourhood, your town eligibility and relevant background. The task can be centre ﬁt for the year 2050? to produce general ideas for improving an area or How can we create a new proposals for a speciﬁc site, building or problem. sense of vision to give our town a much needed boost? Over £1000 in prizes ᔢ Judging can done by a panel or through using a to be won public voting system (see box, right). Alternatively Categories: different organisations can make separate awards. Under 8, 8-11, 12-17, 18-24, 25 and over.

Words, drawings, or photos on one sheet of A3 paper. Name, address and age on ᔢ Winning entries are widely publicised and published reverse. As many entries as you want.

Entries by 6 May to: to secure momentum for implementation. Jumbo, 20 High Street.

Exhibition and judging by the general public all weekend on Getting the public to judge entries encourages people to present 7 and 8 May at the Hexagon. better and provides credibility for the winning entries. If you have The best ideas will be published in a a judging panel, make sure it is not dominated by professionals. special supplement of the local paper. Organised by Anytown Forum in Specify a format which is accessible to non-professionals and association with Darwin plc easy to store and copy, eg A4 or A3 maximum. Models or large panels are good for exhibitions but difﬁcult to keep, so photograph Open ideas competition them properly. Think about publication from the outset. Sample promotion leaﬂet.

$ Simple competitions for local sites can be organised very simply and cheaply. High proﬁle competitions will involve considerable time and expense. Main costs: Administration; publicity; prizes; publishing end results. Plenty of scope for sponsorship.

70 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 44-71 10/7/06 12:52 Page 71

METHODS AI

Simple public Two-stage competition judging rules format Sample timetable for a fairly elaborate Register at the desk and get your sticky dots. 2-stage competition combining an open Each person has three votes in each age competition for the public with a closed category. competition for professional teams. Red = ﬁrst choice (3 points) Jan Preparation yellow = second choice (2 points) Formation of co-ordinating body. Planning. green = third choice (1 point) Mar Printing Brief and publicity material. Stick your dots on the entries. April Launch The entries with the most points by 7pm win. Widespread publicity. Detailed brief and Prizes to be presented by the Mayor at 7.30pm conditions sent to those who respond. July Stage 1 deadline Stage 1 open to all with separate categories for professionals as well as for children. Aug Public exhibition Judging by public or panel. Small prizes. Sept Stage 2 announced Limited number of winning entrants provided with a budget to develop their schemes further. Nov Stage 2 deadline Dec Public exhibition Judging by public or panel. Winners Judging in public, by the public, on site announced. Passers-by use sticky dots to register their May Publication preferences for proposals for a derelict site which Winning entries published. are pinned up on the site hoarding.

FURTHER INFORMATION

 Scenarios: Derelict site re-use. Regeneration infrastructure. Standard format Asking entrants to draw their proposals on b Architecture Foundation. Royal Institute prepared bird’s eye view site outlines can help of British Architects. people make comparisons but may restrict creativity.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 71 CPH pages 72-101 11/7/06 09:43 Page 72

AI METHODS Interactive display

Interactive displays allow people to engage in the issues and debate, on their own and in an enjoyable way, by making additions or alterations to pre-prepared exhibits.

Tools for participants Post-it notes, sticky dots ᔢ Interactive displays can be used as part of a forum, (several colours), coloured felt- workshop, exhibition, conference or other event. tip pens and ballpoint pens.

ᔢ The displays can range from blank sheets with simple one-line questions to drawings or models of complex development proposals.

ᔢ A dynamic develops as people’s comments build up on the displays over time.

ᔢ Thoughtful design is required to ensure that the information is presented simply and clearly and that people’s responses are recorded in such a way that they can be used afterwards.

Flip chart comment sheet More visible than a book. Have facilitators on hand to help people get going. Once responses start to build up, the process develops its own momentum.

Shop front or on-the-street venues work well as people are attracted by others taking part (Street Stall).

Photograph displays – or use other ways or recording them – before dismantling them.

$ Main costs: artwork and materials. Simple displays can be designed and prepared within a few minutes and need little equipment. Employing graphic or exhibition designers improves Cumulative comments effectiveness immensely, particularly for getting responses to Adding points to those typed complex design ideas but will normally cost a considerable up from a workshop. amount in fees.

72 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 72-101 11/7/06 09:43 Page 73

METHODS I

Sticky dot display Voting for liked and disliked buildings and spaces.

Post-it board ideas Interactive display ideas Headings for four blank boards which people can stick Post-it notes on (or use scraps of Verbal likes, dislikes and ideas paper and drawing pins): Put up large sheets of blank paper with • What do you LIKE about the area? suitable headings (see box, left) and get • What do you DISLIKE about the area? people to put their responses on Post-its. • What IMPROVEMENTS could be made? Visual likes, dislikes and ideas • What can YOU do to help? Ask people to mark their most and least favourite buildings and spaces on maps or Post-it board Comments build up in response to photos using Post-its or sticky dots. a simple question. Comments on proposals Get people’s views on development proposals or options by placing sticky dots or Post-its on prepared cards linked to plans or drawings. Table scheme display. General thoughts Use ﬂipcharts or comment books to get general comments.

FURTHER INFORMATION

 Methods: Community planning forum. Elevation montage. Open house event. Street stall. Table scheme display. Scenarios: Community centre. Whole settlement strategy.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 73 CPH pages 72-101 11/7/06 09:43 Page 74

AL METHODS Local design statement

Local design statements are a way for local Any Village people to provide guidelines for new Design development in their area. They can be Statement incorporated in local planning policy and

Produced by the provide a valuable way for local people to Any Village Design Group make a positive input into the planning Approved as process at an early stage. They are particularly Supplementary Planning Guidance in 1998 by useful in areas where local character is Any District Council threatened by insensitive development. Contents 1 Introducing Any Village 2 Brief history ᔢ A local design statement is drawn up by a specially 3 Community strengths formed team of local volunteers, preferably 4 Economy and commerce 5 Landscape and wildlife supported by local planners and national agencies. 6 Settlement patterns 7 Building types and forms 8 Conservation areas ᔢ The team secures the views of as many people as 9 Plot boundaries 10 Highways and footpaths possible through publicity, holding workshops and 11 Street furniture circulating draft statements for comment. 12 Trees

Supported by the National Neighbourhood ᔢ The statement will include guidance for future Commission developers based on the character of the landscape Sample report cover setting, settlement patterns, building forms and Contents and style can vary transport networks. according to local needs.

ᔢ The statement is adopted by the local planning authority (as ‘supplementary planning guidance’ in the UK) and can be used to approve or reject “You saw the village in a planning applications from developers. completely different way than you ever had before. You really started to look at every single The area covered by a statement can vary but the process works gable end, bit of tarmac and best at a village or neighbourhood level where people recognise cobblestone. That was the each other. Break larger areas up and, if possible, combine with a most exciting thing, you learnt Countryside Design Summary (Glossary). so much. It was an all round good exercise.” David Unsworth, Cartmel $ Direct costs likely to be around US$5,000 if local skills and services Village Design Group used. More if elaborate printing involved. Need to have a budget Village Views video, 1996. for reprints, especially in areas of development pressure.

74 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 72-101 11/7/06 09:43 Page 75

METHODS AL

Reviewing progress Villagers review pages with photographs and captions prepared during a local character workshop.

4 Prepare design statement report Sample local design Expand design team. Reﬁne and complete statement process survey. Draft report. Consult on draft (Participatory editing). (3 months) 1 Establish design team 5 Consult with local planning authority Small group of local people. Read Agree draft with planners and planning handbooks. Discuss with planning committee. (2 months) authority. Prepare publicity. (1 month) 6 Print report 2 Go public Print report and distribute widely. Keep it Launch publicity. Draw in more participants. in print and available. (2 months) Prepare for workshop. (1 month) Total running time: 9 months 3 Local character workshop minimum. Can take up to 18 months. One-day event open to all. Main stages: A Mapping in groups to identify key walks, areas and landmarks on base maps. (Mapping). B Photographic survey in groups taking photos which capture the character of the area (Photo survey). Lunch while photos are developed. FURTHER INFORMATION C Character assessment. Each group  Methods: Mapping. Photo survey. prepares presentation on character of Participatory editing. Scenario: Village the area using photos and maps. revival. D Presentation and discussion. Groups ” Village Design. Village Views. present their work. General discussion on local character and the next steps. b Countryside Agency.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 75 CPH pages 72-101 11/7/06 09:43 Page 76

MA METHODS Mapping

Mapping is an effective non-verbal way of ﬁnding out how people view their area. It is a good way to gather and present site-speciﬁc data, understand differences in perception and stimulate debate as a basis for joint planning.

ᔢ Individuals or groups create physical maps of their neighbourhood or city using pen and paper, lines in the sand, cloth, chalk or other materials to hand.

ᔢ A framework or theme is normally provided to focus people’s thoughts, eg places you visit frequently, landmarks, boundaries, places you dislike, things you would like to see.

ᔢ The maps are discussed and analysed as a basis for understanding differing viewpoints and planning what should be done. Different perspectives Two maps of the same place, one drawn by a woman, one ᔢ Records of maps and debates are made for future by a man. Guess which is which. reference. (Maps redrawn from originals.)

Use symbols rather than words if participants are unable to read.

Using tracing paper to build up layers can be useful, getting different information on each layer.

Mapping the same thing at different times is a good way of monitoring progress.

Maps made or left in a public place provide a good focus for discussion. Particularly good in schools – children love maps.

Using symbols and colour Maps can be very attractive. With some thought they can Mapping various aspects of a become permanent exhibits or even made into postcards! community’s capacity to cope with natural disasters helps planning to reduce their $ Depends on materials used and cost of facilitation. Need not cost impact. anything.

76 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 72-101 11/7/06 09:43 Page 77

METHODS AM

ideas Group mapping process Map types and uses

1 Purpose mapsActivity of mapsame place by different people Decide what the map or maps should show Shows where people do things, which places (eg land use, hazards, resources, mobility, they visit. Useful for planning future facilities. social facilities) and the best display method. photos of mapping Art map 2 People Aims to be a work of art for displaying at Gather people who know the area and are exhibitions, making into postcards and so on. willing to share their knowledge. Decide whether to work individually or in groups. Hazard map Shows vulnerability to natural or 3 Place and materials environmental hazards and identiﬁes risks and Choose a suitable place (ground, table, wall) capacities. Useful for disaster mitigation. and materials (sticks, stones, seeds, pencils, felt-tips, chalk). Land use and resources map Shows what happens where. 4 Map making Facilitators might help people get started Mental map but then withdraw. Shows how people perceive their area (as opposed to being geographically accurate). 5 Discussion Useful insight into perceptions. Presentation of maps. Discussion on comparisons and lessons drawn. Notes of discussion made on ﬂipchart or in notebook. 6 Record Make a record of the maps on A4 paper for later use and/or take photos. 7 Planning Use the maps to start developing proposals. Running time: 1-2 hours Process also works for diagramming. Replace word ‘map’ with ‘diagram’. Diagrams.

Community mapping Making a village map on the ground using powder. Community mapping allows the less articulate to express their views.

FURTHER INFORMATION

 Methods: Local design statement. Risk assessment. Scenario: Village revival. ” Reducing Risk. 4B. From Place to Place. b Art map Common Ground. Part of a ‘parish map’ used as a postcard Ϡ Drawings taken from 4B. (‘Parish mapping’ in glossary).

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 77 CPH pages 72-101 11/7/06 09:43 Page 78

MA METHODS Microplanning workshop

Microplanning is a comprehensive action planning procedure for producing development plans for upgrading settlements. Originally designed for use in developing countries, it is based on regular intensive workshops which involve a minimum of preparation, materials and training.

Structured group working ᔢ The microplanning procedure involves 8 to 12 Participants complete charts on community representatives working closely with a large sheets of paper which are then displayed on the walls. small team of experts and facilitators for several days.

ᔢ A sequence of activities (see example in box, right) People needed is worked through to arrive at a development plan and work programme. ᔤ Community representatives Cross-section of local ᔢ The process is structured by charts on large sheets population. 8 – 12 people. ᔤ Logistics officer of paper which are completed and kept as a record. Provides training materials. Government officer. The workshops are repeated every year or so to ᔤ Projects Officer ᔢ Responsible for monitor progress and plan the next stages. implementing results. Local government officer. ᔤ Specialists Technical experts (eg Facilitators must have the confidence of all participants and health, engineering, should participate in a workshop to understand its dynamics social development). before running one themselves. As many as appropriate. ᔤ Team facilitator Hold workshops in the community rather than in government Directs procedure. offices to make local people feel more in control. Practitioner or academic. ᔤ Workshop facilitators Do not treat the chart format as a straitjacket. If the one you Conduct small workshop planned does not seem to work, revise it as you go along. groups (usually 3 needed). Selected from participants. $ Costs are minimal apart from organisers’ and participants’ time.

78 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 72-101 11/7/06 09:43 Page 79

METHODS AM

Sample Microplanning Process b) Negotiate and select agreed options. Strategy STAGE 1: IDENTIFY PROBLEMS Agreed actions needed 1 ______a) Reconnaissance. Survey of locality. 2 ______b) Prepare list of problems. Problem Why? To who? Where? ______STAGE 4: ALLOCATE TASKS a) List tasks required to achieve each action.

c) Prioritise problems Action Tasks Who What When How Agreed summary list of problems 1 ______1 ______2 ______2 ______

STAGE 2: IDENTIFY STRATEGY OPTIONS b) Locate improvements Make plans, sections, sketches. a) List possible strategies (perhaps in small groups). Problem Short-term Long-term Strategy Strategy STAGE 5: MONITOR AND EVALUATE ______This stage takes place weeks, months or years ______later. Also perhaps at the beginning to review any previously planned actions. b) Compare different groups’ priorities. a) Describe the status of each action. Strategy All 2 teams 1 team Action Progress agree agree agrees Planned ______ᔤ ᔤᔤ ______ᔤ ᔤᔤ ______

c) Agree strategy priorities. b) Draw lessons. Agreed summary list Action Corrective Lessons Problem Strategy Planned action learned 1 ______needed 2 ______STAGE 3: PLAN ACTIONS NEEDED a) List actions needed to achieve each strategy. Running time: 2-5 days Consider options, eg high and low cost. FURTHER INFORMATION Strategy Actions needed high low  Scenario: Shanty settlement upgrading. cost cost ” Community Action Planning. ______ᔤᔤ Action Planning for Cities. ______ᔤᔤ b Centre for Development and Emergency Practice (CENDEP). Ϡ Nabeel Hamdi

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 79 CPH pages 72-101 11/7/06 09:43 Page 80

MA METHODS Mobile unit

Mobile units can make it easier to provide the technical support necessary for community planning activity. They are particularly useful for working in communities lacking facilities or where a series of similar events are planned in several locations. Mobile planning aid Volkswagen van used for ᔢ Mobile units can range from a van used to transport transporting exhibition material and model-making equipment an exhibition to a mobile home or trailer converted to communities as part of a into a fully equipped design studio. planning aid service.

ᔢ The choice of vehicle is determined by its intended use, the size required and whether it needs off-road capability.

ᔢ The units are ﬁtted out with facilities and equipment necessary for the activities planned (see box, right).

ᔢ Suitable graphics are applied to the outside to create the desired image.

Can create a sense of presence and credibility as well as being a useful technical resource.

New technologies in document production may reduce the need for such a facility or at any rate change the requirements. Could end up as an expensive toy. Plan carefully.

$ Costs of conversion can vary. Running costs of maintenance and insurance need to be considered. Savings can include costs of hiring premises and travel costs.

80 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 72-101 11/7/06 09:43 Page 81

METHODS AM

Mobile studio facilities ᔤ Light box. ᔤ Paper cutter or guillotine. ᔤ Computer (for word processing and layout, ᔤ Photocopier. perhaps with modem via mobile phone). ᔤ Print machine (for large drawings). ᔤ Dark room (for printing slides and prints). ᔤ Stationery cupboard (notepads, Post-its ᔤ Drawing boards. etc). ᔤ Exhibition panels (perhaps for display on ᔤ Storage for drawings and photos. the outside of the unit). ᔤ Toilet and washroom. ᔤ Flipcharts. ᔤ Video player. ᔤ Library of technical literature. ᔤ ......

5 4 11 2 3

6 1

9 10 7 8

1 Drawing Centre 5 Computer centre 9 Darkroom 2 Storage cupboard 6 Cockpit 10 Storage cupboard 3 Bathroom 7 Typing area 11 Equipment cupboard 4 Reproduction area 8 Kitchen

Mobile design studio FURTHER INFORMATION Custom converted 38-foot recreation vehicle used as a design studio for community planning  Scenario: New neighbourhood. workshops in rural areas. The internal layout is b Ball State University. shown in the drawing above. Ϡ Tony Costello

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 81 CPH pages 72-101 11/7/06 09:43 Page 82

MA METHODS Models

Models are one of the most effective tools for getting people involved in planning and design. They are particularly useful for generating interest, presenting ideas and helping people think in three dimensions.

ᔢ Models can be made from a wide variety of materials. They can be highly elaborate, aiming to be as realistic as possible, or simple and illustrative. The choice will depend on the purpose of the model and the resources and time available.

ᔢ Models are often adaptable so that alternative proposals or options can easily be shown by moving parts around.

Making models ᔢ The construction of models is highly educational A very good way to gain an understanding of how a and enjoyable and is often done in groups as part of building or city is put together. the planning and design process.

Slick presentation models are good for presenting proposals but are usually hard to adapt and so inhibit creativity. Think through the options for construction carefully at the outset. Generally, use materials that are easily available and simple to cut up, shape, ﬁx, colour and move about. Pasting base-maps or plans onto a rigid board is a good way to get started, and it ensures that you get the scale right.

Models are an ideal centrepiece for exhibitions, workshops and venues such as architecture centres.

$ Models can cost very little if scrap materials are used. Presentation models can be extremely expensive. The main cost involved though is time. One innovative way of paying for detailed models of a neighbourhood is to get building owners to pay for the cost of having their own buildings upgraded from simple blocks or cut-outs to being fully detailed and painted.

82 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 72-101 11/7/06 09:43 Page 83

METHODS AM

Neighbourhood model Street model Buildings made from wood blocks and glued onto Buildings made out of folded cardboard and a wooden baseboard. Good for displaying outside glued onto a cardboard base board. Very ﬂexible and generating attention. Very durable. Need a but not durable. Good focal point for design workshop to make one. workshops and interactive exhibitions.

House model Room layout model Large-scale model using cardboard, allowing Simple cardboard model scaled to help people people to be involved in designing their homes to design room layouts. The one shown was used by a high level of detail. blind people designing a new centre for the blind.

FURTHER INFORMATION

 Method: Planning for Real. Scenarios: Community centre. Housing development.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 83 CPH pages 72-101 11/7/06 09:43 Page 84

AN METHODS Neighbourhood planning ofﬁce

Neighbourhood planning ofﬁces provide an important local focal point for community planning activity and make it easier to follow up and sustain initiatives. Ideally every neighbourhood should have one, but they are particularly valuable in rundown areas or where there is a lot of building activity.

Local presence ᔢ Neighbourhood offices should be in a prominent Architects set up office in a flat location, preferably with a shop frontage. on a housing estate which they are rehabilitating. ᔢ They provide a working base for all professionals dealing with an area, a venue for meetings and workshops and a first point of contact for local people on planning and building issues.

ᔢ They should be staffed by people with project management skills able to take a pro-active role in pursuing improvement initiatives.

Neighbourhood planning ofﬁces often work best if managed by an independent body or partnership. Avoid total community control or total local authority control.

Useful to base an ofﬁce in a rundown building which can be renovated as a pilot project to stimulate other local improvements. Great scope for volunteers and trainees to run an ofﬁce once it is set up.

Combining a neighbourhood planning ofﬁce with an environment shop, community design centre or architecture centre can be a powerful combination. Demonstration project Before and after of a shop used $ Main costs: salaries, rent, heating, lighting, furniture and as a neighbourhood planning equipment. Costs can be reduced by seconding professional and ofﬁce and as a demonstration technical staff and using volunteers to handle general enquiries for improving street frontages. and administration. From US$15,000 to $150,000 per annum.

84 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 72-101 11/7/06 09:43 Page 85

METHODS AN

window window Neighbourhood planning ofﬁce display display eet

information systems  om str ᔤ Community proﬁle information reception model ᔤ Development plans of aerial photo visible fr ᔤ Local history area ᔤ Local organisations and contacts ᔤ Maps: varying scales storage chandise ᔤ Photos: Aerial, historical, current

seating coffee mer ᔤ Planning applications ᔤ Product catalogues Ground floor: shop/exhibition ᔤ Project files: A–Z ᔤ Property files: Building or plot ᔤ Statutory plans ᔤ ...... een scr slide projector flexible table units overhead projector wc exhibition First floor: meetings room

 photocopier eception 2 r Resident resource  Local residents looking through product catalogues to specify design work on their homes. kitchen desks with shelving above and ﬁling below

Second ﬂoor: workspace

Sample layout Ideal layout for a well-resourced neighbourhood planning office with public shop/exhibition area, semi-public seminar room and private workspace. Minimum tolerable size: 375 square feet per floor (15 x 25). Even better if all facilities are on ground floor. If resources are not available, make do with whatever space you can find.

FURTHER INFORMATION  Methods: Architecture centre. Community Professional base design centre. Environment shop. Architect helps residents at a weekly surgery at an Scenario: Local neighbourhood initiative. ofﬁce manned by trainees and volunteers.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 85 CPH pages 72-101 11/7/06 09:43 Page 86

AN METHODS Newspaper supplement

Newspaper supplements are one of the most effective ways of spreading planning and design ideas to large numbers of people and generating public debate. They are particularly useful for presenting proposals from action planning events, especially if combined with other coverage before and afterwards.

ᔢ A working relationship is established between those promoting community planning initiatives and the local paper’s editors and journalists.

Public proﬁle for planning Supplement cover (above) and ᔢ Standard newspaper coverage is used to publicise inside page illustration (below) activities and generate debate: news stories, feature showing analysis of an area. articles, letters, legal notices, guest columnists.

ᔢ Special supplements are used to provide in-depth coverage of planning proposals and community planning activities.

ᔢ Feedback is generated through the letters pages, readership polls and follow-up features.

Persuade editors to allow design teams to help lay out supplements. This forces architects and planners to communicate “Newspapers can play an better and will cut the newspaper’s costs. It can also provide a innovative role in citizen useful educational experience for students. awareness of the planning and design process. They avoid the Order extra copies and distribute to schools and to speciﬁc stigma of being considered an audiences. outsider’s ‘propaganda sheet’ – a phrase sometimes attached to planning documents and $ May well be free if newspaper treats supplement as a commercial special publications.” venture and incorporates advertising. Subsidy may be required, Anthony Costello, Professor particularly if extra copies are wanted. Full cost still cheap of Architecture, Ball State compared with printing a special report. An 8-page supplement University in black and white might typically cost around US$650 for 6,500 Small Town, Jan/Feb 1983. copies, ie 10 cents per copy.

86 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 72-101 11/7/06 09:43 Page 87

METHODS AN

Clear graphics Advantages of a supplement Double-page spread from a special 8-page supplement produced during a 3-day planning Cheap. Inexpensive compared with producing weekend. Published and distributed with the local and distributing a special report. paper on the ﬁnal day of the weekend, a few Coverage. Reaches a very high proportion of hours before a public presentation by the design the population (in most areas). team. Key features: concise writing; clear and understandable drawings; simple sequence. Credibility. Has greater credibility than a report produced by consultants. Familiarity. Feels less threatening than most specially produced planning reports. Format. Large format allows drawings to be FURTHER INFORMATION published at a reasonable scale. Immediacy. Very quick publication and  Methods: Design assistance team. distribution. The results of one day’s workshop Participatory editing. Planning weekend. can be distributed the next day. Scenario: New neighbourhood. b Ball State University. Skills. Brings expert journalistic skills to bear. Ϡ Anthony Costello.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 87 CPH pages 72-101 11/7/06 09:43 Page 88

OA METHODS Open house event

Open house events allow those promoting development initiatives to present them to a wider public and secure reactions in an informal manner. They are less structured than a workshop and more informal than a traditional exhibition.

ᔢ Open house events can be organised at any stage of the design and development process by any of the parties. They can last from a few hours to several weeks.

ᔢ The venue will be arranged with a number of Inviting people in displays on the proposals and options using a Pavement sign encouraging passers-by to visit an open variety of interactive display techniques (see plan, house event in a vacant shop right). Organisers will be present to deal with on the future of the area. queries and engage in informal debate.

ᔢ Material collected will be analysed afterwards and used to further develop the initiative.

Good way to gauge initial public reaction to development proposals or options. Particularly useful for getting public involvement in proposals from a design workshop or planning day.

There is no need to present drawings in an elaborate way, but careful thought needs to be given to highlighting the main “I’ve been a councillor for 12 points and on determining how reactions are obtained. Well years and I’ve never been worth engaging professional exhibition design skills if available. involved in an exercise like this before. We should be doing Prominent on-site venues work best, for instance an empty shop. this for all of our towns instead  of development control which is awful.” Main costs: Hire of venue and exhibition material; staff time; Leader of Waverley Borough $ design time (3 person days). Council after a design workshop and open house event, 1997.

88 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 72-101 11/7/06 09:43 Page 89

METHODS AO

FURTHER INFORMATION

Methods: Elevation montage. Interactive display. Table scheme display. Scenarios: Community centre. Derelict site re-use. Inner city regeneration. New neighbourhood. Town centre upgrade. Whole settlement strategy.

Relaxed atmosphere People move freely from display to display and hold discussions

with the organisers.

 4  3  

 2

7  7  7   

 6  12 1

 

8    

9 10 11  ៌ Sample layout in shop unit

1 Entry desk. Take Post-its, pens, sticky dots 7 Table scheme displays. Use sticky dots to (Red=Dislike. Green=Like. Yellow=Not sure). make your views known on proposals already drawn up. Table scheme display. 2 Welcome panel. Read about history and aim of present initiative. 8 Draw your own. Sketch your own ideas with felt-tips on tracing paper laid over base 3 Participant data. Stick dots on panels to plans. show where you live/work, age group and other relevant statistics. 9 What next. Read about it. 4 Issues, goals and action needed. Use Post- 10 Help. Sign up if you can offer any assistance. its to make additional points to those listed. 11 Comments. Write on ﬂipcharts any 5 Likes and dislikes. Put stickers on map to show comments not already covered. favourite and least favourite buildings/spaces. 12 Further information. Write your name and 6 Visions. Add Post-it comments to sketches of address if you want to receive further area visions (preferably before and after). information as things develop.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 89 CPH pages 72-101 11/7/06 09:43 Page 90

AO METHODS Open space workshop

The Law Open space workshops provide a highly democratic framework for enabling any group of people to create their own programme of discussions on almost any theme without much preparation. They are particularly useful for dealing with general policy issues, for generating enthusiasm and for dealing with urgent issues needing quick action. of 2 Feet

The ‘Law of 2 feet’ ᔢ A theme, venue and time are determined and If at any time you feel you are publicised by the organisers. neither learning nor contributing, move elsewhere (to another workshop or to have a coffee). ᔢ Participants start by sitting in a circle and decide themselves on the issues to discuss, using a simple The four procedure (see format, right) usually guided by a principles facilitator.

• Whoever comes are the right people. ᔢ Workshop sessions are self managed by the • Whenever it starts is the participants within a framework of simple principles right time. • When it’s over, it’s over. and ‘laws’ (see margin, left). Each workshop • Whatever happens is the session develops a list of actions required and who only thing that could happen. should take them.

Four principles ᔢ A report of the event is circulated to all participants. In other words: participation is voluntary; be relaxed about timetabling; move on when there’s no more to say; let go The framework is ﬂexible and can easily be adapted by the of expectations. facilitators or participants. The ‘principles’, ‘laws’ and timetable can be adjusted to take account of local conditions and experience.

“It was fantastic. I felt really Good facilitation is important for setting up the workshop and heard. I learnt lots I didn’t getting people started. Once up and running, the facilitator can know about my local area, and fade into the background. we created some brilliant ideas of what to do. I wish I had brought more of my friends.” $ Main costs: venue, refreshments, stationery (A4 paper, large Workshop participant marker pens, Post-it notes, ﬂipchart paper and masking tape) Hammersmith & Fulham. and facilitator’s fee (if any).

90 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 72-101 11/7/06 09:43 Page 91

METHODS AO

Open space workshop format For minimum length session. For longer events, workshops sessions and open sessions (steps 5 & 6) are repeated.

1 Preparation Set up the space as shown in sketch, right.

2 Introduction Participants sit in a circle. Facilitator explains purpose and procedure. (10 mins)

3 Opening circle – declaring issues Participants are invited to identify issues Starting point they want to convene workshops on. Circle of chairs; bulletin board with workshop People write their issue on a sheet of locations identiﬁed; timetable; posters of paper with their name, read it out (“My ‘principles’ and ‘laws’. name is.... My issue is ...... ”) and place the sheet on the bulletin board in a suitable workshop slot. Several issues can be dealt with in one workshop if there are more issues than slots. (15 mins)

4 Signing up Everyone gathers round the bulletin board and signs up for the workshops they wish to take part in. (15 mins)

5 Workshop sessions Sessions take place. Results are recorded, usually as a simple list of actions required and by whom for each issue. These are Creating an agenda posted on the bulletin board. (60 mins) Participants sign up for which issues they want to discuss in workshop groups, selecting from the 6 Open session menu created by the participants themselves. General debate in a circle after Reports from the workshops can later be posted refreshment break. (30 mins) on the same bulletin board. 5 Final plenary circle Participants make any ﬁnal statements they wish. (15 mins)

6 Report circulated FURTHER INFORMATION Preferably at the end of the event or the next day. Needs only contain the action  Scenario: Local neighbourhood initiative. points and responsibility for them. ” Open Space Technology Running time: 2.5 hours – 3 days b Wikima. Ideal numbers: 20 to 500. Ϡ Romy Shovelton, Adele Wilter.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 91 CPH pages 72-101 11/7/06 09:43 Page 92

AP METHODS Participatory editing

Dear...... Participatory editing allows people to help

FOREST ACTION REPORT shape reports and news-sheets without COMMENTS PLEASE necessarily leaving their own homes. Reports A draft mock up of the have a crucial role to play in crystallising the report arising from the recent design results of community planning initiatives and workshop is enclosed. communicating to others. Please let me have your comments by midday Friday 4 May ᔢ The nature and structure of the product are by tel., fax, post or email. determined by the organisers. A draft is drawn up

Any reactions would be by writers, editors, designers and illustrators. useful. But the best help would be if you could mark up all ᔢ Drafts are circulated, or displayed, for comment. comments as proposed alterations in red pen Participants make comments on the draft with on the draft and return it. And, if coloured pens or Post-its. possible, let me have any long sections of new copy by email so I ᔢ Editors go through the comments and produce a can cut and paste it to reduce the chance revised draft which is approved by the organisers. of typing errors. The process is repeated as necessary. The editing team will produce a revised draft and there will be a final opportunity Explain the process clearly at the outset. Stress that comments to see and discuss this on Saturday 5 May are not automatically included but help the editors make from 2 to 6 at the improvements. Appoint one person as editor-in-chief to avoid warden’s office on lengthy wrangling in the event of disagreements. Collective Hill Street. editing sounds good in principle but rarely works well in practice. Your help will of course be acknowledged Secure a good cross-section of participants. It is quite unless you let me know extraordinary how few comments will normally be duplicated, to the contrary. even with many people responding. sincerely Holding an ‘editing workshop’ can generate ideas that would not Report Editor emerge from individuals. Use pages pinned up on the walls as a basis for discussion (p222). Participation by post and email Always circulate material as close as possible to its ﬁnal form. Sample letter inviting Sending out text without pictures for instance has limited use. comments on a report.

$ Main costs: photocopying; binding; postage; time.

92 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 72-101 11/7/06 09:43 Page 93

METHODS AP

Making comments Speciﬁc suggestions for alterations marked on a draft are more useful than general comments (example shown is from a draft of this book).

Tips on producing reports Sample report structure Simple format which works in most situations. • Keep the structure simple. • Be concise. People don’t read much. 1 Recommendations (1,2,3 etc. The only Lengthy reports are only useful for thing many people will read) massaging egos. Concentrate on getting 2 The Way Forward (issue 1, issue 2 etc. the argument right. Using bullet points and summary paragraphs) headings will help this. 3 Background (why the report is necessary • Be visual. Good images are worth and how it was produced) thousands of words. ‘Before and After’ 4 Issues (Main issues in depth – optional) images are particularly good for conveying 5 Ideas (Everything suggested even if not proposed changes. agreed by everyone – optional) • Using short quotes or ‘soundbites’ from 6 Proposals (what should happen – in detail) people can be very powerful. Appendices (may be separate document) • Make sure you credit everyone accurately. A Workshop notes B Credits C Other relevant info Workshop report structure Simple format to avoid tedious blow-by-blow accounts and assist with compiling reports. FURTHER INFORMATION 1 Workshop title.  Methods: Design assistance team. Local 2 People present – name and organisation. design statement. Scenario: Planning 3 Issues raised – heading and bullet points. study. See also editing workshop format 4 Proposals – heading and bullet points. on page 222.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 93 CPH pages 72-101 11/7/06 09:43 Page 94

AP METHODS Photo survey

Photo surveys help groups develop design ideas by taking and discussing photos of their existing environment. They can be used as part of a wider community proﬁling or action planning event or as an independent exercise.

ᔢ Participants go around their neighbourhood individually or in teams, taking photos of places and images according to a general or speciﬁc theme.

ᔢ After processing, the photos are sorted, selected and placed on large sheets of blank paper or maps. Taking photos Photos can be grouped or cut up and comments Making images of what is important for you in the local may be added using Post-its or felt tips. environment for sharing with others. ᔢ The completed sheets or maps are used as a basis for discussion, analysis and design.

Undertaking the whole exercise in one stretch builds a useful momentum but requires polaroid cameras, a fast development service (over lunch perhaps) or digital cameras and computers. Letting people take photos individually over a week can allow more thought but requires more self discipline.

If not done automatically, record negative numbers on the back of prints before they are used. Get two sets of prints and keep negatives safe.

Before and after photos can be highly effective. Dig out historical photos and take new ones from the same spot.

After the photo survey is completed it can be useful to introduce photos from other places and make comparisons. “I was surprised how the photographs added a new dimension to everyone’s $ Film and processing are expensive. If budgets are tight, give one perception.” ﬁlm to each team and ensure the camera gets handed around. Ning Tan, facilitator Using digital cameras is cheaper but requires more initial Philippine workshop, 1995. investment in equipment.

94 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 72-101 11/7/06 09:43 Page 95

METHODS AP

Photo survey process

Assuming a rapid 1-hour ﬁlm processing facility is available nearby. If not, use polaroid cameras or split into 2 sessions.

1 Briefing. Agree priorities Briefing by facilitator. Agreement of objectives, timescales and themes. Theme examples: • memorable places and images; • beautiful places, ugly places; • places to be alone, to socialise, to play; Sorting photos • private places, public places; Villagers place photos of their own houses on a • ugly buildings, beautiful buildings; large map as an early step in a week-long • threats. planning workshop. Divide into teams and hand out cameras and film. (30 mins).

2 Take photographs Teams go round taking photos. (Teams can have the same or different themes.) (1 – 3 hours, depending on size of area)

3 Process ﬁlms during lunch break Prints produced – standard size are ﬁne. (1.5 hours)

4 Prepare presentation Teams arrange photos on boards or paper Cutting up photos sheets. Symbols and words added on Post- Photos being cut up and pasted on a large map its to record comments, feelings and to create a jigsaw display. Using this technique, evaluations. Relevant photos grouped people contribute photos which they think together. When completed (or time up) characterise their particular area. These are cut up photos pinned or glued down. Sheets to ﬁt the given area of the map (perhaps a parish named and put up on wall. (1 hour) or plot). The end result is a vivid pictorial comparison of how people see their locality. 4 Exhibit Viewing of exhibits. Tea break. (30 mins)

5 Presentation FURTHER INFORMATION Each team presents their images and conclusions to a plenary session. Debate  Methods: Elevation montage. Local and discussion. Areas of agreement and design statement. Mapping. disagreement recorded. (1 hour) Scenario: Village revival. b Ideal numbers: 6 teams of 6–8 max Countryside Commission.  Peter Richards, Deike Richards, Debbie Running time: 5.5 hours minimum. Bartlett.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 95 CPH pages 72-101 11/7/06 09:43 Page 96

AP METHODSMETHOD Planning aid scheme

Planning aid schemes provide free and independent planning advice to groups or individuals who cannot afford to employ a consultant. They aim to give people the knowledge, skills and conﬁdence to deal with the planning system and to become involved in wider planning issues.

ᔢ Planning aid schemes are normally set up and run by national or regional professional institutions.

ᔢ A register of qualiﬁed professional planners prepared to volunteer their time is established.

ᔢ People needing help are put in touch with the nearest suitable volunteer on the register.

ᔢ The volunteer assists as much as possible, referring queries to the authorities or consultants if appropriate.

ᔢ As schemes become well established they may Promotion leaﬂets employ paid workers, establish telephone helplines, Ingredients: Title; Area covered; What planning aid is; produce publications and become more pro-active What kind of help can be in encouraging community participation. given; How much it will cost; Examples of help given; Who to contact. Government grant assistance is useful for setting up and administering planning aid systems.

Producing information sheets on the planning system and common problems and issues can make the volunteer’s job much easier.

Need not be restricted to planners. ‘Architectural aid’, ‘Surveying aid’ and so on can also be very valuable.

$ Setting-up costs: administration in compiling register; distributing publicity material. Ongoing costs: dealing with enquiries.

96 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 72-101 11/7/06 09:43 Page 97

METHODS AP

Government Planning aid advice services funding National office Overall scheme checklist publicity and funding. ᔤ Appealing against a refusal of planning permission. ᔤ Appearing at a public inquiry. Regional offices ᔤ Applying for planning permission. Register of local ᔤ Drawing up community plans and local professional design statements. volunteers. Local publicity. ᔤ Guidance on development proposals and specific site problems. ᔤ How the planning system works. ᔤ How to find information and contact the right people. Professional ᔤ Objecting to or supporting a planning volunteers application or planning appeal. ᔤ Putting forward your own views when Planning aid network local plans are being prepared. The scheme is coordinated by the national office ᔤ The rights of an individual or group on of a professional institution. Regional branches planning matters. publicise the scheme locally and maintain ᔤ The need for planning permission. registers of professional planners willing to work ᔤ Understanding enforcement procedures. in a voluntary capacity. ᔤ Understanding the many types of development plans. ᔤ Using the most effective public participation methods. ᔤ ......

Beneﬁts for professionals

• Opportunity to take part in a wide range of activities including environmental education. • Satisfaction in helping people participate in the development of their communities. • Useful source of continuing professional FURTHER INFORMATION development.  Scenario: Regeneration infrastructure. • Valuable insight into the planning system from a user’s point of view. b Royal Town Planning Institute (National Planning Aid Co-ordinator).

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 97 CPH pages 72-101 11/7/06 09:43 Page 98

P METHODS Planning day

Dear______, Planning days are a good way for getting the key parties to work creatively together to I have pleasure in inviting you to devise and explore options for a site, participate in a special planning day on Tuesday neighbourhood or city. 25th April at 25 High Street. A timetable, guest list and brieﬁng Participants will normally be personally invited by pack will be sent out ᔢ prior to the event. the event instigators. The aim is to have a cross-

The aim is to help section of main stakeholders. develop practical but exciting development options for the area and A brieﬁng pack is sent to all those attending. As encourage further ᔢ collaboration between well as setting out the aims of the day, the pack will those concerned. The outcome will form the contain background information about the area and basis for wider public consultation shortly the development process so that everyone starts the afterwards. day with the maximum up-to-date knowledge. The format of the day has been carefully designed to achieve results. As ᔢ Workshop formats are designed to encourage the well as all major local stakeholders we are also development of creative ideas (Design workshop). inviting a few specialist advisors to provide the breadth of input ᔢ Facilitators will often be from outside the area to required. If there are others you think should provide a measure of independence. be present, please let me know, though space is limited. ᔢ A printed summary is produced as soon as possible afterwards and the proposals may be exhibited to a To help us in making arrangements, please wider public (Open house event). conﬁrm that you can attend.

Yours sincerely Personal invitations can ensure a balanced attendance. But avoid criticism of exclusivity by having spare places for others. Sample invitation letter One-day events can generate a wealth of information and ideas which can easily be lost. Make sure there are resources available for recording, presenting and following up the results.

Holding an ‘awareness raising’ day (glossary) a couple of weeks beforehand can be helpful to generate momentum. “We need more events like this.” Participant, Planning day Oxpens Quarter Initiative, $ Main costs: venue, catering, organiser’s time (10 person days Oxford, 1997. minimum), facilitator’s fees.

98 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 72-101 11/7/06 09:43 Page 99

METHODS AP

Workshop sessions Participants divided into groups working round tables with ﬂipchart to one side.

Plenary sessions Reporting back from the workshops with drawings and ﬂipchart sheets pinned on the wall.

Sample planning day timetable 14.00 Design workshops: options and proposals Ideal numbers: 40–80 Participants work in one of several Larger numbers comfortable if design workshop groups focusing on enough space and facilitators; different aspects of the site, eg: 10 max per workshop. 1 Regional context 2 Town context 3 The site 4 River edge 5 New square? 10.00 Arrivals and coffee Viewing of display material. 15.15 Plenary session Report back from workshops. 10.30 Introductions and briefings 15.45 Tea 11.00 Briefing workshops: issues and opportunities 16.15 Next steps Participants allocated to one of four Planning future activity. workshop groups, eg: 17.30 Presentation 1 Transport (access and movement) To councillors, press. 2 Activities (land uses) 3 Strategic issues (regional context) 18.00 Reception 4 Quality of life (environment) 12.15 Plenary session FURTHER INFORMATION Report back from workshops  Methods: Briefing workshop. Design 12.45 Lunch and site walkabouts workshop. Newspaper. Scenarios: Inner city. Planning study. Town centre.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 99 CPH pages 72-101 11/7/06 09:43 Page 100

AP METHODS Planning for Real

Planning for Real uses simple models as a focus for people to put forward and prioritise ideas on how their area can be improved. It is a highly visible, hands-on community development and empowerment tool, which people of all abilities and backgrounds ﬁnd easy and enjoyable to engage in.

ᔢ A large 3-dimensional model of a neighbourhood is constructed, preferably by local people, using cardboard cut-outs for buildings pasted onto a base Suggestion cards plan ﬁxed to polystyrene or cardboard. These can be pre-prepared with blanks for people to add any ideas of their own. The use ᔢ The model is used at pre-advertised sessions held in of colour and visual symbols various locations in the community. makes the process accessible to those with low literacy levels. ᔢ Participants place suggestion cards on the model indicating what they want to see happen and where (eg playground, parking, standpipe, tree, shopping).

ᔢ The cards are sorted and prioritised to establish an action plan which is followed up by working groups.

Priority cards These are used to record all suggestions and their locations. Kits with building cut-outs and cards can be purchased (further info), or you can make up your own using available materials.

Events work best if facilitated by someone who has done it “Compromise and consensus before but the basic idea is easy to pick up from the kits. The become easier because kits’ manufacturers – the Neighbourhood Initiatives Foundation – everyone’s line of vision recommends that users should be fully trained by them. converges on the subject matter – the model itself – The model kits are good for generating interest and creating an allowing for practical ways of initial vision. After that they need some creative adaptation if non-threatening communication they are to be used for detailed design. and participation.” Neighbourhood Initiatives Foundation $ From US$800 (venue and materials) to $24,000 (trained leaﬂet, 1997. facilitator to prepare for several months).

100 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 72-101 11/7/06 09:43 Page 101

METHODS AP

Typical Planning for Real process

1 Initiation. Deﬁne area. Set up Steering Group. Get support. Purchase model pack (optional) or gather materials. (3 months) 2 Make model. A collective exercise by Steering Group, often with school children or students. Usually to a scale of 1:200 or 1:300 – which allows people to identify their own homes – and in sections so that Making suggestions it is easily transportable. (2 days) Participants mill around the model, and make 3 Publicise activity. Take model around the their views known by placing pre-written or self- area to generate interest. (2 weeks) completed suggestion cards onto it. 4 Training session. Run through process with Steering Group. (2 hours) 5 Open sessions. One or more times in different locations. • People gather around model. Introduction by facilitator explaining objectives and process. (10 mins) • Participants individually place suggestion cards on the model. Professionals watch and answer questions but do not take part. (30 mins) • Participants discuss results and rearrange cards until collectively happy Prioritising with the result. (30 mins) Working in small groups, participants order the • Participants record results, usually on suggestions by placing cards onto a chart which is priority cards setting out the divided into three bands –‘Now’, ‘Soon’, ‘Later’ – suggestion and its location. (30 mins) on one axis and those who should be responsible • Participants prioritise suggestions by for taking action on the other. placing priority cards on Now, Soon or Later boards and identifying who FURTHER INFORMATION should take action. (30 mins) • Discussion on next steps and  Method: Models. Scenario: Inner city. establishing working parties on the ” Building Design Pack. Do-ers Guide to main issues. (20 mins) Planning for Real. Planning for Real (Total: 2.5 hours – possibly broken up into Community Pack. Planning for Real – the a series of separate drop-in ‘suggestions’ Video. Power in our Hands. sessions, and then a prioritising session.) b Neighbourhood Initiatives Foundation 6 Working parties. supplies kits with instructions. Follow up suggestions. (2 months)  Margaret Wilkinson. ‘Planning for Real’® 7 Feedback. is a registered trademark of the Circulation of newsletter. (1 month) Neighbourhood Initiatives Foundation.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 101 CPH pages 102-129 10/7/06 13:28 Page 102

P METHODS Planning weekend

Planning weekends are an elaborate but highly effective way of generating momentum for change and getting all parties involved in producing a plan of action for a site, neighbourhood or city.

Brieﬁng Team members are briefed by ᔢ Planning weekends comprise an intensive and community leaders and ofﬁcials carefully structured programme of activities at the start of a planning weekend. spanning a weekend. They usually last for 4 full days – Friday to Monday – but may be longer or shorter. The main workshop sessions are open to the general public.

ᔢ The weekends are facilitated by a multidisciplinary team. This may be comprised of outsiders or locals or a combination of the two.

ᔢ The end result is a set of proposals for action which Public presentation is presented to the community on the last evening Team members present their proposals for the area to a and produced in exhibition and print form. public meeting after four intensive days of workshops, brainstorming and team Planning weekends – often called community planning weekends working. – work best when there is at least 6 months preparation time and a commitment by all parties to follow up afterwards.

The most effective long-term results are likely to be when events are organised locally with back-up and support from people who have done it before.

“In many ways, the process has Employing a local resident as event co-ordinator can help ensure transformed the way that local support and follow-up. Americans shape community development policies and take Get journalists involved, ideally as Team members. those actions that most directly affect their community’s growth or change.” $ Average costs: US$30,000 excluding organisers’ time and American Institute of assuming team members come free. Professionally organised Architects events can cost over $100,000. Locally organised events can be R/UDAT Handbook, 1992. done for under $15,000.

102 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 102-129 10/7/06 13:28 Page 103

METHODS P

Planning weekend timetable 15.30 - 17.00 Design workshops 2 Sample for a 4-day event. Customise. 17.00 - 19.00 Breather Minute writing, exercise. THURSDAY 19.00 - 23.00 Team brainstorm dinner 14.00 - 18.00 Setting up Room layout. Equipment DAY 3 SUNDAY delivery. Sign making. 11.00 - 12.00 Team editorial meeting 18.00 - 20.00 Organisers’ final meeting Presentation structure. 20.00 - 22.00 Team arrivals Production strategy. 12.00 onwards Report, exhibition and slide DAY 1 FRIDAY show production Writing, editing, drawing, 10.00 - 10.30 Event launch/introduction slide making. Review sessions Welcome by hosts. as necessary. Team only. Sleep and eat as and when possible. 10.30 - 12.30 Reconnaissance Tour of area by bus, train, plane or foot with visits to DAY 4 MONDAY interest groups. All day Report, exhibition and slide 12.30 - 13.30 Buffet lunch show production Late as possible Report to printers 14.00 - 17.00 Briefings Short presentations by key Late as possible Colour slides processing interested parties outlining opportunities and constraints. All day Clearing up Tidying and packing up. 18.00 - 19.00 Team review meeting 19.00 - 21.00 Public presentation 19.00 - 20.00 Dinner and social Slide show. Discussion. Formal thanks. Distribution of report. DAY 2 SATURDAY 21.00 - 23.00 Farewell social event 9.00 - 10.00 Team briefing & preparation 10.00 - 11.30 Briefing workshops 1 Ideal numbers: 100 – 250. Team: 10 – 30 Open to all. Several parallel Larger numbers can be catered for if enough groups, ending with a plenary space and workshop facilitators. report back. FURTHER INFORMATION 11.30 - 13.00 Briefing workshops 2  Methods: Briefing workshop. Design 13.00 - 14.00 Lunch & walkabouts workshop. Scenarios: Inner city regeneration. Local neighbourhood 14.00 - 15.30 Design workshops 1 initiative. Newspaper supplement. Open to all. Ending with plenary report back. In ” Action Planning. Creating a Design parallel groups of 10-15. Assistance Team for Your Community.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 103 CPH pages 102-129 10/7/06 13:28 Page 104

AP METHODS Prioritising

Prioritising is a way of placing in order of priority what needs doing and when. This is an TER important aspect of all decision-making and NOW SOON LA We can do it often needs to be done as a group activity if on our own the results are to be generally agreed on. We can do it with a little help The various options are worked out using We can do it ᔢ with help plus brainstorming, surveys or other methods. some money We can do it jointly with the ᔢ A graphic format is selected to allow the prioritising local authority of options to be simply and visually displayed. There We cannot do it are many ways of doing this, including the three but can tell the local authority or examples shown on these pages (and on pages 36- other agency 37, 71 and 78-79). what needs doing Who else could help? ᔢ After discussion of the issues, and perhaps presentations, participants make individual choices Prioritising projects Matrix for placing cards using stickers or cards. identifying possible projects or actions needed. ᔢ The results are analysed and provide the basis for decision-making or further discussion.

Often worth allowing people an opportunity to change their votes after seeing how others vote and discussing the results. This allows people to think through situations which are often quite complex.

Facilitator’s skill is ﬁnding the appropriate graphic format for the issues being considered.

Great scope for using computers to process results, especially where large number of people and choices are involved.

$ No signiﬁcant costs involved apart from facilitator’s fees if any.

104 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 102-129 10/7/06 13:28 Page 105

METHODS AP

Wheel of fortune group Fence prioritising method prioritising method Way for a group to arrive at a majority view Way for a group of people to collectively on issues where there are conﬂicting options. rank up to 20 competing priorities. Likely to be done after presentations, and Suitable for a workshop or public meeting. discussion of the issues involved. 1 A list of issues is prepared, perhaps by a 1 Preparation consultant. Large sheets of paper are taped together 2 The issues are illustrated graphically on lines to create a big square on the ﬂoor or a with a ‘fence’ in the middle (see below). table. The bigger the group, the larger it 3 Participants discuss each issue in turn. After needs to be. A large circle is drawn on the discussion, each participant places a dot paper, divided into as many slices as there somewhere along the line. A dot placed are options. Each slice is labelled. towards the end of a line indicates strong agreement for the given option. A dot in 2 Coloured sticky notes the middle indicates no strong views either Participants are each given 3 cards or Post- way (ie ‘sitting on the fence’). it notes. Different colours can be given to 4 The strongest concentration of dots (or the people representing different interest mean position of the sum of all the dots) is groups. taken as the collective view.

3 Voting Example below: planning a new settlement. Participants vote for their top three Neighbourhoods. Based No identiﬁable priorities by placing their cards or Post-its on 5-minute walk (400m) neighbourhood structure in the relevant slice. FENCE

Shopping. Small retail Larger retail centres 4 Discussion and recording centres you can walk to you can drive to Votes are counted and recorded for further discussion. Roads. New road with New road as by-pass 50km/hr speed limit with 80km/hr speed limit The process is repeated with different groups. Streets. Interconnected streets Curvilinear street system with calmed through-trafﬁc with cul-de-sac streets Ideal numbers: 10 – 15 Running time: 20 minutes Working/Living. Mixing Separate working working and living places and living places

Integration. Development New self-contained linking with surrounding area communities

FURTHER INFORMATION

 Methods: Design workshop. Ideas comp. Microplanning. Planning for Real. Ϡ Matrix: Neighbourhood Initiatives Foundation. Wheel of fortune: Robin Deane, 1066 Housing Association. Peter Richards, Deicke Richards Architects.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 105 CPH pages 102-129 10/7/06 13:28 Page 106

P METHODS Process planning session

ANYWHERE FORUM Process planning sessions allow people to work together to determine the most suitable COMMUNITY public participation process for their particular PLANNING FOR situation. It is particularly useful to hold them ANYWHERE REGENERATION? at an early stage in a community planning initiative and then at periodic intervals. All members of the Anywhere Forum are invited to a slide show and workshop to plan a strategy for involving local people in regeneration initiatives Monday 17 February 7–9.30pm at Anywhere Community Centre ᔢ As many as possible of the key interested parties or

THIS MEETING IS IMPORTANT FOR THE ‘stakeholders’ are invited to ensure that the FUTURE OF ANYWHERE

Please come if you can outcome is supported by all parties. Contact: Joan Simms, Secretary, Anywhere Forum, 227 Farley Way Tel: 444777 ᔢ Participants are introduced to the various options available and helped to design a process of their own, usually by an external facilitator.

ᔢ A formal workshop format is normally followed (example in box, right) to make the procedure equitable and transparent.

ᔢ Sessions are held periodically whenever there is a need to review the overall process.

Evening session Make people feel comfortable and relaxed. Spanning lunch can Police, residents and other work well for ofﬁcials and business people with participants stakeholders taking part in an seated around circular tables. Evening sessions spanning a buffet evening process planning supper will normally work better for residents. session in a community centre. It led to an action planning Be on guard for sabotage by those who don’t want any kind of weekend seven months later. process to take place. Showing slides or videos of methods in use is usually a good way to generate enthusiasm.

Invite external facilitators to present options, but keep ownership local from the start.

$ Main costs: Venue; catering; fee for presenter.

106 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 102-129 10/7/06 13:28 Page 107

METHODS P

Process planning session sample format

1 Introductions Facilitator explains event objectives and structure. Everyone says brieﬂy who they are and what their hopes are for the session. (15 mins)

2 Presentation Slide show or video of possible processes Lunchtime session to provide inspiration. (45 mins max) One of four tables at a working lunch for key players (property owners, authorities, amenity 3 Aims groups) to determine a development process for a Short debate on overall objectives and major town centre regeneration initiative. It led to speciﬁc constraints. (15 mins) a design workshop and open house event one year later. 4 Refreshment break

5 Individual ideas People ﬁll in a process planner (box, right, Sample process planner or p166-71) OR develop their ideas on a Customise and leave space for responses. blank sheet of paper. (10 mins minimum) Aims 1 What do you want to achieve? ______6 Group ideas 2 What are the main issues? ______People are divided into groups (4 – 8 ideal). 3 What geographical area are you Individuals present their idea to group. concerned with? ______Group votes to pursue one idea only and develop it further. (20 mins min) Process 4 What methods do you favour? ______7 Report back 5 When should activities take place? _____ Each group makes semi-formal 6 Who are the key people to involve? _____ presentation of their idea to plenary of all 7 What expertise do you need? ______participants. (5 mins each group) Organisation 8 Which organisation/s should lead? ____ 8 Selection 9 Who else should help? ______Vote on which idea to pursue and then 10 How much will it cost and who pays? __ discuss improvements and next steps. 11 Who does what next? ______(10 mins minimum). 12 Other thoughts and ideas ______

Ideal numbers: 16 – 20. Larger numbers no problem. Running time: 2 – 4 hours. FURTHER INFORMATION 3 hours comfortable.  Getting started p6. Useful formats Note: This format can also be used for pp166-171. general training purposes with no speciﬁc Scenarios: Local neighbourhood initiative. location or issue in mind. Planning study.Town centre upgrade.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 107 CPH pages 102-129 10/7/06 13:28 Page 108

AR METHODS Reconnaissance trip

Reconnaissance trips involve direct inspection of the area being considered by mixed teams of local people and technical experts. They are used to familiarise everyone with the physical environment and key issues at the start of many community planning processes and to review progress at intervals.

ᔢ A route is carefully planned to include key local features and issues. The route may be walked or Tour of neighbourhood toured by bus, boat or other forms of transport. It Well planned route map with important features marked may include visits to buildings or facilities. (above). Viewing from the air, with the media and on the ᔢ The trip is undertaken by a mixed group of local ground (below). people and technical experts. Usually a team leader will direct the group and determine the pace.

ᔢ The group make notes, sketches, take photos and talk informally to people in their own setting. They may check existing plans for accuracy.

ᔢ At the end of the trip a debrieﬁng is held, and the notes and other materials compiled into a form useful to the next stage of the planning process.

Where little information exists, the route can be planned with a view to producing a speciﬁc ‘transect’ diagram or map (see right).

Groups of more than 15 can be unwieldy. Split into smaller groups, perhaps taking different routes and comparing notes afterwards.

Viewing from a hill or high tower is particularly useful. If funds allow, a trip in a helicopter or light aircraft can be worthwhile.

Good opportunity for engaging with media, especially TV.

$ Main costs: Transport; organiser’s time.

108 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 102-129 10/7/06 13:28 Page 109

METHODS AR

Reconnaissance trip timetable Transect walk format Sample for a complex trip lasting most of a For a simple walk where little information day with advance planning. exists and with little advance planning. 1 Briefings. By a number of key parties (in a 1 Select people. Decide who will do the hall or meeting room). walk. Ensure a cross-section of interests. 2 Bus. Tour of wider area. Commentary by 2 Decide route and issues. Plan a route local residents and planners. Stops at high which covers the issues under viewing point and key buildings and sites. consideration (eg land use changes, development pressures, hazards). 3 Lunch. In a local bar with business people. 3 Walk. Walk the route making sketches, 4 Walk. Around central area. Semi-structured taking notes, holding informal interviews, interviews with traders. Detailed checking taking photos. of land use plan. 4 Construct profile. Compile all notes and 5 Tea. At a community centre with local sketches. Prepare a profile in map or residents. Discussion. diagram form. 6 Visit. To arts centre. Viewing of local crafts 5 Display. Use profile as a basis for exhibition. Discussion with artists. consultation and planning. 7 Team meeting. Debriefing and review.

Historical community proﬁle Diagram resulting from a transect walk showing the evolution of the landscape over the last century.

FURTHER INFORMATION

 Methods: Diagrams. Design assistance Looking round team. Mapping. Planning weekend. Exploring and discussing a site proposed for Review session. development and a factory in a proposed Scenario: New neighbourhood. conservation area.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 109 CPH pages 102-129 10/7/06 13:28 Page 110

AR METHODS Review session

Review sessions are a useful way of monitoring progress and maintaining momentum. They can be held weeks, months, or even years after an action planning event or other community planning initiative.

ᔢ Background material is produced evaluating the outcome of initiatives and reviewing progress. Reunion Cakes made by a local resident ᔢ All those involved in previous activity are invited set the tone for team members returning to the scene of an back to a session, normally lasting for one day. action planning event for a Invitations can also be sent to those who may wish review session. to become involved in the future.

ᔢ A programme is designed to review progress, Was it a useful evaluate earlier initiatives and determine the next thing to do? steps (see sample timetable, right). What did it achieve? ᔢ A report of the session is written up and circulated.

How could we have done it Timing is important. Holding a review session too soon will be pointless. Left too long and you may lose momentum. better? Make it an enjoyable event by including opportunities for What happens socialising and networking. next? Evaluating precisely what outcomes have resulted from any particular initiative is always difﬁcult because there are so many Sample brief variables. No one is likely to have the whole picture. Produce a For a review session on an draft of the Progress Monitor (p170) and circulate it for comment. action planning event. Good opportunity to get new people and groups on board, particularly those feeling excluded by not being involved previously.

$ Main costs: venue, preparation, travel costs, refreshments.

110 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 102-129 10/7/06 13:28 Page 111

METHODS AR

Reviewing progress Review Session Timetable Team members and participants of an action planning week meet 16 months later to review 10.00 Arrivals and refreshments progress and plan further initiatives. Viewing of display material.

10.30 Walkabout To observe progress on the ground.

11.15 Report back By those undertaking initiatives.

12.15 Evaluation sessions General review as a group.

12.45 Lunch (plus evaluation sessions for special groups, eg external team members). FURTHER INFORMATION

14.00 Next steps O Scenarios: Inner city regeneration. Local List actions needed now and by who. neighbourhood initiative. Village revival. Useful formats: Progress monitor. 15.15 Refreshments and networking Evaluation form. b Ideal numbers: 30 – 40 Mount Wise Action Planning. Ϡ Dick Watson

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 111 CPH pages 102-129 10/7/06 13:28 Page 112

AR METHODS Risk assessment

Risk assessment involves analysing threats (or Is your community ever ‘hazards’) facing a community. It should ideally threatened by: be used in all planning – since most communities ᔤ Accidents (car, rail, air) face some kind of threat. But it is most ᔤ Armed conﬂict necessary for vulnerable communities prone to ᔤ Civil unrest natural or human-made disasters. ᔤ Cyclone ᔤ Deforestation ᔢ Risk assessment comprises three elements: ᔤ Drought • hazard analysis – understanding what hazards ᔤ Earthquakes exist, the likelihood of them occurring, their likely ᔤ Environmental intensity, and their effect. degradation • vulnerability assessment – understanding who ᔤ Epidemics or what is vulnerable to the hazards. ᔤ Fire • capacity assessment – understanding what ᔤ Flooding capacities exist within the community to reduce ᔤ Migrations (forced) vulnerability. ᔤ Over-development ᔤ Pests ᔢ A range of methods can be used to make it easy for ᔤ Pollution communities to make their own risk assessments as a basis for taking action to reduce risks (see box ᔤ Tidal waves right). Most involve group work, preferably with ᔤ Tornadoes trained facilitators. ᔤ Tourism (excessive) ᔤ Trafﬁc congestion ᔢ The end result is a clear understanding by the ᔤ Tribal wars community of the nature and scale of the risks it ᔤ Typhoon faces. It is then possible to determine what is ᔤ Volcanic eruption needed to reduce the risk; for instance new local

Hazards checklist initiatives, outside resources, technical expertise. Typical hazards that may face a community but are often ignored until it is too late. They Big beneﬁt is in obliging planning to consider natural and human- range in seriousness but the made hazards and infrequent threats all too often ignored. same principles for assessing and reducing risks apply to all. Involve local emergency services; an invaluable source of knowledge.

$ Varies depending on approaches adopted and numbers involved.

112 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 102-129 10/7/06 13:28 Page 113

METHODS AR

Vulnerability and capacity matrix POTENTIAL HAZARD Flooding VULNERABILITIES CAPACITIES · Houses & farmland in · People have boats to PHYSICAL and MATERIAL low lying areas. save belongings. What is vulnerable? · Water supplies easily · Identifiable What resources exist to address vulnerability? contaminated by floods. evacuation centre · Food supplies get cut. exists. · People in outlying areas · People’s organisation at SOCIAL and ORGANISATION (15 families). community level. Who is vulnerable? · Migrant workers. · Warning system exists. What resources exist to make them less so? · People unable to swim Disaster response (particularly women). committee functions.

· Individualism. · New positive attitude MOTIVATION and ATTITUDE · Lack of community by young people. What attitudes lead to vulnerability? spirit/cooperation . · Voluntary What capacities exist to improve the situation? organisations.

Completing a vulnerability and capacity Some participatory risk matrix assessment methods General and risk-speciﬁc information from secondary sources and community proﬁling Hazard and risk mapping sessions is ordered into categories and placed in a Locating hazards on maps along with people, matrix as shown above. This is usually done in buildings and infrastructure at risk from those group sessions using a large wallchart. A separate hazards (Mapping). matrix is completed for each hazard. Separate charts can be completed for men and women and Simulation exercises for different ethnic groups. Completed matrices Acting out the effect of possible hazards. can be used to test a proposed initiative’s impact Either to assess the impact of new initiatives on a community’s vulnerability and capacity, and on existing risk levels or to understand the to monitor it during implementation. impact of past hazards (Simulation).

Hazard or threat ranking Prioritising the importance of various hazards FURTHER INFORMATION according to community perceptions and needs (Community profiling).  Method: Community profiling. Mapping. Simulation. Vulnerability and capacity analysis Scenarios: Disaster management. Shanty Compiling a matrix of a community’s settlement upgrading. vulnerabilities to, and capacities to cope with, ” Rising from the Ashes each hazard identified (see example, above). Ϡ Roger Bellers. Nick Hall.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 113 CPH pages 102-129 10/7/06 13:28 Page 114

AR METHODS Roadshow

ANYTOWN ROADSHOW Roadshows combine a series of workshops, IMPROVING STREETSCAPE exhibitions and a symposium to generate

1 7 March professionally produced urban design 1 North Road 14 March proposals based on local people’s wishes. They 2 2 Middle Street 21 March are a good way of generating a critical mass of 3 College Road

28 March energy for securing wide debate and an 4 Park Street

3 4 April impetus for implementation. 5 Lower Road

8–26 May Public 4 Exhibition ᔢ An overall theme is agreed by the organisers (such Shopping Centre as vacant sites or rundown estates) and a number Friday 29 May 6pm–8pm of sites in a neighbourhood selected for attention. Symposium Town Hall 5 Organised by Roadshow Events ᔢ Teams of professionals are selected by open Sample advertising leaﬂet competition to prepare improvement schemes for Key components: Map each of the selected sites. showing sites; times and locations of workshops, exhibitions and symposium; ᔢ The chosen teams facilitate design workshops with details of organisers, sponsors local residents, prepare proposals and present them etc; aims and objectives. in an interactive exhibition.

ᔢ A ﬁnal, highly publicised symposium is held to debate the results and generate momentum for the scheme’s implementation.

“It’s a wonderful format; this teach-in on matters that we all Roadshows are most likely to succeed if organised by an have opinions about with independent body with the active support of the local authorities people who are and community groups. knowledgeable. It’s started a discussion that’s desperately Other publicity and involvement activity undertaken at the same needed about taking control of time (eg school workshops, video soapboxes, radio phone-ins) our own environment. May the can help generate momentum. debate roll on.” Roger de Freitas, Hammersmith Society $ Main costs: organisers’ time (3 person months at least); publicity Summary Symposium, material, fees for design teams (optional); venue for symposium. Architecture Foundation Roadshow, 28 May 1998.

114 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 102-129 10/7/06 13:28 Page 115

METHODS AR

Sample roadshow timetable

Jan-Mar Preparation. Decide on area, theme and sites. Secure support from key groups, and funding. Prepare format and logistics.

Apr Announce competition for design teams. Open competition to select professional teams.

June Select teams. Based on ability to work with local communities as well as on technical ability.

July Ofﬁcial public launch. To secure media publicity.

Aug-Sep Public workshops. To brief design teams (one workshop for each site). Schools programme. Workshops generating proposals from children. Video soapbox. Prominently located to gain views of wider public.

Oct Design time. All-day crit for all design teams and key local stakeholders to share approaches prior to ﬁnalising proposals.

Oct Exhibition of proposals. With provision for people to comment. Preferably held at on-site locations as well as at a locally prominent venue where the Exhibition of proposals symposium is to be held. Proposals from the design teams are publicly exhibited to encourage discussion and dialogue Oct Symposium. With high proﬁle which is continued at a public symposium. speakers and media.

Nov Scheme revision. In the light of comments. FURTHER INFORMATION Dec Report published.  Methods: Design workshop. Ideas Ideal numbers: 10 sites and competition. Interactive display. Design design teams fest. Video soapbox. Total time period: 1 year b Architecture Foundation.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 115 CPH pages 102-129 10/7/06 13:28 Page 116

AS METHODS Simulation

Look at the sky, the Simulation can be used to act out a real event clouds are dark. It may or activity, helping both participants and be a storm coming. Let’s turn on the radio. observers gain information and insights prior to formulating plans. It can also be used to test draft plans.

Local radio channel: ᔢ An event or activity to be simulated is chosen. This “Flood warning No 3.” could be a natural or human-made hazard – such as an earthquake – or daily life in a street or building.

ᔢ People who have experienced the event or activity Quick, let’s go home and from a variety of perspectives are brought together sandbag our house. for a workshop session.

ᔢ People act out the event or activity as a drama, individually or in groups. Usually, a carefully I’ll go and move the structured exercise is prepared in advance by a animals to higher ground. facilitator (see example in box, right).

ᔢ Key information and issues arising are recorded for future use. Tell grandpa to come and stay at our house - just in case the stream banks ᔢ Recommendations are identiﬁed for future actions. burst.

Enjoyable way of getting information that would be hard to Do you think we could obtain any other way. move our belongings into the school hall if things Good process for team building and clariﬁcation of roles. get too bad? People may need time to prepare, so the method should be explained in advance.

Allocate time for discussion after each simulation exercise to Not sure. Drop in at the allow people to reﬂect on their own performance. store on the way back and ask. $ Minimal costs involved for materials, plus facilitator’s fees if any.

116 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 102-129 10/7/06 13:28 Page 117

METHODS AS

Sample simulation exercise

1 Determine event or activity to simulate Eg: A recent flood. 2 Design the exercise Objectives. Process. Materials required. 3 Assemble participants/cast of characters Eg: A cross-section of the local community affected in different ways by the flood, plus officials and technical experts dealing with flood relief and avoidance measures. 4 Explain purpose Eg: To understand how people reacted to the recent flood in order to decide on measures to reduce the impact of future ones. (10 mins) 5 Divide into groups Ask each group to prepare to act out a different aspect of the event or activity in the form of a drama. Eg: Before the flood; during the flood; after the flood. Each group also to appoint a reporter. (10 mins) 6 Group working Each group prepares its drama through discussion prompted by responding to key questions. Eg: “When and how did you know a flood was coming?” “What did people do and when?” Reporter notes main issues arising. (60 mins) 7 Plenary: dramas and presentation Each group acts out its drama followed by a presentation by the reporter summing up Acting out an event the main issues. General discussion. (60-90 Local residents dramatising how they were mins) affected by a recent typhoon during a field 8 Review (perhaps later or after a break) workshop to improve disaster management. Review of issues and concerns raised. Discussion on next steps. (30 mins)

Ideal numbers: 18–24 (3 groups of 6-8) Running time: 140–170 mins (plus 30 mins for review) FURTHER INFORMATION Note: The same exercise could be used to Methods: Community proﬁling. Field simulate an event that has not yet  workshop. Gaming. Risk assessment. happened but might do in the future. Ϡ Roger Bellers. Nick Hall.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 117 CPH pages 102-129 10/7/06 13:28 Page 118

S METHODS Street stall

Street stalls are interactive displays held out of doors. They make it possible to secure the views of larger numbers of people than is normally possible indoors. They are particularly useful where the views of people using a particular street or public space are required.

ᔢ A highly public location is selected and exhibition and interactive display material mounted for a selected period.

ᔢ Facilitators are on hand to encourage people to make comments and engage in debate.

ᔢ The event may be advertised in advance but this is “The street stall proved to be not essential. an invaluable and invigorating experience for us all. We were overwhelmed by the interest taken... and all subsequent Arcades and colonnades are good venues as they provide shelter developments of our scheme from the rain. Ideal if you can also have the use of a shop. were made against the backdrop of what the people Can benefit from, and be attractive for, radio and television of Bath wanted to see.” coverage. Leaflets can also be handed out to passers-by and Student report, Prince of placed in shop windows. Wales’s Institute of Architecture Be careful when using Post-it notes and leaflets if windy Bath Project, 1996. conditions are likely – they may blow away!

“The day had a certain verve Getting formal permission to set up a stall in a public area can which boosted – and was take forever. Plan well ahead or just do it and be prepared to reinforced by – the strong level move if necessary. of interest of passers-by. It was good for the Trust to be Likely to attract a broader range of people than an indoor event, involved in something as but marginalised groups or reticent individuals may still need popular and constructive – we special inducement to participate. Have a ‘postbox’ so that are often portrayed as being people can make contributions anonymously. elitist and negative.” Timothy Cantell, Chairman, Planning Committee, Bath $ Main costs: display material; staff time. Preservation Trust letter, March 1997.

118 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 102-129 10/7/06 13:28 Page 119

METHODS AS

Taking to the streets Shoppers join in a debate on the future of the town centre by writing on Post-it notes, sketching their own ideas and holding discussions with the organisers. Over 2,000 Post-it notes were posted up over 5 hours on a cold winter day and two books ﬁlled with comments. The results were used to prepare a scheme for one of the most important development sites in the town.

FURTHER INFORMATION

 Methods: Interactive display. Open house event. Table scheme display. Scenario: Community centre.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 119 CPH pages 102-129 10/7/06 13:28 Page 120

AT METHODS Table scheme display

Table scheme displays allow large numbers of people to understand and make an input into development proposals, with or without engaging with others. They can be used as part of an exhibition or open house event.

ᔢ Drawings or models of a proposed scheme are placed on a table with the main elements identiﬁed on separate voting sheets around the edge.

THE MAIN ELEMENTS OF THE SKETCH SCHEMES ᔢ Separate tables can be used for different scheme ARE HIGHLIGHTED. options. Please indicate whether you agree or disagree with the ideas by using ᔢ People vote on what they like or dislike by placing the stickers provided. sticky dots on the voting sheets. Green = Agree Red = Disagree ᔢ More detailed comments can be made using Post-it Yellow = No opinion notes, either on the same tables or on separate displays. YOU MAY HAVE YOUR OWN IDEAS OR SUGGESTIONS. ᔢ The results are analysed afterwards to inform the Please write these on the next stages of the planning process. comment sheet or sketch them on the blank plan provided. It will help if you add your name and Good way of introducing people to the design process. Works address. particularly well for getting comments on rough sketch schemes developed at design workshops. Redrawing is not usually Sample instructions necessary though it can help if time allows.

Useful debate will invariably take place around the tables. It can be helpful to have organisers present at each table to respond to questions and to take notes.

Have a spare table with a blank plan for those wanting to draw up their own ideas in more detail.

$ Few costs involved unless proposals are professionally redrawn.

120 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 102-129 10/7/06 13:28 Page 121

METHODS AT

Table scheme display Voting with sticky dots on town centre improvement ideas proposed by a design workshop focusing on transport. Part of a one-day open house event.

FURTHER INFORMATION

 Methods: Interactive display. Open house event. Scenario: Community centre.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 121 CPH pages 102-129 10/7/06 13:28 Page 122

AT METHODS Task force

Urban design task forces are multidisciplinary Urban Design Task Force teams of students and professionals which produce proposals for a site or neighbourhood based on an intensive programme of site studies, lectures, participatory exercises and studio working, normally lasting several weeks. They are an efficient way of securing high Anytown, Anycountry quality design proposals at the same time as 5–26 July 2002 providing a first-rate educational opportunity. Team members wanted Contact Urban Design Task Force 10 High Street, Anytown ᔢ Task forces combine an academic and practical Recruiting team members training in urban design with the development of Sample poster for a task force. realistic proposals for improving a site, neighbourhood or city. “The task force is valuable because when people come from outside they have a ᔢ Staff and student team members will come from a special vision, with a certain range of backgrounds, ages and, normally, countries. objectivity, and they see things we don’t see. That vision is very very good for developing ᔢ The programme begins with academic input and new approaches.” Yves Dauge, Mayor of Chinon skills training and then moves into engaging with the France, 12 August 1994. community and producing urban design proposals (see sample format, right). “Before the Task Force, all discussion about the future of the city – what should happen, ᔢ Task forces are likely to be organised by academic when and where – took place in small rooms with one or two institutions in partnership with local agencies. people. Now everyone is discussing it.” Lorenzo Piacentini, engineer Viterbo, Italy, 1994. Plan at least one year in advance in order to have time to secure support from all relevant local organisations and make the “It was an absolutely necessary logistical arrangements. exceptional experience. We were exposed to so many inspiring people and it was very $ Cost dependent on numbers involved. Main costs: travel; intensive. It had a great accommodation; staff time; presentation materials. Cost for a influence on my life.” 4-week event likely to be around US$130,000. Contributors: Joanna Wachowiak, host city, student members, academic institutions. Scope also for architecture student, 1994. sponsorship and international exchange funding.

122 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 102-129 10/7/06 13:28 Page 123

METHODS AT

Task force sample format

1 Building a skill base Seminars, practical experience and visits for the team designed to develop skills in: • observational drawing and painting • urban analysis • local building crafts • measuring buildings • modelmaking • team working Public engagement • participatory design Finding out local views on the city. (1 week)

2 Small live projects Developing urban design proposals for small sites. These may be of real practical value but are primarily designed to develop skills in urban design, presentation and team working. (1 week)

3 Public engagement on large live project Public lectures, meetings or workshops with various interest groups, action Studio working planning event (eg Community planning Task force members prepare proposals in a forum). (3 days) temporary locally-based studio.

4 Studio working Developing urban design proposals. (2 weeks)

5 Presentation Exhibition and public presentation of proposals with newsletter. (1 day)

6 Publication Publication of book or report of proposals. Presentation (6 months) Task force members explain their proposals to local politicians at the ﬁnal presentation. Ideal numbers: 20–30 students 10 tutors FURTHER INFORMATION

Running time: 3–6 weeks  Methods: Community planning forum. Urban design studio. Scenario: New neighbourhood. ” Viterbo; Santa Maria in Gradi. b Prince’s Foundation. Ϡ Brian Hanson and Richard John.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 123 CPH pages 102-129 10/7/06 13:28 Page 124

AU METHODS Urban design studio

Urban design studios are special units attached to a university or other educational establishment which undertake environmental project work, usually in the immediate locality. They can provide both a valuable educational experience for students and an important resource for local communities.

ᔢ Urban design studios are set up by an educational establishment, usually at a school of architecture or planning. They will normally be independent units.

ᔢ The studios have access to all the resources of the establishment; staff, students, researchers, facilities and equipment. Academic rigour Combining theory and practice. ᔢ Relationships will be built up with local agencies and community organisations and a variety of project work will be undertaken.

“It allowed me to apply things I learned in school in a ᔢ Once established, the studios will start advertising no-longer fictitious their services and take on consultancy work. environment. It’s not the community being treated as a laboratory for students to Independence is essential to overcome the incompatibility of exercise their creative will. curriculum and real project timetables. Academics and Both sides are getting administrators sometimes find such units threatening because something out of it.” students often enjoy the work more than academic studies. J B Clancy, student Also, live projects generate their own momentum and are hard Yale Urban Design Workshop to dovetail into predetermined time slots. Studios rarely survive New York Times, 19.11.95. unless given enough time to build up a reputation, so making it possible to attract funding for projects and become self-sufficient. “Students are increasingly interested in what it means to Core staff are needed to maintain momentum of projects during be a participant in the public school vacations and other times when students are unavailable. realm. The idea of a citizen Studios may work best if student involvement is voluntary. architect is back.” Alan Plattus, Director Yale Urban Design Workshop $ Main costs are staff, travel and equipment. Initially funded as New York Times, 19.11.95. part of architecture school. Later, can secure consultancy fees.

124 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 102-129 10/7/06 13:28 Page 125

METHODS AU

Academic resource Urban design studio Students, academics and community members use a school of architecture to debate and solve typical projects real local planning issues. Strange though it may Activities which can be educational and seem, this is not a normal occurrence in most easily carried out by an education institution. architecture schools.

ᔤ Action planning events Organisation of community planning forums, design days and task forces. ᔤ Design guides Research and production of guides for local areas. ᔤ Design proposals Preparing design ideas for speciﬁc sites or a masterplan for a whole area. ᔤ Model-making Making models of buildings or neighbourhoods. FURTHER INFORMATION ᔤ Surveys Assisting communities with surveys and  Methods: Action planning event. Local analysis of community needs. design statement. Task force. Scenarios: ᔤ Visualisation Derelict site re-use. New neighbourhood. Assisting communities with visual aids b Ball State University.Yale Urban Design including computer imaging. Workshop.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 125 CPH pages 102-129 10/7/06 13:28 Page 126

AU METHODS User group

INAUGURAL MEETING The creation or strengthening of user groups is a key element of most community planning. Anytown They act as clients in championing the views of Transport Forum 7pm Friday 4 June those who will use the end product and keep Baptist Hall, John Street the momentum going, often for many years. A new organisation to coordinate and encourage initiatives to make travelling around Anytown easier ᔢ User groups should be as representative as possible for everyone. of the end users of any initiative, including as many interests and viewpoints as possible.

ᔢ Initially user groups are likely to be informally organised and dominated by self-selected enthusiasts. As projects develop, the groups may

AGENDA need to become more formally organised with 1 Why a new organisation? 3 What kind of Forum? democratic voting procedures and, perhaps, legal 4 Who should be on it? status. 5 How to administer it? 6 Election of steering group 7 Dates of future meetings. ᔢ For larger projects, several different groups may be Refreshments available useful at various times and groups will have sub- ALL WELCOME groups and working parties for specific issues. Starting up Sample leaflet advertising a meeting to set up a new group. It is important to work closely with existing organisations but each project needs its own dedicated group. Otherwise projects simply become ‘another item on the agenda’ of an existing body and will probably be mediocre or flounder.

If enough people are interested, set up sub-groups and working parties. The more people that can be involved and given roles the better.

Make sure the nature of any group is clearly understood. It is always worth writing down ‘terms of reference’ setting out a group’s purpose, powers, accountability, funding, meeting schedules, and so on.

$ Main costs initially: printing and publicity. Most groups will raise money through membership fees and fundraising events.

126 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 102-129 10/7/06 13:28 Page 127

METHODS AU

Common user group types Forum participant checklist People who might be involved in a Action group neighbourhood improvement forum. Informal issue-based campaigning group for interested individuals. ᔤ Architects/planners/designers Community association ᔤ Health workers Represents the interests of a geographical Local authority staff neighbourhood or cultural entity. Includes ᔤ residents, workers, businesses, etc. ᔤ Local business people Development trust ᔤ Local residents’ representatives Formally constituted organisation with a range ᔤ Local shopkeepers’ representative of interests, usually with charitable status. Has development capability. ᔤ Local teachers Forum ᔤ Play workers Liaison body for representatives of constituent ᔤ Police liaison officers organisations and interests. May be area- or Religious leader/s issue- based. ᔤ Friends of ...... ᔤ Social workers Loose support network of people supporting a ᔤ ...... particular place or cause. Housing cooperative Organisation of people who want to build or manage housing together. Management committee Formal organisation for managing a project. Project group Group set up to deal with one specific project (eg a new sports hall). Residents association Organisation representing residents in an area. Steering group Informal group set up to progress matters. Working party Informal group dealing with a specific topic.

Working together Families who formed themselves into a working party and then a housing cooperative to plan and manage the construction of their own homes.

FURTHER INFORMATION

 Methods: Development trust. Scenarios: Local neighbourhood initiative. Town centre upgrade.

Signing up b Community Matters. Starting a new user group at a workshop.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 127 CPH pages 102-129 10/7/06 13:28 Page 128

AV METHODS Video soapbox

Video soapboxes allow members of the public to broadcast their opinions on video screens erected in public places. They are particularly useful for generating public interest and debate for high proﬁle events such as a roadshow.

ᔢ The basic technology required is a video camera, a projection facility and a screen. These can be used independently or incorporated into a special construction to make a prominent street feature (as in the example illustrated, right).

ᔢ People are ﬁlmed making comments on an issue and these are projected for public viewing. This can be done simultaneously, or facilities can be included to allow for editing and captioning (see photos, left).

Youth speaks ᔢ Video tapes can be kept for future screenings and can be analysed as a survey of public opinion.

Video is a great medium for getting people to participate. Young people especially often ﬁnd it more comfortable than meetings for expressing ideas and opinions.

Get people making their own videos of their neighbourhood using small hand-held camcorders. These can very useful for getting a debate going at a workshop.

Video footage of local neighbourhoods and community planning activity, preferably edited, can be useful for sponsors or decision- makers who may not be able to visit at the right moments. They can bring a funding application to life.

$ Basic video equipment can be bought for a few hundred dollars although editing equipment is more expensive. Education establishments often have facilities which can be used. Elaborate constructions like the one illustrated cost thousands of dollars but provide good opportunities for sponsorship. The one shown was paid for by a telephone company.

128 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 102-129 10/7/06 13:28 Page 129

METHODS AV

Design details Four telephone boxes are modiﬁed for people to record their views. Each booth contains a telephone handset which triggers the automatic Public viewpoint video recording programme. Simple written and A resident’s comments on the state of the local spoken operating instructions are provided. The area are screened prominently in a shopping scaffold tower above has a message board using street. Passers-by can add their views to the moving text to invite the public to participate, a debate by stepping into one the converted light cube with images relevant to the issue being telephone booths, picking up the handset and considered and a back projection video screen on pressing ‘record’. which the recorded messages are projected.

FURTHER INFORMATION

O Method: Roadshow. b Architecture Foundation. Ϡ Example shown designed by Alex de Rijke as part of an Architecture Foundation Roadshow. Illustration and screen shots courtesy of Building Design.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 129 CPH pages 130-163 10/7/06 14:09 Page 130 CPH pages 130-163 10/7/06 14:09 Page 131

Scenarios A–Z

A range of scenarios covering some common development situations. Each illustrates one way in which methods can be combined in an overall strategy.

Use for inspiration, not as blueprints. It is important to stress that in each case, there are many other ways of achieving the same objective. Note also that the timescales shown may be over-optimistic in some contexts as they assume that securing permissions, raising ﬁnance and setting up organisational frameworks takes place fairly smoothly.

Community centre 132 Derelict site re-use 134 Disaster management 136 Environmental art project 138 Housing development 140 Industrial heritage re-use 142 Inner city regeneration 144 Local neighbourhood initiative 146 New neighbourhood 148 Planning study 150 Regeneration infrastructure 152 Shanty settlement upgrading 154 Town centre upgrade 156 Urban conservation 158 Village revival 160 Whole settlement strategy 162

Community mapping, Yunan, China, 1997

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 131 CPH pages 130-163 10/7/06 14:09 Page 132

C SCENARIOS Community centre

This scenario applies to the design and construction of any building for community use.

The conventional approach would be for a local authority to commission architects to plan and design a building which is then managed by that authority. All too often such facilities are inappropriate and uneconomic. Sometimes they are rejected by the local communities they are intended for. Occasionally they are even vandalised and destroyed.

In the scenario shown here, the need for the building is established by the community. Planning and design are then coordinated by a special project group which involves everyone interested at key stages.

The end result is a facility which has been shaped by members of the community to suit their needs and is then looked after by the people who use it.

FURTHER INFORMATION

 Methods: Community planning forum. Community proﬁling. Feasibility fund. Interactive display. Open house event. User group. ” Plan, Design and Build. Brick by Brick. User Participation in Building Design and Management.

132 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 130-163 10/7/06 14:09 Page 133

SCENARIOS C

Community centre A community needs a new social centre, sports facility, school, health centre or village hall.

months 0 Community profiling p42 1 Need for facility identified through a profiling exercise, survey or other consultation. 2

3 Project group established់ 4 Special group of future users and other interested parties established to develop the project. 5 Technical experts appointed. Feasibility funding applied for p62. Visits to other similar projects. 6

7 Community planning់ forum or street stall. 8 pp40 and 118 Ideas and support generated. 9

10 Feasibility study ់ 11 Consultation with special interest groups. Design meetings held. Options explored and costed. 12

13 Interactive display and់ models pp72 and 82 14 Options displayed in local venue. Feedback analysed by project group. 15

16 Detailed design ់ 17 Final designs drawn up by technical experts.

19 Construction ់ Building erected by contractor, self build by 20 community or partial self build. Opening celebration. 21

22 Participatory building់ evaluation 23 Building evaluated in use to inform ongoing changes and provide lessons for others. p195 24

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 133 CPH pages 130-163 10/7/06 14:09 Page 134

D SCENARIOS Derelict site re-use

This scenario shows an initiative to make use of a derelict area of land in public ownership. Such land exists everywhere, usually attracting rubbish and having a depressing effect on the local neighbourhood.

Often, sites are left vacant for many years. Alternatively, local authorities may carry out some landscaping or sell the land to the private sector for development.

The scenario here shows how a popular use for the site can be generated and implemented, starting off with an ideas competition.

The initiative can be taken by anyone; a local authority, regeneration agency, community group individual or urban design studio at a school of architecture or planning.

FURTHER INFORMATION

 Methods: Art workshop. Ideas competition. Open house event. Street stall. Urban design studio.

134 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 130-163 10/7/06 14:09 Page 135

SCENARIOS D

Derelict site re-use An initiative to make use of a derelict urban site in public ownership. Timescale assumes relatively simple option adopted such as a pocket park. A building would take longer to construct. months 0 Research 1 Initiators ﬁnd out history, ownership, planning position and other background information. 2

3 Public meeting or forum់ 4 To launch initiative, ﬁnd out further information, and establish steering group. 5

7 Ideas competition ់p70 For best ideas for improving the site. Open to all. 8 Public exhibition and judging of proposals.

10 Development partnership់ Formed to implement project. Might include local 11 authority, funders, local amenity groups, site neighbours. Appoint architects and artists to 12 draw up proposals based on the winning scheme. 13

14 Art workshops p34់ 15 To design and make any works of art.

17 Open house or street់ stall p88 and 118 To keep people informed and get their views for 18 further improvement. Secure funding.

20 Implementation ់ Perhaps using self-build input from local people 21 on all or parts or the scheme. Opening ceremony. 22 ់ 23 Management body ់established Mainly comprising users of the facility. 24

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 135 CPH pages 130-163 10/7/06 14:09 Page 136

D SCENARIOS Disaster management

This scenario applies particularly to communities facing the threat of natural or human-made disasters such as ﬂoods, earthquakes, wind storms and industrial accidents.

Disasters tend to happen to people at risk. They are at risk because they are vulnerable to hazards. This vulnerability can best be reduced by increasing people’s capacity to deal with a range of social, cultural, economic and physical factors.

The key to successful disaster management is ensuring that victims and potential victims are involved. Much formal disaster management does not do this and is often unsustainable, costly and ineffective.

Participatory community-level disaster management involves a cross-section of people and interests in researching, planning and implementing projects. Because the projects are developed for and by local people, there is more interest, understanding and success in reducing suffering and losses. FURTHER INFORMATION The key principles of this approach are:  Methods: Prioritising. • Communities themselves are best placed to Risk assessment. prioritise threats and take effective risk ” Development at Risk. reducing actions. Disaster Mitigation. • The best time to reduce the impact of disasters b Federal Emergency is before the next disaster occurs. Management Agency (FEMA). • The identiﬁcation of hazards and who and South Bank University. what may be affected by them is necessary Ϡ Roger Bellers, Nick before risk reduction plans can be made. Hall. Based in part on • Progress has to be well publicised to maintain Project Impact programme run by interest and strengthen the culture of disaster FEMA. reduction.

136 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 130-163 10/7/06 14:09 Page 137

SCENARIOS D

Disaster Making communities more disaster-resistant by involving citizens, ofﬁcials and business. Applicable worldwide. Timescale management for low risk situation. Can be speeded up signiﬁcantly in emergencies. months 0 Building partnerships • Identify partners and interested parties. • Create a project team. • Establish objectives and working methods.

1 Risk assessment ់p112 • Hazard analysis (what the threats are, and their magnitude). • Vulnerability assessment (who and what will be affected). • Capacity assessment (who can do what to help) • Information synthesis (into a format useful for 2 planning, eg Geographical Interface System GIS).

Prioritising risk reduction់ actions • Estimate hazard effects (by matching hazard analysis with vulnerability assessment). • Construct scenarios of disaster losses (casualties, 3 destruction of property, damage to infrastructure, economic impact, length of recovery period). • Identify community priorities (through consultation and group meetings). • Collectively decide on preferred risk reduction (mitigation) measures. • Formulate strategic plan (with speciﬁc roles, 4 responsibilities, timescales and inputs). ់ Implementation • Actions taken in accordance with strategic plan. 5 ់ Monitoring, evaluation and updating • Distribute publicity materials to communicate progress and maintain momentum. • Evaluate and update strategic plan. 6

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 137 CPH pages 130-163 10/7/06 14:09 Page 138

E SCENARIOS Environmental art project

This scenario is about constructing environmental artworks.

The conventional approach would be for a local authority or landowner to appoint an artist to undertake the work. The artist might be given a completely free hand or, more likely, would submit designs for approval to the ‘client’. Although this process has led to some ﬁne environmental artworks, it has also resulted in artworks that are neither wanted nor respected by local inhabitants.

The scenario shown opposite makes it possible to create something that belongs to the community. Within a framework managed by artists, local people are involved in designing and making artworks and their work becomes part of the local landscape.

FURTHER INFORMATION

 Methods: Art workshop. Ϡ Candid Arts Trust. Freeform Arts Trust.

138 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 130-163 10/7/06 14:09 Page 139

SCENARIOS E

Environmental An initiative to improve the public environment by art project constructing a major sculpture, mosaic or other work of art. months 0 Initial concept Idea conceived by individual or group. 1

2 Partnership ់ Partnership formed between key parties to manage the project: eg landowners, local 3 authorities, instigators, local businesses, schools.

Consultation on concept់ 5 Through publicity in local press, discussions with interested parties. Develop brief. Fundraising. Formal approvals (eg planning permission). 6

7 Engage artists and craftspeople់ Through advertising or competition.

8 ់ 9 Art workshops p30 Devised and conducted by artists with local residents, school children or other groups. Design 10 options developed.

11 Exhibition and selection់ Public exhibition of design options with voting on 12 those to be constructed.

13 Implementation ់ Construction of ﬁnished artwork in art workshops 14 or on site, followed by opening celebration.

15 Management body ់established Mainly comprising users of the facility. 16

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 139 CPH pages 130-163 10/7/06 14:09 Page 140

H SCENARIOS Housing development

This scenario covers the building of a new housing development for a large number of people.

Conventionally, large housing developments are undertaken by governments or private developers. In both cases architects and contractors are appointed who mostly design and construct homes without knowing who they are for. As a result the new housing is frequently bland, wasteful and unsuited to the occupants. Occasionally it even has to be demolished because nobody will live in it.

In the scenario shown here, the future occupants are identiﬁed in advance. They may be owner- occupiers or tenants. They form themselves into an association or housing cooperative, appoint their own architects and work through the design and construction process together.

In this way people get the customised housing they want and develop a sense of community even before they have moved in. The experience of working together enables people to go on to develop other projects such as education,

FURTHER INFORMATION employment and social facilities.

 Methods: Brieﬁng workshop. Choice menu. Neighbourhood planning ofﬁce. Models. ” Building Homes People Want.

140 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 130-163 10/7/06 14:09 Page 141

SCENARIOS H

Housing A large new housing development is built with the future occupants involved from the outset. development Timescale assumes rapid approvals and efficient main contractor. months 0 Occupants form group 1 Families come together and form an association 2 or cooperative with help from advisors. Funding 3 mechanism agreed. Committees formed. 4 Architects appointed. 5 6 7 Briefing ់ Visits to other projects, illustrated questionnaires, 8 slide shows, skills survey, briefing workshops p34. 9 10 11 Site office ់ 12 Design base established in local hall or shop p84. 13 14 15 16 Design meetings ់ Regular sessions between architects and 17 occupants’ committees using models p82, 18 choice catalogues p36 and drawings to 19 determine scheme concept and layout. 20 21 22 Design surgeries ់ 23 Between architects and individual occupants to 24 agree room layouts, fixtures and fittings using models p82, mock-ups and choice catalogues 25 p36. 26 27 28 ់ 29 Construction Regular site visits. Possibly self build of all or part 30 of the scheme. 31 32 33 ់ 34 Other projects started Such as child care facilities, social facilities, 35 employment projects. 36

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 141 CPH pages 130-163 10/7/06 14:09 Page 142

I SCENARIOS Industrial heritage re-use

This scenario applies where industrial buildings become redundant, particularly if they have heritage value or could be used for other purposes.

Typically, as industrial buildings cease to be used, they will be left empty and become derelict. The area where they are situated becomes increasingly run down, and other businesses and landowners suffer. Unless an initiative is taken the buildings will eventually fall down or there will be little option but to demolish them and start again from scratch.

Industrial areas often contain fine, sturdy structures which contribute to local character. Often they are ideally suited for conversion for other purposes. The difficulty is in making a sufficiently bold transformation of an area to change its image, attract new uses and persuade landowners and others to invest.

In this scenario, a partnership is established between the main parties, and an academic institution plays a key role in raising the proﬁle of the area, assembling expertise and helping organise an action planning event to ﬁrm up a FURTHER INFORMATION strategy agreed by all.  Methods: Action planning event. Design assistance team. Ϡ John Worthington.

142 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 130-163 10/7/06 14:09 Page 143

SCENARIOS IA

Industrial heritage An academic institution helps a local authority regenerate a re-use run-down industrial area in a variety of ownerships. months 0 Local partnership established 1 Between local authority, local businesses and civic societies. Local authority provides administration. 2

3 Draft regeneration brief់ 4 Drawn up by Partnership. 5

6 National and academic់ support 7 Links made with academic institutions and national charitable bodies. 8

10 Consultant advice on់ participation options Help to the Partnership in developing and 11 organising the most suitable participation process.

13 Conference ់ National conference held at academic institution 14 on the generic issues faced, eg reviving our industrial heritage. Local issue introduced. Key 15 local players invited. 16

17 Action planning event់ p24 18 (following immediately from conference) Two days of action planning workshops for local 19 interests facilitated by a design assistance team made up from seminar members. Report of 20 recommendations circulated widely. 21

22 Implementation ់ 23 Partnership considers report and sets up implementation mechanisms. 24

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 143 CPH pages 130-163 10/7/06 14:09 Page 144

I SCENARIOS Inner city regeneration

This scenario shows how a deprived inner city area can transform itself over a period of almost a decade.

Starting by tenants gaining control of the management of their housing, a series of initiatives are taken as local people and their advisors become increasingly confident and competent in managing the regeneration process and forming partnerships. These include an improvement programme for existing housing estates, new housing development on infill sites, landscaping of open spaces, community arts and youth projects and, finally, the development of a community masterplan for attracting the private sector to invest in new housing, leisure and commercial projects, so leading to the creation of a balanced and sustainable community or ‘urban village’.

FURTHER INFORMATION

 Methods: Action planning event. Art workshop. Choice catalogue. Design game. Development trust. Neighbourhood planning ofﬁce. Planning day. Planning for Real. Review session. Ϡ Dick Watson.

144 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 130-163 10/7/06 14:09 Page 145

SCENARIOS I

Inner city Rejuvenation of a deprived inner city area dominated by regeneration blocks of local authority flats and lacking amenities. months 0 Tenant management organisation formed 3 Authority hands over management of flats to 6 tenants. Tenants appoint community architect. 9 12 Neighbourhood planning់ office opened p84 15 For tenant committees and consultants. 18 21 24 Housing estate improvement់ programme Scheme developed using Planning for Real 27 p100 and choice catalogues p36. 30 33 36 New housing ់ Designed and built by a local housing association 39 after a planning day p98. 42 45 48 Open space projects់ 51 Devised by special projects committee using design games p48. 54 57 60 Community arts and់ young people’s projects 63 Using arts workshops p30 and projects in schools. 66 69 Action planning event់ p24 72 To take stock and produce a strategy for future 75 action. With outsider and local design assistance team members. Lasting several days. 78 81 84 Review session p110.់ 87 90 93 Masterplan ់ Drawn up by development partnership and local 96 development trust p52. 99

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 145 CPH pages 130-163 10/7/06 14:09 Page 146

L SCENARIOS Local neighbourhood initiative

This scenario applies to any area where there are a number of institutional landowners and agencies operating and where local people want to break through inertia and improve the environment and quality of life.

So often the difﬁculty is getting all the various landowners and agencies to agree on a development strategy that is both visionary and based on what local people want. Without such agreement, development takes place in a mundane and piecemeal fashion, if at all, the most important local needs may not be addressed and opportunities offered by the natural environment are missed. At worst, new initiatives may be destroyed by vandalism and crime.

The scenario shown here ensures that local people start off and remain at the centre of the regeneration process but that all the agencies and land owners are also involved and can play their part.

FURTHER INFORMATION

 Methods: Planning weekend. Process planning session. Neighbourhood planning ofﬁce. Open space workshop. User group.

146 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 130-163 10/7/06 14:09 Page 147

SCENARIOS L

Local neighbourhood Local people in a rundown neighbourhood and agencies working with them take the initiative initiative to speed up the regeneration process. months 0 Process planning session p106 1 or open space workshop p90 Evening session organised for local groups and 2 agencies in local venue. Workshop session results in choice of process for the next step (planning 3 weekend in this scenario).

5 Steering Group ់ All stakeholders invited to participate. Regular 6 meetings. Working groups established (eg publicity, fundraising). Funding secured for event. 7

8 Coordinator ់ 9 Part-time appointment. Preferably local resident. 10

11 Planning weekend ់p102 12 Programme of action determined including setting up a development forum. 13

14 Development forum់ 15 Develops and publicises action plan.

17 Neighbourhood planning់ ofﬁce p84 18 Local ofﬁce established in an empty shop.

20 Review session p110់ Planning weekend team revisits one year after event. 21

23 Development trust ់p52 Trust established to coordinate programme. 24

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 147 CPH pages 130-163 10/7/06 14:09 Page 148

N SCENARIOS New neighbourhood

This scenario shows how creative proposals can be developed for a new neighbourhood, extension to a neighbourhood or completely new settlement.

Mostly with such developments, it is left to the private sector to come up with proposals, or else consultants might be invited to prepare a masterplan for consideration by the authorities. In both cases, the crucial design conception stage tends to take place without engaging local people or a sufﬁciently broad range of expertise. When consultation does ﬁnally take place, it is too late for all but minor changes to be incorporated.

In the scenario shown, initial proposals are developed, at relatively little cost, by a task force of experts and students from a wide range of disciplines and backgrounds, in close consultation with local interested parties. These are then reﬁned through further local input and drawn up in detail by a professional team.

The organisers are likely to be an urban design consultancy, architecture centre or urban design FURTHER INFORMATION studio at a school of architecture or planning.  Methods: Architecture centre. Newspaper supplement. Mobile unit. Open house event. Reconnaissance trip. Task force. Urban design studio.

148 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 130-163 10/7/06 14:09 Page 149

SCENARIOS N

New neighbourhood Devising proposals for a new neighbourhood by involving a task force of experts and students working closely with local interested parties. Timescale assumes co-operative landowner. months 0 Reconnaissance p108 1  Visit by small team of experienced facilitators. 2 Meetings with local leaders and institutions. Local 3 decision made to invite task force. Organisers 4 asked to proceed. 5 6 7 Task force p122 ់ Six week visit by international design assistance 8 team and students. Possible use of mobile studio 9 unit. Masterplan developed. 10 11 12 Open house event ់p88 13 Masterplan and other proposals exhibited to 14 encourage local input. 15 16 17 Newspaper supplement់ p86 18 Proposals published in a local newspaper, on a local electronic map or in a book. Input invited. 19 20 21 Professional team ់ 22 Architects and planners appointed by city 23 authorities to draw up scheme in detail. 24 25 26 Formal consultation់ 27 With utilities, service providers and so on, as well 28 as with public. Revisions made as necessary. 29 30 31 Formal political approval់ By planning authorities and local authorities. 32 Revisions, tenders, scheme drawings. 33 34 35 Construction starts ់ 36

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 149 CPH pages 130-163 10/7/06 14:09 Page 150

R SCENARIOS Planning study

This scenario applies where professional planning consultants are commissioned by a local authority or landowner to produce recommendations on future development options in a relatively short period of time.

The conventional approach would be for the consultants to prepare a report based entirely on their past experience and researching available literature.

In the scenario shown here, the consultants also include a consultation process which has to be tightly time-tabled to suit their client’s timescale. This ensures that the consultants’ proposals are based on up-to-date knowledge of local people’s views and that local people begin to become involved in the development process.

FURTHER INFORMATION

 Methods: Participatory editing. Planning day. Process planning session.

150 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 130-163 10/7/06 14:09 Page 151

SCENARIOS R

Planning study Planning consultants are asked by a local authority to prepare a study of the potential of a large sector of a city. The timescale is short. months 0 Press release Publicise objectives. Invite involvement.

Survey ់ Send survey form to individuals and organisations known to have useful data. 1 ់ Letter and invitation Send letter to organisations inviting representatives to attend a process planning session. ់ Process planning session p106 Brieﬁng on objectives and limitations. Workshop 2 to establish nature of planning day (or other activities).

Planning day p98់ Report progress to date, including survey results. Establish issues, opportunities and possible solutions. Determine future consultation strategy.

3 ់ Draft report - participatory editing p92 Circulate a draft report to all those expressing interest for comment. Revise.

Final report ់ Submit to client. 4

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 151 CPH pages 130-163 10/7/06 14:09 Page 152

R SCENARIOS Regeneration infrastructure

This scenario shows how the framework for encouraging community planning can be improved by government and private and voluntary agencies. It can be applied at national, regional or even international level.

The focus is on supporting and promoting the setting up of enabling mechanisms, some of which will become self-ﬁnancing after a period of time.

The costs involved are a fraction of the support normally given to regeneration programmes and the long-term beneﬁts are likely to be far greater.

FURTHER INFORMATION

 Methods: Architecture centre. Award scheme. Community design centre. Feasibility fund. Ideas competition. Neighbourhood planning ofﬁce. Planning aid. Useful checklists: Initiatives needed.

152 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 130-163 10/7/06 14:09 Page 153

SCENARIOS R

Regeneration Leading institutions and government collaborate to set up a framework to support community planning initiatives at infrastructure local level. months 0 Ideas competition p70 1  For best ideas for promoting community planning. 2 3 4 Policy conference ់ 5 Organised by urban charity for all sectors of the 6 development industry. 7 8 9 Feasibility fund p62់ 10 For community projects. Established by professional 11 institute in association with a corporate sponsor. 12 13 14 Planning aid scheme់ p96 15 Established by Planning Institute. Pilot in one area 16 followed by national launch one year later. 17 18 19 Award scheme launched់ p32 20 For best community planning projects. 21 22 23 Seed funding ់ 24 Government grants for setting up architecture 25 centres, community design centres and 26 neighbourhood planning ofﬁces. pp28,38,84 27 28 29 Good practice dissemination់ 30 Publication of how-to books and videos based on 31 award scheme and feasibility study applications. 32 33 34 Review conference ់ 35 To assess progress and plan new initiatives. 36

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 153 CPH pages 130-163 10/7/06 14:09 Page 154

S SCENARIOS Shanty settlement upgrading

This scenario applies to the informal settlements which proliferate around many cities in developing countries. The residents may be squatters, tenants or owner-occupiers.

Often, authorities ignore such places, leaving them to their own devices. Alternatively they may attempt to have them demolished on the grounds that they are unsightly, unhealthy or unlawful.

In this scenario the authorities support the residents to upgrade their settlement by providing technical assistance. Over the years, services are installed, roads are improved and building construction standards raised.

FURTHER INFORMATION Eventually such settlements can become almost indistinguishable from other parts of the city.  Methods: Community design centre. Community proﬁling. Field workshop. Microplanning workshop. Risk assessment. ” Action Planning for Cities. b Centre for Development and Emergency Practice. International Institute for Environment and Development. Ϡ Nick Hall.

154 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 130-163 10/7/06 14:09 Page 155

SCENARIOS S

Shanty settlement Residents gradually upgrade their homes and neighbourhood with assistance from the authorities, technical experts and upgrading support agencies. months 0 Land development People build and adapt homes with whatever 3 resources are available.

9 Committee formed ់ Residents form a committee and develop contacts 12 with the authorities, technical experts and support agencies. 15

18 Field workshop p62់ Community proﬁling, risk assessment pp42,112. 21 Plan of action created with input from technical experts, local authorities and support agencies. 24

27 Project groups created់ 30 To deal with speciﬁc aspects of the plan, eg. sewers, roads, water supply, construction standards. Groups meet regularly and negotiate 33 with authorities. Community design centre established p38. 36

39 Microplanning workshops់ p78 42 Plan of action reviewed and revised. Project groups reorganised as appropriate. 45

48 Action plans progressed់ Project groups pursue targets agreed at 51 microplanning workshops.

57 Neighbourhood council់ established A more formal version of original committee. 60

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 155 CPH pages 130-163 10/7/06 14:09 Page 156

T SCENARIOS Town centre upgrade

This scenario applies when a planning authority wants to initiate improvement of a town centre area.

Many town centre areas have developed in a piecemeal fashion over a number of years. Land will be in a variety of ownerships. Buildings are likely to have been designed with little respect for overall urban design.

If the planning department does nothing, the piecemeal approach will continue and fundamental issues will never be solved.

The approach shown here allows a planning authority to involve all the many different interests in developing an overall strategy which can be incorporated into the planning framework.

FURTHER INFORMATION

 Methods: Open house event. Planning day. Process planning session. User group.

156 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 130-163 10/7/06 14:09 Page 157

SCENARIOS T

Town centre upgrade A planning department initiates development of part of the town centre without the conﬂict between developers and citizens so common in much town centre development. months 0 Consultant advice 1 On development and public participation options. 2 3 4 Process planning session់ p106 5 With amenity groups and politicians. 6 7 Political endorsement for process 8 ់ Approval to proceed from local authority. 9 10 11 Process planning session់ and public launch 12 Working lunch for all stakeholders: property 13 owners, developers, politicians, voluntary sector. 14 15 Steering group 16 ់ Formation. Information gathering. Technical 17 work. Production of brieﬁng material. 18 19 20 Planning day p98់ 21 Design workshops (p50) for stakeholders. Invitation only. Development options prepared. 22 23 24 Open house event ់p88 25 Public reaction to options using interactive displays. 26 27 28 Draft development ់brief 29 Master Plan, standards, funding strategy. 30 31 Formal consultation 32 ់ With public. Endorsement from politicians. 33 34 35 Development proposal់ published 36

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 157 CPH pages 130-163 10/7/06 14:09 Page 158

U SCENARIOS Urban conservation

This scenario covers an initiative to improve the state of historic buildings in a town.

Restoring buildings is very costly and sufﬁcient public funds are rarely available to meet the demand. In this scenario the local authorities allocate funding for three years to start up an independent project providing technical assistance and taking initiatives. As well as administering grants to pump-prime quality repairs by private owners, the project undertakes a wide range of education programmes aimed at raising awareness and stimulating initiatives by both private individuals and community groups.

When the funding period expires, the project is converted into a development trust controlled by local people. As skills and interest grow, the trust takes on a broader and more far-reaching role.

FURTHER INFORMATION

 Methods: Activity week. Architecture centre. Award scheme. Community design centre. Development trust. Environment shop.

158 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 130-163 10/7/06 14:10 Page 159

SCENARIOS U

Urban conservation An initiative to improve the state of historic buildings in an area by raising awareness and stimulating a wide range of local activity. months 0 Regeneration project established As a partnership between local authorities, 3 national agencies and local amenity groups. Funding for three years. Staff team appointed. 6

9 Technical aid centre់ and shop pp38, 60 12 Supplying information on old buildings, providing technical advice, administering grant schemes, undertaking feasibility studies. 15 18 ់ Activity week started p26 21 Annual ‘conservation week’ set up and managed.

27 Annual award scheme់ established For best restoration and enhancement projects. 30

33 Conversion to development់ trust p52 36 Project converted to a development trust as core funding ends. Control transferred to community 39 membership with authorities in supporting role. 42 ់ 45 Architecture centre p28 Conservation shop evolves into architecture centre reﬂecting a changing focus in line with members’ 48 wishes and the need to generate income.

54 Community partnership់ Trust plays key role in a broader regeneration 57 partnership with local authorities, businesses and educational institutions. 60

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 159 CPH pages 130-163 10/7/06 14:10 Page 160

V SCENARIOS Village revival

This scenario covers a village developing initiatives to preserve and build on its local character.

With changes in traditional agricultural practices, many villages suffer from either development pressure or loss of population. Often political control is exercised many miles away and local people feel powerless to do anything about it.

In this scenario parish mapping is used to generate interest and understanding. Villagers then decide to develop a local design statement to guide new development and a countryside design summary is prepared to make better links with the character of the surrounding region.

Finally, with the experience of learning to work together, a number of project groups are established to develop new facilities.

FURTHER INFORMATION

 Methods: Community proﬁling. Local design statement. Mapping. Photo survey. Review session.

160 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 130-163 10/7/06 14:10 Page 161

SCENARIOS V

Village revival A village community takes steps to protect the traditional character and develop new facilities.

months 0 Community proﬁling p42 Parish mapping p76 or other methods used to generate information and interest. 3

6 ់ Community planning forum p40 Evening session in a local hall with exhibition of 9 parish maps to discuss next steps. Decision to produce a local design statement. Steering group formed. 12

15 ់ Local design statement p74 Produced using mapping p76 and photo 18 surveys p94. Statement adopted by authorities.

21 ់ Countryside design summary 24 Produced by regional authorities. Glossary

27 ់ Review session p110 30 To determine future initiatives needed.

33 ់ Project groups Established to pursue further initiatives including 36 a community centre and transport initiative. 39 ់ Local design statement revised 42

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 161 CPH pages 130-163 10/7/06 14:10 Page 162

W SCENARIOS Whole settlement strategy

A whole settlement strategy creates a vision for a FURTHER INFORMATION village, town or city as a whole and sets out ways  Methods: Future to achieve it: How does the place work? What is search conference. Interactive display. good about it? What is bad? What needs Open house event. changing? How can we plan for a sustainable Useful checklists: future? Community plan content. b Hertfordshire County A conventional approach would be for a local Council. authority to engage town planning or ” Community Visions development consultants to produce a plan Pack. which would then be put out to consultation, modiﬁed and adopted.

This scenario shows one way in which community participation can be incorporated into the development of such a strategy from the outset. This is a requirement set by the United Nations in its ‘Agenda 21’. It also improves the likelihood that the strategy will be approved of and implemented. Whole settlement strategies can form the basis for more detailed Community Plans.

162 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 130-163 10/7/06 14:10 Page 163

SCENARIOS W

Whole settlement A local authority initiates a strategy to improve a town’s sustainability, involving local people strategy and service providers in its creation. months 0 Working party Established by local authorities involving as many 1 interested parties as possible. Initial planning of process. Gathering of brieﬁng documentation. 2

3 Consultants appointed់ If necessary to advise on process. Detailed planning and organisation. Training. 4

5 Future search conference់ p66 Or other visioning process. Involving 60–70 people from as many different interest groups as possible. 6

7 Focus groups ់ Sessions to cover any groups not covered at 8 future search conference.

9 Feedback conference់ 10 To report on future search conference and focus groups and decide on next steps.

Steering group – community់ partnership 12 Appointed at future search conference to guide the overall process. Detailed proposals drawn up 13 by working parties with local authority ofﬁcers.

14 Open house or interactive់ exhibition p88 15 Proposals presented to general public for comment. Feedback incorporated by steering group.

Formal approval 17 ់ Authority formally adopts strategy and promotes implementation. Steering Group monitors progress. 18

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 163 CPH pages 164-180 10/7/06 14:23 Page 164 CPH pages 164-180 10/7/06 14:23 Page 165

METHOD Appendices

Useful formats Strategy planner 166 Workshop planner 167 Action planning event planner 168 Action planner 170 Progress monitor 170 Evaluation form 171

Useful checklists Equipment and supplies 172 Who to involve 174 Neighbourhood skills survey 175 Community plan content 176 Initiatives needed 178

Glossary A–Z 181

Publications and ﬁlm A–Z 203

Contacts A–Z 209

Action planning workshop, Sidon, Lebanon, 1997

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 165 CPH pages 164-180 10/7/06 14:23 Page 166

Useful formats

Strategy planner For planning an overall community planning strategy incorporating a variety of methods (see p6). Example used: Improving a largely residential urban neighbourhood

Method Who involved? Timescale Purpose Responsibility (from start)

Initial meeting Resident groups 1 month Discuss process Agency officer Agency reps Process planning Resident groups 2 months Decide process Area Forum session Agency reps Speaker/facilitator Youth project Local schools 4 months Gain children’s Youth leaders Youth clubs ideas and support Press release General public 5 months Launch event. Co-ordinator Public awareness and involvement Action planning All stakeholders 7 months Develop strategy Area Forum/ event options Technical College Interactive General public 8 months Feedback on Area Forum/ exhibition options Housing officers Local plan Local authority 12 months Improve policy. Planning officers revision Formalise action draft plan Local planning General public 18 months Implement Area Forum centre Urban designers action plan. Housing agency Improve agency Planning officers coordination Local plan General public 20 months Statutory Local authority formal obligation consultation Planning day All stakeholders 24 months Review progress Area Forum etc etc etc etc etc

166 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 164-180 10/7/06 14:23 Page 167

USEFUL FORMATS

Workshop planner To help plan a workshop. Suitable for most types of workshop. Example used: Afternoon workshop session as part of a conference

Time Activity Format Minutes Responsibility Equipment 10.00 Briefing. Meeting 15 John Workshop Explain roles sheets to facilitators 12.25 Announcement. Plenary 5 Sue None Explain aims & procedure 13.00 Preparation. Lunch break 20 Workshop Flipcharts, pads, Setting up of facilitators Blu-tack, pens, workshop spaces banners, labels 14.00 Workshop intros Workshop 10 Workshop Attendance groups facilitators sheets 14.10 First exercise. Workshop 10 Workshop Post its 3 initiatives groups facilitators (separate colour needed (on for each group) separate post-its) 14.20 Prioritising on Workshop 15 Workshop Large sheets of large sheets groups facilitators paper, felt-tips ……… ………………… ………… … ………………… ………………… ………………… ………… ………………… ………………… ……… ………………… ………… … ………………… ………………… ………………… ………… ………………… …………………

etc etc etc etc etc etc

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 167 CPH pages 164-180 10/7/06 14:23 Page 168

USEFUL FORMATS

Action planning event planner To help start shaping any kind of action planning event (or thinking through whether one would be useful at all). Can be used in a workshop session after a presentation, or as part of a training exercise (see page 107 for sample format).

AIMS 1. What do you want to achieve from an action planning event? ...... 2. What are the main issues to be addressed? ...... 3. What geographical area should it cover? ......

NATURE OF EVENT 4. How long should the event (or events) be? ...... 5. When should the event be? (dates) ...... 6. What speciﬁc activities should take place, and in what order? ...... 7. Who are the key people to invite? ...... 8. Should there be an independent team of facilitators from outside the area? YES/NO 9. If YES what expertise do you want on the team? ...... 10. Any ideas for names of team members or the team chairperson? ......

ORGANISATION 11. Which organisation/s should host the event? ...... 12. Who else should help and how? ...... 13. Who will do the administration? ...... 14. Where should the event be held? Workshops? ...... Presentations? ......

168 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 164-180 10/7/06 14:23 Page 169

USEFUL FORMATS

Meals? ...... Hotels? ...... 15. What brieﬁng material should be made available or prepared? ...... 16. Who will make sure that the results of the event are used and built on afterwards? ......

MONEY 17. How much will it cost (roughly)? 18. Who might sponsor it (or do things free)? Admin £…… …………………………………………………… Venues £…… …………………………………………………… Publicity £…… …………………………………………………… Catering £…… …………………………………………………… Equipment £…… …………………………………………………… Photography £…… …………………………………………………… Travel £…… …………………………………………………… Accommodation £…… …………………………………………………… Report printing £…… …………………………………………………… Follow-up activity £…… …………………………………………………… Other £…… …………………………………………………… Total £……

IMMEDIATE NEXT STEPS 19. Who does what now? ......

OTHER THOUGHTS AND IDEAS 20......

Name and contact details (optional) ......

Date......

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 169 CPH pages 164-180 10/7/06 14:23 Page 170

USEFUL FORMATS

Action planner For use at workshops or meetings.

Workshop title/theme Getting around Date and time 4 October 2001, 4pm Convenor Mary

Topic Action needed By whom When Help needed Priority (1-5)

Traffic Pedestrian plan Environment July Traffic engineers 2 forum Cycle racks Install Traders May Welding 4 Bus timetable Display at all stops Bus company June - 3 etc etc etc etc etc etc

Progress monitor For summarising the outcome of community planning activity and planning the next steps. Compile and circulate for comment to a range of participants to get a full picture.

Example used: Developing a community plan

Topic Action taken By whom Outcome Next step By whom

Controlled Input into design Forum New zones in - - parking of questionnaire place.

Waste Schools promotion Forum Higher recycling Resident Residents recycling rates noted promotion associations

Cycle routes Working party Cycle club Cycleway plan Publicise Radio set up being developed for comment Libraries

District plan Consultation All voluntary Revisions made Repeat Planners organisations next year

Station Owner contacted. Planning Nothing Invite to Jenny officer design workshop

etc etc etc etc etc etc

170 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 164-180 10/7/06 14:23 Page 171

USEFUL FORMATS

Evaluation form For evaluating most kinds of community planning activity. Can provide insights on impacts, participants’ perceptions and improvements needed. Customise to suit. Circulate to a range of participants or use as a basis for an interview or workshop agenda. Repeating the exercise at intervals may be worthwhile as the impact of activity will often not become clear for many years.

Name ______Organisation (if any) ______Address ______Position (if any) ______

Title of activity ______Date/s of activity ______Nature of activity ______Date of evaluation ______

1 Your role in activity ______

2 How did you become involved? ______

3 What do you think are/were the aims? ______

4 What do you think motivated people and organisations to get involved? ______

5 What effect if any has your personal contribution in the activity made? ______

6 What effect has the activity had on the physical environment? ______

7 What effect has the activity had on the local economy? ______

8 What effect has the activity had on local organisations? ______(eg changed roles, new partnerships, etc)

9 What effect has the activity had on individuals? ______(eg locals, visitors, investors etc)

10 Was the activity worthwhile? ______If so, why? ______

11 What improvements would you make if it was being done again?______

12 What would be your advice to others organising a similar activity? ______

13 What additional information sources would be helpful? ______

14 Any other comments? ______

Thank you for your time. Please return this form to: ______

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 171 CPH pages 164-180 10/7/06 14:23 Page 172

Useful checklists

Equipment and supplies ᔤ Desks ᔤ Dictating and transcribing equipment An overall checklist of items which may ᔤ Drawing boards or drawing tables be helpful for those planning activities in ᔤ Drinks facility and fridge compiling their own lists. Checklists for ᔤ Easels and pads (24”x 30”) some specific methods are provided on ᔤ Erasers the methods pages. ᔤ Exhibition facilities ᔤ Extension cables Having the right equipment and supplies can ᔤ Filing trays make the difference between success and ᔤ Film: failure. Different events and activities colour slides for presentations obviously require different equipment and colour or black & white prints for reports supplies. Some require very little, if anything. ᔤ Film projector and screen ᔤ Flat-bed photo-stand with colour corrected ᔤ Banners and directional signs with fixings lamps (for shooting drawings and plans) ᔤ Base maps and plans of the area at and spare bulbs different scales (1:200 and 1:400 most ᔤ Flipcharts (with non-squeaky pens) commonly used) ᔤ Food and drink ᔤ Base model with movable parts ᔤ Hole punches ᔤ Bell or whistle (to announce meetings etc) ᔤ Layout pads (grid marked with non-repro ᔤ Blackboard and chalk blue ink) ᔤ Blackout curtains ᔤ Light box (for sorting slides) ᔤ Blu-tack ᔤ Lighting, including desk lighting ᔤ Box files ᔤ Lock-up for valuable equipment ᔤ Cameras: ᔤ Name badges (or blank sticky labels) 35mm or digital with wide-angle, ᔤ Overhead or opaque projectors with telephoto, flash and close-up facility transparency film and markers (handy for Polaroid (for instant prints) sketching and for presentations) ᔤ Cardboard or polystyrene (for modelmaking) ᔤ Paper: ᔤ Catering gear (cups, plates, cutlery, A4 & A2 sketch pads napkins, urn, kettle etc.) A4 writing pads (lined) ᔤ Chairs (stackable?) and stools tracing (white and yellow) ᔤ Chalk (different colours) A5 note pads ᔤ Clipboards flipchart pads ᔤ Clock with alarm (for timing speakers) butcher paper (long strips) ᔤ Cocktail sticks (for use with model) ᔤ Paperclips ᔤ Compasses ᔤ Paper trimmer or guillotine ᔤ Computer equipment: ᔤ Pencils: normal; coloured laptop ᔤ Pens: laser printer and toner felt-tips in bright colours and grey tones scanner if possible (different sizes); DTP and word processing software fibre-tipped with medium and fine tips disks ball points (black and red) ᔤ Correction fluid technical drawing ᔤ Cutting knives, mats, metal edge and highlighters spare blades ᔤ Photocopier with enlarging/reducing

172 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 164-180 10/7/06 14:23 Page 173

USEFUL CHECKLISTS

facility (with rapid repair service) ᔤ Photocopier paper, toner etc ᔤ Pin board or pin-up wall ᔤ Pins – different colours: drawing pins stick pins ᔤ Plan storage system ᔤ Pocket notebooks (for shirt pockets) ᔤ Pointer stick for presentations (1 metre) ᔤ Post-its (different sizes and colours) ᔤ Power outlets ᔤ Pritt-sticks ᔤ Public address system with microphones on stands and roving ᔤ Ring binders (A4) ᔤ Rubber bands ᔤ Rubber cement ᔤ Rubbish bags ᔤ Rulers and scale rulers ᔤ Scissors ᔤ Screen for copying photographs ᔤ Shelving and ﬁling space ᔤ Slide projectors (carousel type) with screens, blackout drapes, spare carousel trays, spare fuses, spare bulbs, extension cord, remote buttons with extra long cord and pointer torch ᔤ Spraymount adhesive ᔤ Staples and staple extractors ᔤ Sticky dots (many colours) ᔤ Tables ᔤ Tape: masking tape magic tape heavy duty tape ᔤ Tape recorder and cassettes ᔤ Telephones and fax machines ᔤ Toilet paper ᔤ T-squares, triangles and circle templates ᔤ Velcro pads ᔤ Video camera and cassettes ᔤ Video play-back equipment (if relevant) ᔤ Waste bins and garbage bags ᔤ ...... ᔤ ...... ᔤ ......

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 173 CPH pages 164-180 10/7/06 14:23 Page 174

USEFUL CHECKLISTS

Who to involve ᔤ Local history groups ᔤ Media groups and organisations A checklist of people and organisations ᔤ Migrants who might need to be involved in any ᔤ Minority groups community planning initiative. Customise ᔤ Mothers’ unions your own list. ᔤ Museums (especially local history) ᔤ Non-governmental organisations (NGOs) ᔤ Allotment holders ᔤ Parent–teacher organisations ᔤ Archaeological groups ᔤ Parish councils ᔤ Archaeologists ᔤ Photographers ᔤ Architects ᔤ Planners ᔤ Builders ᔤ Playgroups ᔤ Businesses ᔤ Police ᔤ Chambers of commerce ᔤ Postmen and women ᔤ Charities ᔤ Professional institutions and groups ᔤ Children ᔤ Property owners ᔤ Churches ᔤ Public works departments ᔤ Civic societies and groups ᔤ Publicans ᔤ Colleges ᔤ Ramblers ᔤ Community associations ᔤ Religious groups ᔤ Community-based organisations (CBOs) ᔤ Residents groups and associations ᔤ Community leaders ᔤ Rural community councils ᔤ Community woodland groups ᔤ Schools ᔤ Companies ᔤ Senior citizens ᔤ Conservation groups ᔤ Shopkeepers ᔤ Countryside management ofﬁcers ᔤ Sports groups ᔤ Craftspeople ᔤ Squatters and squatters’ groups ᔤ Designers ᔤ Statutory agencies ᔤ Developers ᔤ Street cleaners ᔤ Disability groups ᔤ Student groups ᔤ Ecologists ᔤ Surveyors ᔤ Economists ᔤ Teachers ᔤ Engineers ᔤ Tenant groups and associations ᔤ Environmental groups ᔤ Town managers ᔤ Ethnic groups ᔤ Traders ᔤ Estate agents ᔤ Transport groups ᔤ Farmers ᔤ Transport operators ᔤ Financial institutions ᔤ Transport planners ᔤ Footpath and access groups ᔤ Universities ᔤ Funding agencies ᔤ Urban designers ᔤ Health workers ᔤ Utility providers ᔤ Homeless people ᔤ Village hall committees ᔤ Industrialists ᔤ Wildlife groups ᔤ Journalists ᔤ Women’s groups ᔤ Land managers ᔤ Women's institutes ᔤ Landowners ᔤ Workforces ᔤ Landscape architects ᔤ Young people ᔤ Lawyers ᔤ Youth clubs, guides and scouts ᔤ Local authorities ᔤ ......

174 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 164-180 10/7/06 14:23 Page 175

USEFUL CHECKLISTS

Neighbourhood skills survey ᔤᔤ Negotiation ᔤᔤ Nursing A checklist of skills for finding out what ᔤᔤ Organising events talent exists in a community. Use it to ᔤᔤ Photography compile your own survey form. Illustrate ᔤᔤ Playing music it if you want. Then distribute it round ᔤᔤ Plumbing the neighbourhood or, better still, knock ᔤᔤ Pottery on doors and help people fill it in. ᔤᔤ Public speaking ᔤᔤ Publicity ᔤᔤ Roofing ᔤᔤ Running a bar ᔤᔤ Running a cafe

Keen beginner Experienced ᔤᔤ Sports (please specify) ᔤᔤ Acting ᔤᔤ Sculpting ᔤᔤ Artwork ᔤᔤ Site clearing ᔤᔤ Babysitting ᔤᔤ Teaching ᔤᔤ Bicycle repairs ᔤᔤ Translating (specify languages) ᔤᔤ Book keeping ᔤᔤ Typing ᔤᔤ Building ᔤᔤ Video work ᔤᔤ Campaigning ᔤᔤ Woodwork ᔤᔤ Car mechanics ᔤᔤ Writing and editing ᔤᔤ Catering ᔤᔤ Youth work ᔤᔤ Chatting ᔤᔤ ...... ᔤᔤ Child minding ᔤᔤ ...... ᔤᔤ Community planning ᔤᔤ ...... ᔤᔤ Computer operating ᔤᔤ ...... ᔤᔤ Computer repairs ᔤᔤ Decorating ᔤᔤ Disc jockey ᔤᔤ Drawing ᔤᔤ Dress making ᔤᔤ Driving a bus ᔤᔤ Driving a car ᔤᔤ Driving a truck ᔤᔤ Electrical work ᔤᔤ Embroidery ᔤᔤ Facilitating workshops ᔤᔤ First aid ᔤᔤ Fundraising ᔤᔤ Gardening ᔤᔤ Graphic design ᔤᔤ Hut erection ᔤᔤ Journalism ᔤᔤ Keeping people informed ᔤᔤ Knitting ᔤᔤ Landscaping ᔤᔤ Letter writing ᔤᔤ Managing ᔤᔤ Motorbike repairs

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 175 CPH pages 164-180 10/7/06 14:23 Page 176

USEFUL CHECKLISTS

Community plan content ᔤ Dogs and other pets ᔤ Drainage A checklist of items that might be ᔤ Drug abuse considered in a community plan or ᔤ Economic generators masterplan. Customise and structure your ᔤ Education facilities own list. ᔤ Electricity supplies ᔤ Employment ᔤ Accessibility ᔤ Energy ᔤ Action plans – for various time periods ᔤ Enterprise ᔤ Advice services ᔤ Entertainment facilities ᔤ Air quality ᔤ Environmental art ᔤ Alcohol abuse ᔤ Erosion ᔤ Allotments ᔤ Events ᔤ Animals and birds ᔤ Farming ᔤ Anti-social behaviour ᔤ Flooding ᔤ Archaeology ᔤ Fly-posting ᔤ Architecture ᔤ Fly-tipping ᔤ Arts – visual and performing ᔤ Friendliness ᔤ Bad neighbour uses ᔤ Fumes ᔤ Boating facilities ᔤ Fund-raising ᔤ Building scale and character ᔤ Gardens ᔤ Building skills ᔤ Gas supplies ᔤ Building use ᔤ Grafﬁti ᔤ Burial sites ᔤ Health ᔤ Buses ᔤ Historic connections ᔤ Cafes ᔤ Homework clubs ᔤ Carnivals and celebrations ᔤ Human resources ᔤ Character of the area ᔤ Image ᔤ Childcare facilities ᔤ Implementation mechanisms ᔤ Churches ᔤ Indoor sports ᔤ Cinemas ᔤ Inﬁll sites ᔤ Clubs and societies ᔤ Information availability ᔤ Colour – of buildings and townscape ᔤ Information technology ᔤ Community care facilities ᔤ Innovation ᔤ Community centres ᔤ Internet access ᔤ Community participation strategies ᔤ Lakes and ponds ᔤ Community trusts ᔤ Land and property use ᔤ Conservation of buildings ᔤ Land and property values ᔤ Conservation of landscape ᔤ Landmarks ᔤ Crafts ᔤ Libraries and other learning facilities ᔤ Crime – causes and deterrents ᔤ Licensing ᔤ Culture ᔤ Lighting - streets and buildings ᔤ Cycle facilities ᔤ Links and alleyways ᔤ Dance venues ᔤ Litter ᔤ Densities of development ᔤ Litter bins ᔤ Development opportunities ᔤ Leisure facilities ᔤ Disability facilities ᔤ Local authorities ᔤ Disabled access ᔤ Local exchange trading ᔤ Disaster management ᔤ Local organisations and institutions

176 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 164-180 10/7/06 14:23 Page 177

USEFUL CHECKLISTS

ᔤ Local produce ᔤ Special needs facilities ᔤ Local shops ᔤ Sports facilities – pitches, courts ᔤ Low income support systems ᔤ Sports opportunities ᔤ Maintenance and management systems ᔤ Street cleaning ᔤ Market gardens ᔤ Street lighting ᔤ Markets – indoor and outdoor ᔤ Street signs and numbering ᔤ Men’s facilities ᔤ Street trees ᔤ Minority groups ᔤ Streetscape ᔤ Mixed uses ᔤ Sustainability ᔤ Music venues ᔤ Targets for action ᔤ Noise ᔤ Temporary uses ᔤ Older people facilities ᔤ Timescales ᔤ Open spaces ᔤ Tourism ᔤ Parks and public gardens ᔤ Townscape ᔤ Paths ᔤ Traffic ᔤ Pedestrians ᔤ Traffic calming ᔤ Planning procedures ᔤ Traffic routes ᔤ Play facilities ᔤ Transport options ᔤ Policing ᔤ Vacant buildings ᔤ Pollution ᔤ Vacant land ᔤ Poverty and wealth ᔤ Vernacular architecture ᔤ Power supplies ᔤ Views ᔤ Principles of development ᔤ Visitors ᔤ Public art ᔤ Voluntary organisations ᔤ Public squares ᔤ Voluntary services ᔤ Pubs ᔤ Water features ᔤ Quality of design ᔤ Water supplies ᔤ Quality of life ᔤ Women’s facilities ᔤ Quality of local services ᔤ Youth clubs ᔤ Railings ᔤ Youth services ᔤ Railways and station locations ᔤ ...... ᔤ Recycling waste material ᔤ ...... ᔤ Refuse collection ᔤ ...... ᔤ Religions ᔤ ...... ᔤ Resource centres ᔤ Restaurants ᔤ Rivers and streams ᔤ Road building and maintenance ᔤ Safety ᔤ Schools ᔤ School use out of hours ᔤ Sense of identity ᔤ Sense of place ᔤ Sense of safety ᔤ Sewage disposal ᔤ Shopping facilities ᔤ Smell ᔤ Social inclusion and mix ᔤ Social services

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 177 CPH pages 164-180 10/7/06 14:23 Page 178

USEFUL CHECKLISTS

Initiatives needed អ Derelict land and buildings A checklist of general policy initiatives Derelict land and buildings (both public that may help make community planning and private) should be made available for more effective. Customise to suit your community-led initiatives and be made the country, place and circumstances. subject of punitive taxes to encourage their productive use.

អ Build locally អ Educating enablers Locally-based building activity should be The curricula of architecture and planning encouraged so that the economic beneﬁts schools should include relevant training of development stay within the for professional enablers. Live project units community. Provision for the employment – urban design studios – should be set up of local labour and training of local people at all schools, to undertake community in building skills should be considered for projects. inclusion in any building contract. អ Environmental education អ Career incentives Environmental education programmes for Community planning expertise should be the public should be expanded so that recognised and encouraged with more people learn how the built environment effective and systematic training works and how they can take part in programmes and career opportunities. improving it. Environmental education should form part of primary and អ Centres of activity and information secondary school curricula, and New centres, or networks of centres, on comprehensive networks of urban and community planning should be established rural studies centres should be at national and regional level to established. There should be special disseminate good practice, provide advice, emphasis on local vernacular architecture and evaluate and follow up on events and and building techniques. activities. អ Freedom of information អ Community development briefs Land ownership should be public Development briefs should be produced information and always kept up to date. with communities for all major sites and When property in public or social should preferably become mandatory as a ownership is sold, there should be public basis for land valuation and acquisition. debate on its use beforehand, and it should not automatically be sold to the អ Culture of participation highest bidder. A general culture of participation should be encouraged so that participation in អ Good practice information planning becomes natural and inevitable. More good practice guidance needs to be produced, made available and kept up to អ Delegated planning powers date. Speciﬁc items include: Planning powers should be delegated to the lowest possible tiers of government, ᔤ Catalogues of information already with regional government retaining powers available; to intervene only in the event of local ᔤ Detailed how-to-do-it information on corruption or for major strategic issues. methods; ᔤ Toolkits of sample documents and formats;

178 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 164-180 10/7/06 14:23 Page 179

USEFUL CHECKLISTS

urban areas no one should be more than ᔤ Contact data for people and a few minutes' walk from such an office. organisations with relevant experience. Architecture centres, community design ᔤ Well presented case studies in centres and neighbourhood planning print and on film. offices should all be promoted. ᔤ Training packs and programmes. អ Planning applications អ Gradual development Proposals by property owners for Planning policies should generally development should be encouraged or encourage incremental, evolutionary required to include visual details and development with large development sites policy statements. It should also be broken down into smaller packages. possible to view proposals nearby, ie in a local shop or cafe, rather than having to អ Information travel to remote government offices. Information systems should be established Ideally, proposals should be displayed to make data about successful examples visually at the site in question. of community planning and development widely available. Programmes should be អ Planning decisions established to encourage more exchange All relevant social and environmental of experience between the various groups issues should be considered in planning involved in the process – public, private, appeals, public inquiries and local professional and voluntary. Methods planning decisions. The recommendations should be devised for exchanging of public inquiry inspectors should not be information internationally so that overturned by central government except relevant lessons may be learned in the for overriding reasons, such as national shortest possible space of time. security. Community groups should be given access to the necessary resources to អ Lobbying for resources present their case effectively. Multi-agency co-ordination, resources and leadership are needed to lobby for អ Practitioner listing service increased resources for participatory Registers of experienced community planning activity at local level and planning and community architecture supporting services at national or regional practitioners should be established to help level. local authorities, developers and community groups obtain the best អ Marketing expertise available. The importance and effectiveness of community planning should be more អ Professional payment forcefully marketed. Recommended professional fee scales should be adjusted to take account of the អ Percentage for participation extra time needed to involve end-users. All significant developments should include in their budgets a specific amount អ Public funding of funding for effective participation at all Accountability procedures for the receipt stages. of public funds should be redefined to encourage community initiatives and អ Planners out in the community provide voluntary organisations with More professional planners should be consistent, long-term funding, to facilitate physically located in multidisciplinary forward planning. offices in the communities they serve. In

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 179 CPH pages 164-180 10/7/06 14:23 Page 180

USEFUL CHECKLISTS

អ Public sector enablers អ Simplify language Central and local government should learn Planning legislation should be re-written to trust community organisations and in straightforward language. actively assist them in their formation and growth. There should be a fundamental អ Technical aid policy shift from 'providing' to 'enabling'. Networks of community-controlled, publicly-funded multi-disciplinary technical អ Public participation statements aid facilities should be established and Developers of significant projects should maintained. be required to produce a ‘public participation statement’ identifying those អ Voluntary sector empowered affected and setting out how they will be Voluntary organisations – representing involved in the development process. This geographical communities and should be an integral part of planning communities of interest – should willingly application procedures. demand and accept more responsibility for the creation and management of the អ Quantify benefits environment and should strengthen and Funding needs to be allocated to restructure themselves in order to become systematic analysis and quantifying of the more effective as developers and property benefits of community planning managers. Special emphasis should be put approaches. on encouraging the formation of housing cooperatives, special project groups, អ Research development trusts, neighbourhood Far more resources should be devoted to forums and development partnerships. research on the built environment by government and the development អ ...... industry to avoid making the same ...... mistakes over and over again. Research ...... and development programmes should be ...... undertaken on the long-term cost effectiveness of different approaches and អ ...... the results widely disseminated. Special ...... attention should be directed towards the ...... development of techniques in ...... participatory planning and design.

អ Review statutory procedures Planning, development and management procedures need to be constantly reviewed to ensure they incorporate the best participatory practice available. This might cover:

ᔤ Preparing local plans; ᔤ Preparing development briefs; ᔤ Planning application procedures; ᔤ Public inquiry procedures; ᔤ Urban management procedures.

180 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 181-202 10/7/06 14:26 Page 181

A Glossary

Common and not-so-common Action group Activity year terms and concepts used in Informal organisation set up to Year of activities designed to community planning simply get something achieved, promote interest in, and explained. usually through visible and debate on, a chosen theme: public protest. eg Glasgow 1999; UK City of Includes some methods not Architecture and Design. Action minutes covered elsewhere, with cross- Record of a meeting in the form Adaptable model references to sources of further of a list of steps required, who Flexible model of an area or information. should take them and when. building which allows people to test out alternative design Refer to glossary item Action plan  options. Models. with similar meaning. Proposals for action. Usually in  the form of a list of steps Adventure playground See also glossary item or  required, who should take Playground that encourages page reference. them and when. p170. children to construct and A-Z Item covered more fully manage their own Action planning in the Methods A–Z. environment. An approach to planning and ” Publication or ﬁlm with urban design involving the Advocacy planning further information organisation of carefully Professional planners working (listing on page 203). structured collaborative events on behalf of the disadvantaged. which produce proposals for Term popular in the United b Organisation with action. Action planning States in the early 1970s. further information  event. Term also used to mean (listing on page 209). Agenda developing an action plan. Plan for a meeting. List of Action plan.  items to be discussed. Action planning event Alternative plan Editorial note Carefully structured Plan for a site or In compiling this book I have collaborative event at which all neighbourhood putting had to make many decisions sections of the local community forward a different approach on terminology. Different work closely with independent to the prevailing plan. people have used the same specialists from all relevant Community plan. term to mean different things disciplines to produce  and different terms to mean proposals for action. Amenity trust the same thing. I have tried to A-Z p24. Charitable organisation use the simplest and most established to manage a public Activity mapping explanatory term wherever amenity. Development trust. Plotting on a map or plan how  possible and avoid jargon. people use places as an aid to Appraisal But do not get hung up on understanding how best to Community appraisal. terminology. If your ‘design  improve them. Mapping. workshop’ is more likely to be  Appreciative inquiry successful if you call it an Activity week Group working process which ‘interactive planning meeting’, Week of activities designed to builds on potentials, solutions that is what you should call it. promote interest in, and debate and beneﬁts to create change. Generally, though, using simple on, a chosen theme: eg ” The Thin Book of and direct language is likely to Architecture week; Urban design Appreciative Inquiry. be most successful in sustaining week; Environment week. b Appreciative Inquiry Group. interest and enthusiasm. A-Z p26.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 181 CPH pages 181-202 10/7/06 14:26 Page 182

A GLOSSARY

Appropriate technology Art house Before and after Construction materials and Building used as a base for Photos, drawings or computer techniques geared to local local artists producing and simulations showing a place social and economic needs, exhibiting work with and about before and after development possibilities and sources of the local community. Used as a has taken place from the same materials. Sometimes referred regeneration technique for viewpoint. One of the most to as user-friendly technology. developing local pride and effective ways of helping talent. Art centre. people understand proposals. Archetypes  example p20. Places with certain easily Art workshop  identifiable qualities. Concept Session where local residents Best fit slide rule sometimes used in briefing and work with artists designing and A visual discussion tool design workshops to get making artworks to improve designed to examine people to describe the kind of their environment. A-Z p30. alternative street infill solutions places they aspire to; for and their consequences. An Asset base instance, a certain part of a elevation of a street is drawn Capital assets of property or certain city or a certain building. or assembled with photos and cash which underpin the alternative designs inserted. Architects in schools operations of an organisation, ” Participatory design. Environmental education for instance by generating programme involving architects revenue from rents. Block models working with children in Physical models where Assistance team schools. b Royal Institute of buildings are made out of Design assistance team. British Architects.  wooden blocks. Award scheme Models. Architecture centre  Programme set up to promote Place aimed at helping people Blu-tack® good practice by presenting understand, and engage in, the Registered brand name for re- awards for excellence or effort. design of the local built usable adhesive ‘gum’ for A-Z p32. environment. A-Z p28.  fastening paper etc to a Awareness raising day surface. Architecture week Day of activities designed to Week of activities designed to Bottom-up promote interest in a community promote interest in, and Term used to refer to initiatives planning issue, normally held debate on, architecture. Usually led by the community, as prior to a planning day or other includes opening interesting opposed to ‘top down’ intensive activity. buildings to the public. initiatives led by the Activity week. Awareness walk authorities. Reconnaissance trip. Architecture workshop  Brainstorming Workshop session on Balanced incremental Vigorous discussion to generate architecture. Term also development ideas in which all possibilities sometimes used to describe an Development process are considered. Widely used architecture or community undertaken in stages that lead first step in generating solutions design centre. on from one another. Allows to problems. Architecture centre. schemes to evolve organically.  Briefing workshop Community design centre. Barefoot architect Working participatory sessions Art centre Architect who works in villages held at an early stage in a Place providing a focus for the helping people construct their project or action planning arts and local artists. homes. Term used in Asia. event to establish a project Community architect. agenda or brief. A-Z p34.

182 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 181-202 10/7/06 14:26 Page 183

GLOSSARY C

Building cooperative Capacity building Choices method Cooperative building The development of awareness, Visioning process based on contractor. All members usually knowledge, skills and operational four steps: receive equal rates and capability by certain actors, 1. Meetings throughout the decisions are made collectively. normally the community, to community to brainstorm ideas achieve their purpose. for making life better. Business planning Empowerment. 2. Consolidation of ideas into Testing the viability of a project  goals and vision statements. or organisation by predicting Capacity building workshop 3. A ‘vision fair’ where people income and expenditure over a Event organised primarily to vote on which visions they period of time. establish partnerships between would like to pursue and make the public, private and voluntary Business planning for real personal commitment pledges. sectors on development issues. Computer-based simulation 4. Setting up of action groups which helps new or existing Case study to carry out chosen ideas. organisations ‘play through’ Description of a project. Used ” Chattanooga. Participation the choices they will face in for helping others understand Works! developing a business plan. how it worked, or failed to work. Citizens jury Groups assemble a list of Chairperson Informal inquiry method where projects they would like to Individual who controls a a group of around 16 people, undertake. These are fed into a meeting, deciding who can selected to be representative of computer and the cost speak when. Facilitator. the community, spend a few implications printed out.  days examining an issue, ” Good practice guide to Champion listening to witnesses and community planning and Individual who believes in an producing a report. development. idea and will promote it ” Participation Works! through thick and thin. Business planning workshop Important ingredient for most City farm Session where participants projects. Moving spirits. Working farm in an urban area, work in small groups to  normally run by a voluntary determine project priorities and Charity committee of local people. programme targets. Normally a Organisation which acts in the Primary role is educational draft business plan is prepared interests of society rather than rather than food production. as a basis for discussion which in pursuit of profit. May receive is then amended until an tax breaks and other benefits. Civic forum agreed cash flow is arrived at. Forum. Charrette  Buzz group  Design charrette. Civil society Small group of people who The arena of organised citizen Chart work through an issue. Similar activity outside of the state and Large sheet of paper used for to a focus group or workshop. market sectors. People coming writing or drawing on, usually together to define, articulate, Capability attached to walls or placed on and act on their concerns The quality of being capable; an easel. Essential tool of through various forms of the ability to do something. participative working. organisation and expression. Flipchart. Capacity and vulnerability  Client analysis (CVA) Choice catalogue Individual or organisation that Vulnerability and capacity Menu of items, usually visually  commissions buildings or other analysis. illustrated, showing a range of projects. User-client. design choices available.  A-Z p36.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 183 CPH pages 181-202 10/7/06 14:26 Page 184

C GLOSSARY

Cohousing Community architect Community business Housing with shared living Architect who practises Trading organisation owned components. Ranges from community architecture. Will and controlled by the local sharing of gardens to sharing often live and work in the community which aims to of workshops, laundry rooms neighbourhood he or she is create self-supporting and and even kitchens. designing for. viable jobs for local people and ” Cohousing. Community architecture. to use profits to create more employment, provide local Committee Community architecture services or support local Group of people elected or Architecture carried out with charitable work. delegated to make decisions, the active participation of the usually in meetings. end users. Similarly community Community consultation Workshop. design, community planning Finding out what local people and so on. want. Consultation. Community  Used in many ways. Usually Community art Community design refers to those living within a Visual and performance art Design carried out with the small, loosely defined addressed to the needs of a active participation of the end geographical area. Yet any local community. Often related users. Similarly community group of individuals who share to environmental issues. architecture, community interests may also be described Art workshop. planning and so on. as a community. Also Community-based Community sometimes used to describe a organisation (CBO) design centre physical area rather than a Voluntary organisation Place providing free or group of people. operating at a local level to subsidised architectural, following entries on  represent a local community or planning and design services to community. interest group. Term people who cannot afford to Community action increasingly used at pay for them. Also known as a A process by which the international level. Similar in community technical aid deprived define for themselves meaning to community group. centre. A-Z p38. their needs, and determine Community group. Non- Community technical aid forms of action to meet them, governmental organisation. centre. usually outside the prevailing Community build Community design house political framework. Building construction carried Local office used by a Community action planning out by members of the local community designer or  Microplanning workshop. community, often voluntarily or community architect.Term Action planning. as part of a training course. used in Japan. Community Self-build. design centre. Community appraisal  Survey of the community by Community building Community designer the community to identify Building conceived, managed Practitioner of community needs and opportunities. and sometimes built, by the design. Person who designs Usually based on a self- local community for places with people rather than completion questionnaire community use. Phrase also for people. devised by the community and used to describe the activity of Community development delivered to every household. building a community; Promotion of self-managed, ” Village Appraisals Software physically, socially and non-profit-orientated projects for Windows. economically. to serve community needs. Community profiling.

184 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 181-202 10/7/06 14:26 Page 185

GLOSSARY C

Community development Community landscape Community planning day corporation Landscape architecture or  Planning day. Non-profit-orientated company design carried out with the Community undertaking development for active participation of the end planning forum community benefit. American users. Multipurpose session lasting concept similar to the UK’s Community learning and several hours designed to development trust. education centre secure information, generate Development trust.  Focal point for information and ideas and create interaction Community development education at community level. between interest groups. trust A-Z p40. Community mapping  Development trust.  Making maps as a communal Community planning Community driven activity. Mapping.  weekend Term used to reflect key role of Planning weekend. the community in an initiative. Community newspaper  Information source controlled Community politics Community enterprise by the local community. Also Style of political action through Enterprise for the benefit of community newsletter; similar which people are enabled to the community rather than on a smaller scale. control their own destinies. private profit by people within Identified with an on-going the community. Community plan political movement which Plan for the future of a Community forest seeks to create a participatory community devised by the local Woodland area developed and democracy. community. Sets out proposals managed by and for the for the way in which a Community profiling communities living in and community wants to develop Way of reaching an around it. Programme and respond to changes in the understanding of the needs established in England by the future. No set format. Will and resources of a community Countryside Agency and usually contain statements of with the active involvement of Forestry Commission. principle, physical design the community. Similar b Countryside Agency. proposals and targets. approach as participatory Community garden checklist p176. appraisal. A-Z p42. Publicly accessible garden or Community planning Community project small park created and Planning carried out with the Facility for the local community, managed by a voluntary group. active participation of the end created and managed by a Community group users. Similarly community voluntary committee, elected Voluntary organisation architecture, community design or unelected, from that operating at local level. and so on. community. Community-based  Community planning council Community projects fund organisation. Umbrella organisation at  Feasibility fund. Community indicators neighbourhood level with Community safety plan Measures devised and used by powers to deal with planning Plan drawn up by the local communities for understanding matters. Concept developed community to reduce crime and drawing attention to and recommended by the UK’s and disorder. important issues and trends. Royal Town Planning Institute Useful for building an agenda in 1982. Councils would be for education and action. made up of representatives ” Communities Count! from various sectional voluntary interests. Forum.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 185 CPH pages 181-202 10/7/06 14:26 Page 186

C GLOSSARY

Community technical aid Community woodland Countryside design Multi-disciplinary expert  Community forest. summary assistance to community Simple description of the Computer aided design groups enabling them to play design relationship between Way of visually simulating an active role in the the landscape, settlement designs in three dimensions on development of land and patterns and buildings. Usually computer. buildings. The term ‘technical produced by the planning aid’ is used to cover the diverse Consensus building authority for a region, often range of skills likely to be Procedure for helping people combined with the production needed including architecture, with different views to come of local design statements for planning, landscaping, together interactively on a neighbourhoods within the engineering, surveying, dispute, project, plan or issue, region. ecology, environmental to work towards agreeing a  Local design statement. education, financial planning, sensible solution or way b Countryside Agency. management, administration forward which is mutually Critical mass event and graphics. satisfactory. Umbrella term for organisation Community technical aid Consultation development techniques centre Seeking people’s views (but not involving large-scale events Place staffed by multidisciplinary necessarily involving them in often lasting several days and group of experts who work for decision-making). often involving hundreds of voluntary groups, helping them people. Mostly used for Co-operative to undertake any project organisational change but may An enterprise conducted for involving the development of also be appropriate for the mutual benefit of its buildings and land. Will provide community planning. Labels members. This might be a whatever assistance is needed – given to specific types of event business that is democratic, design, planning, organisation, – structured in different ways each member having one vote decision-making, management and promoted by different irrespective of capital or labour – from conception to people – include future search input. Any economic surplus completion. Similar to a conference, large-scale belongs to the members – after community design centre. interactive process, conference providing for reserves for the Community design centre. model, real-time strategic  development of the business. change, participative work Community trust Housing co-operative.  redesign and open space Independent fundraising and Co-ownership workshops. grant-making charity which Tenure arrangement in which Future search conference. funds initiatives in the local  property is partly owned by the Open space workshop. community. occupier, the remaining portion Daily routine chart Community visioning being gradually purchased Diagram showing people’s daily Thinking collectively about during the period of activities and time taken what the future could be. Term occupation. to accomplish each of them. used to describe group Core costs Usually produced by groups of working processes which help Expenditure essential to keep women, men and children a community to develop an organisation going. As separately. Useful to deepen imaginative shared visions for opposed to project costs. the analysis on seasonal the future of a site, area or Includes such things as staff calendars and highlight organisation. Approach often wages, rent, heating. divisions of labour and adopted by local authorities as responsibilities. part of their Agenda 21 Community profiling. processes.  Seasonal calendars. b New Economics Foundation. Future search conference.

186 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 181-202 10/7/06 14:26 Page 187

GLOSSARY D

Design assistance team (DAT) Design game Designing for real Multidisciplinary team which Method for devising building Term used to describe the use visits an area and produces and landscape layouts with of adaptable models to recommendations for action, residents using coloured cut- develop detailed design usually after facilitating an outs of possible design features proposals for a building or site. action planning event. Similar on plans. A-Z p48. Participants explore options by terms in use include Urban moving parts of the model Design guide design assistance team (UDAT) around: ie, parts of a building Document setting out general and Housing assistance team or whole buildings. Similar urban design principles which (HAT) (where only housing concept to Planning for Real should be adopted by any involved). A-Z p44. but on a smaller scale.  development in an area. Planning for Real Design charrette Local design statement.  Intensive design session, often Development officer Design meeting including ‘all-nighter’, originally Individual who gets a project or Meeting for developing just for architecture students organisation up and running. designs. Usually organised on a but more recently including the regular basis during the design Development partnership public and professionals. Term stage of a project. Users and Arrangement for collaboration originated at the Paris Ecole professionals will be present. by two or more parties to des Beaux-Arts at the turn of The users, or clients, set the facilitate development, usually the century. Projects were agenda but the meeting is between the public and private collected at designated times normally conducted by the sectors. Partnership. on a cart (‘charrette’) where  professionals. Various students would be found Development planning for techniques will be used to putting finishing touches to real present information and make their schemes. Term now Adaptation of Planning for Real decisions: showing slides, widely used in the USA to specially devised for developing models, drawings, catalogues. describe any intensive, group countries. Normal arrangement is for brainstorming effort. Charrette Planning for Real. participants to sit round a  often used without the table. Development trust ‘Design’ in front. Similar to Independent, not-for-profit design workshop. Design simulation organisation controlled by local Design workshop. Playing at designing to get  people which facilitates and people used to the various Design day undertakes physical roles in the design process. Day when architects and local development in an area. people brainstorm for design Design surgery It will have significant solutions to particular building Where architects, planners or community involvement or problems, usually in teams. other professionals work control, will bring together a Term also used to describe day through design issues with wide range of skills and when local residents can drop individuals, for instance interests, and will aim to in and talk through design occupants in a new housing sustain its operations at least in ideas with professionals scheme. part by generating revenue. ” Building Homes People Want. A-Z p52. Community Design workshop   Drop-in office. development corporation.  Hands-on session allowing Design fest groups to work creatively Diagramming Action planning event where developing planning and Creating diagrams in groups. multidisciplinary design teams design options. Diagrams. develop and present their ideas A-Z p50. in public. A-Z p46 Design charrette.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 187 CPH pages 181-202 10/7/06 14:26 Page 188

D GLOSSARY

Diagrams Discussion method Enquiry by design Visual representations of Structure for effective Intensive action planning information which help explain communication which allows workshop process involving current issues or future everyone in a group to urban designers and local proposals. A-Z p54. participate. stakeholders. Devised for Technology of participation. developing plans for new Direct action  urban villages. Exertion of political pressure by Drop-in office b Urban Villages Forum. tactics other than voting at Working office open to the elections. Usually used to refer public. Set up by architects or Enspirited envisioning to strikes, squatting or urban designers working in a Way of developing individual occupations. neighbourhood to encourage and shared visions of the future local involvement in the design through personal and group Direct observation process. May be permanent or development. Noting of events, objects, temporary (on an open day for ” Participation works! processes and relationships; instance). particularly useful for issues Enterprise agency hard to verbalise. Economic audit Non-profit-making company Audit of local economy, usually whose prime objective is to Disabling undertaken by independent respond through practical Non-participatory form of professional economist. action to the economic and service which renders the user training needs of its local unable to have a say in the Elevation montage community. A principal activity process. Display technique for helping is providing free advice and people to understand and Disaster counselling to support the make changes to streetscapes. Serious disruption of the setting up and development of A-Z p58. functioning of society, causing  viable small businesses. Mostly widespread human, material, Empowerment public sector-led in partnership or environmental losses which Development of confidence with the private sector but exceed the ability of the and skills in individuals or there are many exceptions. affected society to cope using communities leading to their Enterprise trust its own resources (UNDP 91). being able to take more control Enterprise agency over their own destinies.  Disaster management Capacity building. Environment forum All aspects of planning for, and  Non-statutory body for responding to, disasters. Enabler discussing and co-ordinating Professional or other person Disaster mitigation environmental issues in an with technical expertise or in a Reducing the impact of area. Forum. position of authority who uses  disasters on society by reducing it to help people to do things Environment shop the hazards and/or society’s for themselves. The term can Shop selling items and vulnerability to them. also be used to refer to providing information which Mitigation.  organisations which behave helps people improve their Disaster preparedness likewise. environment. Similarly The ability to predict, respond architecture shop, conservation Enabling and cope with the effects of a shop etc. Professional and other services disaster. A-Z p60. that consciously encourage or  Disaster relief allow users to participate. Environment week Extraordinary measures Enabler. Week of activities designed to necessary for coping with a promote interest in, and disaster. debate on, the environment. Activity week.

188 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 181-202 10/7/06 14:26 Page 189

GLOSSARY F

Environmental capital Feasibility fund Flipcharter Inclusive, participatory process Revolving fund providing Person who records points for evaluating what grants to community groups made at a workshop or plenary environmental features and for paying professional fees for session on a flipchart or large attitudes matter to local the preparation of feasibility sheet of paper pinned on a interest groups and why. studies for community projects. wall in full view of the b Countryside Agency. Also known as a community participants. Flipchart. projects fund. A-Z p62. Environmental education  Fly-posting Programmes aimed at making Feasibility study Pasting up posters in public people more aware of their Examination of the viability of places, usually without environment and the forces an idea, usually resulting in a permission from building which shape it. report. example p63. owners or authorities. Environmental impact Fence method Focus group assessment Prioritising procedure using a Small group of people who Process whereby all impacts of line with a fence in the middle work through an issue in a development are identified to establish people’s views on workshop sessions. and their significance assessed. conflicting alternatives. Membership may be carefully Increasingly a statutory example p105. selected or entirely random. requirement before planning Festival market Forum permission is granted by a local Market for bric-a-brac and Non-statutory body for authority. crafts. discussing and coordinating Envisioning activity and acting as a pressure Field workshop Visioning. group for change.  Workshop programme on Environment forum. Equity sharing location. Term used to describe  Neighbourhood forum. Co-ownership. events lasting several days  Term also used to describe a involving a range of Exhibition one-off open meeting aiming community profiling, risk Displays of information. May to create interaction. assessment and plan-making be simply for presenting Community planning activities. A-Z p64.  information or for getting  forum. Public forum. feedback too. Fish bowl Full-scale simulation Interactive exhibition. Workshop technique where  Acting out a scenario to test a participants sit around, and Facilitation design idea using full-scale observe, a planning team Bringing people together to mock-ups. Particularly useful working on a problem without decide what they wish to do, for helping people design new taking part themselves. and to work together to decide building forms. ” Community Participation in how to do it. Design simulation. Mock-up. Practice.  Facilitator Future search conference Five Ws plus H Person who steers a process, Highly structured two and a What, When, Why, Who, meeting or workshop. Less half day process allowing a Where and How. Useful dominant role than a community or organisation to checklist in planning any ‘chairperson’. Also known as a create a shared vision for its activity. moderator. future. Ideally 64 people take Flipchart part; eight tables of eight. Farmers market Large pad of paper on an A-Z p66. Market exclusively for local  easel. Standard equipment for food producers and participatory workshops as it countryside products. allows notetaking to be visible.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 189 CPH pages 181-202 10/7/06 14:26 Page 190

F GLOSSARY

Futures workshop Hazard Homeowners file Term used for a workshop Phenomenon that poses a File of book-keeping schedules devised to discuss options for threat to people, structures or designed to help families to the future. Various formats are economic assets and which control the construction and possible. Briefing may cause a disaster. It could management of their homes. workshop. Design workshop. be either human-made or Homesteading naturally occurring. Gallery walk Programme in which property Report back process where Hazard analysis owners (usually local workshop flipchart sheets are Identification of types of authorities) offer substandard pinned up at a plenary session hazard faced by a community, property for sale at low cost to and the reporter ‘walks’ past their intensity, frequency and householders who will work on the sheets, using them as a location. them in their own time, doing prompt to summarise what basic repairs and renovation to Heritage centre took place. standards monitored by the Place aimed at helping people original owners. Gaming understand, and engage in, the The use of games to simulate historic local built environment. Housing association real situations. A-Z p68. Key elements: old photos, old Association run by an elected Role play . Simulation. artefacts, leaflets, books, management committee which information sheets, maps, uses government money to Giving evidence postcards, models, trails. provide housing in areas and Formal presentation of Architecture centre. Local for people which the information, for instance to a  heritage initiative. government believes to be a public inquiry or local authority high priority. Building society committee. Historic buildings trust money is also increasingly used Charitable organisation set up Group interview to fund housing associations. to preserve historic buildings. Pre-arranged discussion with Housing co-operative an invited group to analyse Historical profile Organisation which owns or topics or issues against a Key events and trends in a manages housing and which is checklist of points or local community’s development, owned and managed by the concerns. Inter view. usually displayed visually.  occupants of that housing. Community profiling. Group modelling  Often referred to as a housing Use of physical models as a Historical profiling co-op. Co-operative. basis for working in groups to Construction of historical Secondary co-operative. learn, explore and make profile in groups. Information Human capital decisions about the about past events is gathered Ability of individuals to do environment. Models. to explain the present and  productive work; includes predict possible future Guided visualisation physical and mental health, scenarios. One approach Group process using mental strength, stamina, knowledge, involves people describing and visualisation techniques for skills, motivation and a explaining their life history with establishing a community’s constructive and co-operative respect to particular issues. aspirations. attitude. Information is marked up on ” Participation Works! Social capital. maps or charts to build a  Habitat comprehensive time-line of Icebreaker The social and economic, as events and issues that mould Group activity aimed at making well as physical, shelter and affect a community. people feel comfortable with essential for well-being. each other. Often held at the start of action planning events. Hands-on exhibition.  Interactive exhibition.

190 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 181-202 10/7/06 14:26 Page 191

GLOSSARY L

Ideas competition Interview Landscape character Competition for generating Recorded conversation, usually assessment options for improving a with prepared questions, with Process for describing an area’s neighbourhood, building or individuals or groups. Useful sense of place, features and site aimed at stimulating for information gathering. attributes. Useful foundation creative thinking and More flexible and interactive for making planning and land generating interest. than a questionnaire. management decisions for an A-Z p70. Group interview. Key area. informant interview. Semi- Local character workshop. Illustrated questionnaire  structured interview. b Countryside Agency. Questionnaire with pictures to find out people’s design Jigsaw display Large group interventions preferences. Exhibit where groups prepare  Critical mass event. Choice catalogue. different parts which are then  Launch Questionnaire survey. assembled as a whole. Event to promote the start of Imagine Key informant an initiative or project. Useful Method for establishing Person with special knowledge. for generating interest and positive initiatives based on a involvement. Key informant interview structured approach to Informal discussion based on a Leaflet imagining the future. pre-determined set of Sheet of paper providing ” Participation Works! questions with people who information, usually produced Imaging day have special knowledge. in large quantities. Standard Day when people visualise the Interview. publicity technique. future with the assistance of a KISS Linkage diagram skilled artist. Stands for ‘Keep It Simple, Shows flows, connections and Immediate report writing Stupid’. Useful reminder in a causality.  Diagrams. Writing reports in the field or complex field. Livability at an event rather doing it later Ladder of participation Somewhat loose measure of in the office. Useful and popular analogy for the quality of life where needs Informal walk likening the degree of citizen that are justifiable according to Walking in a group without a participation in any activity to a natural justice are met. definite route, stopping to chat series of rungs on a ladder. First Living over the shop scheme and discuss issues as they arise. put forward in 1969 (by Sherry Programme to encourage Community profiling. Arnstein) with 8 rungs:  people to occupy vacant 1. Citizen control. Interactive display premises over shops, usually by 2. Delegated power. Visual display which allows offering grant aid. Town centre 3. Partnership. people to participate by regeneration method. 4. Placation. making additions or 5. Consultation. Lobbying alterations. Also known as a 6. Informing. Influencing decision-makers hands-on display. A-Z p72.  7. Therapy. through individual and group Interactive exhibition 8. Manipulation. face-to-face persuasion or Exhibition which allows people This has been modified in letter writing. to participate by making many different ways by many Local additions or alterations. Also people since. page 10.  Pertaining to a particular rural known as a hands-on ” The Guide to Effective or urban place or area. exhibition. Interactive Participation. display. Open house event.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 191 CPH pages 181-202 10/7/06 14:26 Page 192

L GLOSSARY

Local authority Local resource centre Mapping Organisation governing local Place providing information Physical plotting of various area. For instance; borough and support for people at a characteristics of an area in council, county council, town community level. two dimensions. May be done council, village council. Resource centre. individually or communally. Activity mapping. Local character workshop Local support team  Community mapping. Mental Workshop designed to help Locally-based team providing mapping. Mind map. Parish people identify what makes an expertise for an activity or mapping. A-Z p76. area special. Usually event.  undertaken as part of Market Local sustainability model preparing a local design Place for buying and selling Process allowing a community statement or landscape goods and services. An to assess its present position character assessment. Involves important regeneration tool. and test the likely effect of mapping and photo surveys. Types of market include: street projects. Landscape character market, covered market,  ” Participation Works! assessment. Local design farmers market, festival statement. Logical framework analysis market. Method for thoroughly testing Local design statement Masterplan the effectiveness of any project Published statement produced Overall planning framework for proposal. Assesses objectives, by a community identifying the the future of a settlement. May purposes, inputs, assumptions, distinctive character of the be highly detailed or schematic. outputs, effects and inputs. place. The aim is for it to be Used to provide a vision and Much used by international used by planning authorities to structure to guide development. funding agencies. ensure that future Matrix development and change is Low-cost housing Diagram in the form of a grid sympathetic and has Housing affordable by people allowing comparison of two community support. on low incomes. variables. Used for assessing A-Z p74.  Maintenance manual options. Diagrams. Local environmental Instructions on how to Mediation resource centre maintain a building or open Voluntary process of helping Resource centre focusing on space. Important for helping people resolve their differences local environmental issues. users to keep places in good with the assistance of a neutral Resource centre. order.  person. Local heritage initiative Managed workspace Meeting Process for helping people Communally managed building Event where people come record and care for their local for individual, and together to discuss and decide. landscape, landmarks and independent, enterprises May be formal or informal, traditions. sharing common support public or private. b Countryside Agency. facilities and services. Sometimes known as a Mental mapping Local people working community. Production of maps by People who live in a particular individuals or communities rural or urban place or area. Management committee showing how they perceive Governing body of a project or Local regeneration agency their neighbourhood (as organisation. Similar to board Organisation set up to opposed to geographically of directors in a company. undertake regeneration work accurate maps). Mapping. in an area.

192 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 181-202 10/7/06 14:26 Page 193

GLOSSARY N

Micro-finance Mobile unit Neighbourhood forum Banking system which provides Caravan or mobile home Non-statutory body for small loans to poor people converted into an office/studio discussing a neighbourhood’s without collateral. as a base for undertaking affairs and acting as a pressure community planning activity on group for improvements. Microplanning workshop location. A-Z p80. Members may be publicly Intensive planning procedure  elected – usually in categories developed specifically for Mock-up (eg residents, traders, churches, upgrading settlements in Full-size representation of a etc.) – or be nominated by developing countries involving change or development, organisations entitled to be a minimum of preparation, usually on its proposed site, represented under the materials and training. Also prior to finalising the design. constitution. May be effectively referred to as community Modelling a non-statutory neighbourhood action planning. A-Z p78.  Making models. Usually refers council although procedural Mind map to making models as a group practice varies considerably. Diagram showing people’s process. Similar to mapping Neighbourhood perceptions of trends and but in three dimensions instead planning office linkages. Not a geographical of two. Mapping. Models.  Local office established to co- map. Used in future search Models ordinate community planning conferences. Diagrams.  Physical three-dimensional activity. A-Z p84. Future search conference.  constructions simulating a Neighbourhood skills survey Mini visioning building or neighbourhood. Survey to establish what skills Basic and succinct visioning A-Z p82.  and abilities people have in a workshops. Visioning.  Moderator neighbourhood. Used to find Mission statement  Facilitator. out what a community can do Written explanation of the for itself and to generate Moving spirits purpose of a project, event or interest. Sometimes referred to People in a community who organisation. Usually brief and as a neighbourhood talent want to improve things for the to the point. Useful for survey. Useful checklists better and who are prepared to  avoiding misunderstanding, p175. Resource survey. give time and thought to  particularly in partnerships. something they think might Neighbourhood talent Mitigation help. Also referred to as survey Measures taken to minimise movers and shakers or social  Neighbourhood skills survey. the impact of a disaster. By entrepreneurs. Champion.  Networking modifying the hazard itself or Mutual aid Exchanging experience with by reducing vulnerability to it. Where people help each other people engaged in similar Ranges from physical measures without any formal activities. Usually in an informal such as flood defenses, to organisation. manner. raising people’s living standards so they no longer need to Neighbourhood council Newspaper supplement inhabit areas at risk. Mitigation Elected body at neighbourhood Special insert or section of a can take place before, during level with certain statutory newspaper. Can be used to and after a disaster. powers. Urban equivalent of a cover local design issues. parish council and effectively a A-Z p86. mini local authority.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 193 CPH pages 181-202 10/7/06 14:26 Page 194

N GLOSSARY

Non-governmental Open space technology Paradigm organisation (NGO) Framework within which open A coherent and mutually Voluntary and non-profit- space workshops are held. supporting pattern of distributing organisation. The Open space workshop. concepts, values, methods and difference between an NGO action, amenable or claiming Open space workshop and a CBO (community-based to be amenable, to wide Workshop process for organisation) is that an NGO is application. generating commitment to normally organised and funded action in communities or Parish mapping from outside the local community organisations. Features include Arts based way in which a in which it operates. starting without an agenda. community can explore and Community-based  A-Z p90. express what they value in their organisation.  place through the creation of Opinion survey Notetaker maps out of a wide variety of Survey to find out what people Person who records points materials. Mapping. think about an issue. Survey.  made at a workshop or plenary  b Common Ground. session with a view to writing Outcomes Participation up a record and/or making a Results of projects or Act of being involved in presentation of the results. programmes, usually something. unmeasurable (eg, people are Off-setting biases happier). Outputs. Participationitis Being self-critically aware of  When everything has to be biases in behaviour and Outputs checked by everyone. Too learning, and deliberately Measurable results of projects much participation. countering them. or programmes (eg, number of trees planted). Outcomes. Participation training Open design competition Short courses or workshop Outreach Competition open to everyone. sessions on participation Taking consultation to the Contrasts with limited or approaches. May be aimed at people rather than expecting closed competitions to which professionals or community them to come to you. entry is restricted. activists. Ideas competition. Outsiders  Participatory appraisal Non-local people. Usually refers Open day An approach to gaining a rapid to professionals and facilitators. Day when a project or in-depth understanding of a organisation encourages Ownership community, or certain aspects people to come and find out Term often used to refer to a of a community, based on the what it is doing and how it sense of responsibility for an participation of that works. Often used to generate initiative or project. eg, ‘People community and a range of interest and momentum. will have ownership of an idea visual techniques. Allows people to share and record Open house event or a project if they have been aspects of their own situation, Event designed to allow those involved in creating it’. conditions of life, knowledge, promoting development Pair-wise ranking perceptions, aspirations, initiatives to present them to a Rapid and simple way of preferences and develop plans wider public and secure selecting the most important for action. Not restricted to reactions in an informal issues or problems facing a planning issues. Many terms manner. Halfway between an community. Brainstorming used to imply similar concept exhibition and a workshop. generates a preliminary list. A including participatory learning A-Z p88. group of people then vote on  and action. the significance of every item Community profiling. against each other item using a  ” Whose Reality Counts? matrix.

194 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 181-202 10/7/06 14:26 Page 195

GLOSSARY P

Participatory building Partnership agreement Photo survey evaluation Formal document setting out Survey of locality using Method for users and providers the terms and conditions of a cameras. A-Z p94. to jointly assess the partnership arrangement. Pile sorting effectiveness of buildings after Partnership.  Method of categorising by they have been built. Pattern language sorting cards or other items ” User Participation in Building Method devised to enable into piles. Used in group Design and Management. untrained people to design sessions. Participatory democracy their own buildings and cities Planning aid scheme Process which involves people in accordance with well-tried The provision of free and directly in decision-making principles of good design. independent information and which affects them, rather ” A Pattern Language. advice on town planning to than through formally elected People’s organisation groups and individuals who representatives such as Community-based cannot afford consultancy fees. councillors or MPs as in  organisation. A-Z p96. representative democracy.  People’s wall Planning assistance kit Participatory design Wall covered with large sheets Series of worksheets designed Design processes which involve of paper where visitors to a to assist community the users of the item or places design fest or workshop can organisations in physical being designed. write and draw. Public wall. planning, implementation and Participatory editing management of their Percent for participation Method of involving large environment. Campaign to get a percentage numbers of people in of total development costs Planning assistance team producing reports and other spent on participation. Started Similar to a design assistance material. A-Z p92.  by the Royal Institute of British team. Participatory monitoring Architects’ Community Design assistance team. and evaluation (PME) Architecture Group. Planning day Monitoring and evaluation b Community Architecture Day when interested parties undertaken with the Group. work intensively together participation of those who Permaculture developing urban design took part in the activity being Approach to designing options for a site or monitored and evaluated. sustainable environments neighbourhood. A-Z p98. Participatory rapid appraisal based on ecological principles Planning department (PRA) of co-operation with nature. Section of local authority Participatory appraisal.  Permaculture design course dealing with planning issues. Participatory theatre Courses aimed at making Planning for Real ® The use of physical movement groups self-reliant and Registered brand name for a and creativity to explore sustainable and helping them method for community people’s experience and to take initiatives. Introductory involvement in planning and develop a common vision. courses last a weekend. Main development focusing on the ” Participation Works! courses are 2 weeks or a series construction and use of ﬂexible of weekends. Partnership cardboard models and priority b Permaculture Association. Agreement between two or cards. A-Z p100. ” Permaculture Teachers  more individuals or Handbook. organisations to work together to achieve common aims. ” Managing Partnerships.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 195 CPH pages 181-202 10/7/06 14:26 Page 196

P GLOSSARY

Planning weekend Prioritising Public forum Sophisticated and highly Deciding what needs doing Public meeting with an structured action planning when. Ranking of problems to emphasis on debate and procedure in which be dealt with or projects to be discussion rather than speeches professionals work with local undertaken. Term usually used and a question and answer people over a long weekend to to refer to group prioritising session. Participants will produce proposals for action. processes. A-Z p104. normally sit in a circle or a The term community planning horseshoe arrangement. Priority Estates Project weekend is also used (often Forum. Public meeting. Experimental UK government  with the word ‘community’ programme to give council Public meeting being added during the tenants a chance to exercise Advertised, open access event process). Terms planning week more control over their homes at which issues are presented and community planning week and neighbourhoods by and commented on and at have also been used for slightly establishing estate-based which decisions may be made. longer events. A-Z p102.  management systems. Set up Term normally used to refer to Plenary session in 1979. b PEP. fairly formal events with the Meeting of all participants at audience sitting in rows facing Priority search an event (for instance after a a speaker or panel of speakers Survey technique based on a number of separate workshop with a chairperson who computerised questionnaire groups). controls the proceedings. package which analyses Public forum. Workshop. Popular planning responses to structured  Planning from the bottom up. questions. Public wall Term used by the Greater Area of wall space or display Problem tree London Council in the 1980s. boards where members of the Visual way of analysing the public can make their views Post-it note ® inter-relationships among known by putting up drawings Or simply ‘Post-it’. Registered community issues and or text and making comments brand name for a sheet of problems. A process of on material already there. paper with a sticky edge. asking why is used to arrive at People’s wall. Come in pads. Great technical consensus about root causes  aid to collective working as, and related effects. A symbolic Publicity unlike cards, they can be stuck tree is drawn with the trunk Raising awareness of a on vertical surfaces and moved representing problems, the situation through use of around to create groups. roots representing causes and posters, leaﬂets and so on. branches representing the Preparedness Questionnaire survey effects. example page 43. Measures taken in anticipation  Survey which involves of a disaster aimed at Process design collection of information in the minimising loss of life, Activity of designing the form of written responses to a disruption and damage if the process. standard set of questions. disaster occurs. Includes Often a starting point for Process planning formulating contingency plans, participation processes. session developing warning systems, Frequently used with other Event organised to allow maintenance of relief supplies methods. Survey. people to determine the most  and an efﬁcient emergency appropriate process for their Rapporteur relief distribution system. particular purposes. Reporter. Disaster.   A-Z p106. French term often used even at English speaking events.

196 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 181-202 10/7/06 14:26 Page 197

GLOSSARY S

Reconnaissance trip Resource centre Round table workshop Direct inspection of area under Place designed to provide Workshop process for consideration by mixed team of community groups with the engaging the main locals and technical experts. facilities they need to make the stakeholders in generating a A-Z p108. most of their energies and vision and strategy for an area. enthusiasm. No two centres are Often used for consensus Referendum exactly alike but will provide building between previously Public vote on an issue of some or all of the following: antagonistic parties. special importance. May be information, office equipment, ” Participation Works! used for strategic planning professional advice and b Urbed. issues (for instance in the support, meeting facilities, Netherlands). Rural rapid appraisal (RRA) equipment for meetings and Participatory appraisal. Regional/urban design fund raising, training courses  Similar approach in rural areas. assistance team (R/UDAT) and opportunities for groups to Name originally given to the meet and share ideas. Scoping planning weekend programme Neighbourhood planning Preliminary exploration of a started by the American office. subject or project. Institute of Architects in 1967. Resource survey Search conference A generic R/UDAT uses the Survey to identify local Conference or workshop for same process to look at resources which may be key interested parties problems common to many mobilised. Will include people, organised as a first stage in a communities. A mini R/UDAT organisations, finance, consultation process on a uses a similar process with a equipment and so on. project. May include briefings, student team. Neighbourhood skills role play, reconnaissance, Design assistance team.   survey. interactive displays, workshops Planning weekend.  and plenary sessions. Term Risk assessment Reporter much used in Australia. Similar Examination of risks from Person who reports to a to planning day or community disasters existing in any plenary session on the planning forum. community. The basis for risk outcome of a workshop. ” Community Participation in reduction. Comprises three Practice. Residents’ choice catalogue components: Hazard analysis;  Choice catalogue. vulnerability analysis; resource Seasonal calendar assessment. A-Z p112. Chart showing a community’s Residents’ tool loan service  work and social activities Service lending out tools and Roadshow month by month to highlight equipment to make it easier for Series of linked public problems or concerns about residents to carry out building workshops, exhibitions and such things as livelihood, work on their environment. public forums to explore the health and community potential for improving the Resource assessment relations. built environment and provide Identification of resources and Community profiling. a catalyst for action.  capacities within a community. A-Z p114. Secondary co-operative Resource survey.   Organisation which provides Role play services, such as technical aid, Adopting the role of others to a co-operative which is also and acting out scenarios. Used owned and managed by that to help people understand the co-operative. views and aspirations of others. Co-operative. Housing co- Gaming.   operative.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 197 CPH pages 181-202 10/7/06 14:26 Page 198

S GLOSSARY

Secondary data Shared presentation Small group work Indirect information sources; Presentation by a group or People working together in files, reports, maps, photos, several individuals. small groups of 8 – 15. Term books and so on. used to cover a range of similar Shell housing methods such as workshops Secondary data review Construction system where and focus groups which enable Collection and analysis of only floors, walls, roofs and people to discuss, evaluate, published and unpublished services are provided, leaving learn and plan together. Group material such as maps, reports, occupiers free to build their work can be formal or census statistics and own interiors. informal, one-off or regular, newspaper clippings. Normally Short-life housing topic related or wide-ranging. done prior to field work. Use of empty property on a Social architecture Self-build temporary basis, usually by a Similar concept to community Construction (or repair) work voluntary organization. architecture. Term commonly physically undertaken directly Simulation used in the United States. by future (or present) occupiers Acting out an event or activity Community architecture. on an individual or collective  as a way of gaining basis. Social audit information and insights prior Tool to help an organisation Self-help to formulating plans. understand, measure and Where people take A-Z p116.  report upon its social responsibility, individually or Site and services performance through the eyes collectively, for solving their Provision of a serviced site for of its stakeholders. Over time, problems. self-builders. Usually by the approach can be used to Self-management government, but increasingly help an organisation improve Where a facility is managed by also by the private sector. its social performance. the people who use it. b New Economics Skills survey Foundation. Self-sufficiency Assessment of skills and talent. Reduction of dependence on Often done in a neighbourhood Social capital others, making devolution of to establish what the community Ability of social structures and control easier and encouraging can do for itself and what extra institutions to provide a self-reliance. help is needed. Also known as supportive framework for a skills audit or skills inventory. individuals; includes firms, Seminar Neighbourhood skills trade unions, families, Meeting or workshop with  survey. communities, voluntary educational slant. organisations, legal/political Slide show Semi-structured interview systems, educational Presentation based on Conversational open discussion institutions, health services, projecting images from with local inhabitants to financial institutions and transparencies. Widely used in understand their needs, systems of property rights. workshops as they can be problems and aspirations. Uses Human capital. prepared and presented by  a checklist of questions as a participants (more easily than Social entrepreneur flexible guide in contrast to a video) and enable people to Person who makes things formal questionnaire. Different present visual information to happen by taking initiative in types include; individual, groups (if the projector doesn’t the interests of his or her group, focus group, and key break down!). community rather than for informant. Interview.  private or personal gain. Small group discussion Serendipity Small group work Making happy discoveries by  accident.

198 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 181-202 10/7/06 14:26 Page 199

GLOSSARY S

Social survey Story-telling Subsidiarity Survey to find out about the Verbal recounting of tales Maximum local autonomy. nature of a community. May which may be actual or Suggestions box cover aspects like age, gender, mythical. Used to understand Box in which people place their wealth, health and so on. local values, standards, written suggestions or Survey. practices and relationships.  comments on a place or Particularly valuable with Special projects group proposals. Useful device in children and people who are Non-statutory group formed to consultation allowing illiterate. Also the singing of undertake a particular project. participants to remain local songs and reciting of User group. anonymous if they wish.  poetry. Performance sets off Squatting discussion to explain local Supports and infill Unlawful occupation of land or knowledge and beliefs. Concept of design, housing. management and construction Strategic planning which aims to distinguish Staffed exhibition Organised effort to produce between individual and Exhibition where organisers are decisions and actions that collective areas of present to engage in shape and guide what a responsibility. Developed at the discussion. Interactive community is, what it does,  Stichting Architecten Research exhibition. Open house event. and why it does it. in the Netherlands. Stakeholder Street party Surgery Person or organisation with an Party for the whole community Design surgery. interest because they will be held in the street. Often  affected or may have some organised to galvanise Survey influence. regeneration initiatives. Systematic gathering of information. Opinion Steering group Street stall  survey. Questionnaire survey. Informal group set up to Way of securing public Resource survey. Social survey. pursue a project or goal. comment on planning issues by Street survey. User group. setting up an interactive exhibition in a public street or Sustainable community Stick square. A-Z p118. Community that lives in Metaphor for control. ‘Handing  harmony with its local over the stick’ is a much used Street survey environment and does not term to mean the experts or Survey carried out by stopping cause damage to distant facilitator handing over the people in a street or shopping environments or other chalk, pen or microphone to centre. Used for securing views communities – now or in the enable local people to become of people using a place (rather future. Quality of life and the the analysts, planners and than necessarily living or interest of future generations facilitators of their own working there). Survey.  are valued above immediate situation. Study day material consumption and Storefront studio Day spent examining a economic growth. Community design office particular issue. Similar to a Sustainable development located in a prominent shop, planning day but less Development that meets the often temporarily for an action structured. Useful for simple needs of the present without planning event or ‘charrette’. issues. Planning day.  compromising the ability of Term used in the USA. future generations to meet their own needs (Brundtland Report definition).

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 199 CPH pages 181-202 10/7/06 14:26 Page 200

S GLOSSARY

Sweat equity Temporal snapshot Top-down Where an individual or Finding out how spaces are Term used to refer to initiatives community acquires an asset used at different times of day led by the authorities as by expending labour rather and night. opposed to ‘bottom up’ than money. initiatives led by the community. Tenant management SWOT analysis organisation (TMO) Topic workshop Determination of the Organisation set up to allow Workshop session on a Strengths, Weaknesses, housing tenants to participate particular topic. Opportunities and Threats in the management of their Workshop. relating to an organisation or homes. Town centre manager activity. Think tank Person employed to improve Table scheme display Brainstorming group. town centres by working with Simple way of securing Increasingly used by all interested parties and taking comment on design proposals governments and city initiatives. by taping drawings on a table authorities. Often for ‘experts’ Town development trust top and requesting people to only. May use an action planning vote with sticky dots. Organisation created by a local format. Sometimes called an urban community to revitalise A-Z p120. expert panel or symposium. that community’s physical Talent survey Third wave surroundings.  Skills survey. Revolution currently Development trust. transforming society based on Task Force Town workshop growth of high technology and Multidisciplinary team of Workshop organised on the information systems. The ﬁrst students and professionals who future of a town. produce in-depth proposals for wave was the agricultural a site or neighbourhood based revolution, the second the Trail on an intensive programme of industrial revolution. Carefully planned walk through an area designed to help site studies, lectures, Time-line people understand the participatory exercises and Line calibrated to show a problems and opportunities. studio working, normally historical sequence of events or Designed to be walked lasting several weeks. activities. Diagrams.  unaccompanied. A-Z p122. Historical proﬁling. Reconnaissance trip. Team-building Time money Transect walk Learning to work together as a Alternative currency which Systematic walk along a pre- group by getting to know each credits the time people spend determined route through an other and developing shared helping each other. Participants area to gather information aims, values and working earn credit for doing jobs – an about such things as land-use, practices. hour of your time entitles you social and economic resources to an hour of someone else’s Technology of participation or the state of the time. Credits are deposited A framework of practical environment. Usually done by centrally in a ‘time bank’ and methods that help facilitators community members with withdrawn when the working with groups. Term facilitators or technical experts. participant needs help used by the Institute of Information is subsequently themselves. b New Cultural Affairs. Includes recorded on maps and as text. Economics Foundation. Discussion method, Workshop Reconnaissance trip. method and Action Planning Time-use analysis method. b Assessment of time spent on Institute of Cultural Affairs. various activities, on a daily or seasonal basis.

200 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 181-202 10/7/06 14:26 Page 201

GLOSSARY V

Treasure hunt Urban design workshop Venn diagram Trail designed with the added  Design workshop. Diagram using circles of incentive of prizes for the different sizes to indicate roles Urban farm correct answers to questions of different organisations and City farm. about things seen on route.  the relationships between Useful warm up to a Urban laboratory them. Used for analysing community planning event,  Urban design studio. institutional and social generating interest and getting networks. Diagrams. Urban resource centre  people to look closely at the Local or regional centres Vernacular architecture physical nature of an area. aiming to co-ordinate training Architecture of and by the Trail.  in cross-professional skills and people and rooted in a Trust disseminate best practice and particular locality. Term used in the name of an innovation in regeneration and Video box organisation, usually implying community planning. Use of video to help people that it has charitable objectives. Urban studies centre express and communicate Also used to mean ‘have Centre of environmental ideas and opinions. Used for confidence in’. education, usually focusing on presentation or as a discussion Urban aid the immediate surroundings. tool. Particularly useful for Government funding intended Architecture centre. young people. for community development in Environmental education. Video soapbox. urban areas. Urban village Video soapbox Urban community assistance Mixed use development. Term Use of large screens in public team used successfully to promote locations to project people  Design assistance team. the idea that urban areas are expressing ideas and opinions. more popular when they are A-Z p128. Video box. Urban design   diverse and lively rather than Discipline concerned with Village appraisal dominated by single uses as three-dimensional built form Community appraisal. mostly preferred by developers  and the ecology of streets, and planners. Village design day neighbourhoods and cities. Day when people work User Urban design action team intensively on developing ideas Actual or future occupier of a Design assistance team. for their village.  building or neighbourhood or Planning day. Urban design assistance beneficiary of a service.  team User-client. Village design statement Design assistance team. Local design statement  User-client produced by a village Urban design game People who are the end-users community. Role-play game designed to of buildings and are treated as Local design statement. help people to understand the the client, even if they are not  planning process and the views technically responsible for Vision of others by simulating future paying the bills. An image of how things might scenarios. Gaming. be in the future. May be in  User group words or pictures. Provide Urban design studio Group of actual or future useful guide for developing Unit attached to an occupiers of a building or project and programme architecture or planning school neighbourhood or beneficiary priorities. ‘Having vision’ which focuses on involving of a service. A-Z p126.  implies being imaginative. local communities in live Visioning. project work. A-Z p124. 

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 201 CPH pages 181-202 10/7/06 14:26 Page 202

V GLOSSARY

Vision fair Vulnerability Wish poem Event where people vote on Extent to which a community, Poem made up by combining their favourite visions. Vision structure or service is likely to wishes of participants at a statements or images, usually be damaged or disrupted by a workshop. from a previous workshop or disaster. Disaster.  Working community brainstorm, are exhibited. Vulnerability analysis Managed workspace. People use sticky dots or other  Identification of what and who means to indicate which visions Working group is vulnerable to disaster and they would like to pursue. They Small number of individuals the extent of that vulnerability. may also make personal with a specific task to Disaster. pledges to take action.  complete. Choices method. Vision. Vulnerability and capacity  Working party analysis Visioning Working group. Method based on a matrix  Thinking about what the future chart for organising Workshop could be and creating a vision. information about a Meeting at which a small Community visioning.  community’s vulnerability to, group, perhaps aided by a Vision. and capacity to withstand, the facilitator, explores issues, Visioning conference effects of extreme events such develops ideas and makes  Future search conference. as natural disasters. decisions. A less formal and p112-113. more creative counterpart to a Visit  public meeting or committee. Trip by a group of people Wealth ranking A topic workshop focuses on planning an initiative to a Well-being ranking.  specific issues. A design community that has recently Web site workshop includes the use of undertaken a similar initiative, Space on the Internet. participatory design techniques. to learn from their experience. Immense potential for Briefing workshop. Design May be highly structured with  providing sites with workshop. Public meeting. formal notetaking, interviews information, discussion groups Seminar. Topic workshop. and feedback sessions, or and interactive material on informal. photos p17. Youth planning day  community planning projects. Day of activities designed Visual simulation websites listed in Contacts  specifically to involve young Showing how buildings or section starting on p209 for people in the planning process. townscape will look when some examples. Planning day. constructed using  Well-being ranking photomontages. Assessment of well-being of Voluntary sector different households, usually Organizations controlled by using pile-sorting technique. people who are unpaid, and Also known as wealth ranking. usually elected, but do not Community profiling. form part of statutory Wheel of fortune government. Range from Graphic way for people to national to local organizations. collectively rank competing Increasingly the divisions priorities. p105. between the public, private  and voluntary sectors are becoming blurred.

202 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH Pages 203-217 10/7/06 14:27 Page 203

METHOD A Publications and ﬁlm A–Z

An annotated selection of 4B O Building Design Pack P useful material. In Project development, monitoring Neighbourhood Initiatives alphabetical order by title. and evaluation in disaster Foundation. Regularly updated. situations, Merdi Jean Arcilla et al Provides the materials for a group Information listed (eds), Citizens’ Disaster Response to make an adaptable 3-dimensional Center, 1998, 971-9031-00-X. model of an existing or new building. • Title Handy local guide with useful Building Homes People Want 8 • Medium methods produced in the Philippines. A guide to tenant involvement in O Books (Centre for Disaster Preparedness.) 9 Computer software the design and development of O a Films Action Planning housing association homes, How to use planning weekends and Pete Duncan and Bill Halsall, P Packs § urban design action teams to National Housing Federation, 1994, Leaflets improve your environment, Nick 0-86297-272-8. ¶ Magazines Wates, Prince of Wales’s Institute of Useful guide by and for practitioners. A Posters & wall charts Architecture, 1996, 1-898465-11-8. (NHF, 175 Gray’s Inn Rd, London 8 Reports & booklets Illustrated how-to-do-it handbook. WC1X 8UP, UK • Subtitle Also in Chinese, German, Czech Tel: +44 (0)20 7278 6571 • Author/editor/director (from shop www.nickwates.co.uk). Email: [email protected].) • Publisher Action Planning for Cities O The Change Handbook O • Date of latest edition A guide to community practice, Group methods for shaping the • ISBN number Nabeel Hamdi and Reinhard future, Peggy Holman and Tom • Annotation Goethert, John Wiley & Sons, 1997, Devane, Berrett-Koehler, 1999, • Languages available other 0-471-96928-1. 1-57675-058-2. than English Well illustrated textbook on the Guide to 18 change strategies for • (Where to obtain if non- theory and practice of community tapping human potential in planning in developing countries. organisations and communities. standard publisher and publisher not listed in At Risk O Changing Places O Contacts A-Z p210). Natural hazards, people's Children’s participation in vulnerability and disasters, environmental planning, Eileen Piers Blaikie, Terry Cannon, Ian Adams & Sue Ingham, The Davis and Ben Wisner, Routledge, Children’s Society, 1998, 1994, 0-415-08477-2. 1-899783-00-8. Comprehensive explanation of why Practical guide for practitioners and a people-first approach is essential teachers wishing to involve children and how to initiate it. in planning and design. Website updates 8 a www.communityplanning.net Brick by Brick Chattanooga For latest publications listing. How to develop a community A community with a vision, Anne building, English Partnerships, 1997. Macksoud, Leonardo’s Children New material Guide for organisations wanting to Inc., 1993, 25 mins. If you know of material which build or refurbish property for Inspiring insight into a city-wide should be listed on the website community use. visioning process which has clearly achieved extraordinary results. (New and in future editions, please Building Democracy O Economics Foundation.) complete the online Community architecture in the submission form or send inner cities, Graham Towers, UCL Co-design O details to the address on Press, 1995, 1-85728-089-X. A process of design participation, page 221. Detailed account of the development Stanley King et al, Van Nostrand of community architecture with Reinhold, 1989, 0-442-23333-7. If you have difficulties getting some UK case studies. Lovely, well illustrated guide to hold of material, let us know. conducting design workshops, based on 197 case studies in the USA.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 203 CPH Pages 203-217 10/7/06 14:27 Page 204

C PUBLICATIONS & FILM

Cohousing O Community Design Primer O Community Involvement in A contemporary approach to Randolph T Hester, Ridge Times Planning and Development housing ourselves, Kathryn Press, 1990, 0934203067. Processes O McCamant & Charles Durrett, Good introduction to community Department of the Environment, Habitat Press/Ten Speed Press, design USA style with do-it-yourself HMSO, 1994, 0-11-753007-7. Berkeley, 1994, 0-89815-306-9. training exercises for the would-be Results of a planning research study How to develop housing schemes community designer. which demonstrates the value of with a strong shared element as community participation. Community Participation in pioneered in Denmark. Practice O a Community Planning Toolkit Communities Count! O Wendy Sarkissian, Andrea Cook Community Planning Publications, A step by step guide to community and Kelvin Walsh, Institute for 2000. Selection of original sustainability indicators, Alex Science and Technology Policy, documents from community MacGillivray, Candy Weston & Murdoch University. planning activities: programmes, Catherine Unsworth, New Economics Excellent series of publications and timetables, leaflets, reports. Useful Foundation, 1998. 1-899407-20-0. film designed to assist community for inspiration and saves wasting Handy guide to using indicators to planning and design work. time re-inventing the wheel. measure trends that really matter Comprises: (Catalogue from CPP.) and build an agenda for education •A Practical Guide, 1997, Community Visions Pack P and action. 0-86905-556-9. New Economics Foundation, 1998. Covers a range of useful methods, Community Action Planning A Contains how-to on setting up a some pioneered in Australia. Plan for Action, SIGUS Wall Charts, community visioning exercise, • The Workshop Checklist, 1994, 1998, 22”x 28”. Wallchart briefings on future search, guided 0-869053027. providing an overview of the main visualisation and participative How-to for workshop organisers. steps in running a microplanning, theatre, and case studies. • Casebook, 1994, 0-86905-363-9. or community action planning, field Describes and illustrates 12 case The Connected City 8 workshop. (SIGUS Wall Charts, studies from Australia. A new approach to making cities School of Architecture and Planning, • Listening to all the voices, work, Robert Cowan, Urban Room N52-357A, Massachusetts 28 min. video. Initiatives, 1997, 1-902193-008. Institute of Technology, Cambridge, Shows and debates methods in Includes checklists for preparing MA 02139, USA. action. action plans for cities or Email: [email protected] • The Community Participation neighbourhoods. (Urban Initiatives, Fax: +1 617 253 8221.) Handbook; Resources for public 35 Heddon Street, London W1R Community & Sustainable involvement in the planning 7LL, UK. Tel: +44 (0)20 7287 3644.) Development O process, 1986, revised 1994, Creating a Design Assistance Participation in the future, Diane 0-86905-359-0. Team for Your Community 8 Warburton (ed), Earthscan, 1998. Practical and theoretical essays by a American Institute of Architects 1-85383-531-5. number of authors. (AIA), 1996. Inspiring collection of writings on Above items available individually or Guidebook on the AIA’s Assistance the current state of the art. as a discounted package. Team Programme. Particularly (Murdoch University.) Community Architecture O useful for organisations wanting to How people are creating their own Community Participation Methods set up their own support systems. environment, Nick Wates & Charles in Design and Planning O Development at risk? 8 Knevitt, Penguin, 1987, Henry Sanoff, Wiley, 2000, Natural disasters and the third 0-14-010428-3. 0-471-35545-3. world, John Twigg (ed), UN Overview of movement for Detailed, well-illustrated guide for International Decade for Natural community participation in professionals and students. Disaster Reduction, 1999. architecture and planning. Also in Combines theoretical analysis with Clear, concise explanation of the Chinese and Japanese (from shop practical design games and differences within and between www.nickwates.co.uk). international case study material for communities from a natural disasters a broad range of applications. perspective. (Tony Eades, RAE, 29 Great Peter Street, London SW1P 3LW, UK. Tel: +44 (0)20 7222 2688. Email: [email protected]. Or on www.gfzpotsdam.de/ewc98/.)

204 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH Pages 203-217 10/7/06 14:27 Page 205

PUBLICATIONS & FILM I

Disaster Mitigation 8 The Good, the Bad and Housing by people O A community-based approach. the Ugly O Towards autonomy in building Andrew Maskrey, Oxfam, Oxford Cities in crisis, Rod Hackney, Frederick environments, John F C Turner, 1989. 0-85598123-7. Muller, 1990. 0-09-173939-X. Marion Boyars, 1976, Seminal polemic. Inspiring personal account of a 0-7145-2569-3. crusade to help people shape their Seminal work on housing, drawing The Do-ers guide to Planning for own environments by a pioneering on experience in developing Real Exercises 8 community architect. countries to illustrate the universal Tony Gibson, Neighbourhood necessity for dweller control. Initiatives Foundation, 1998, Good Practice Guide to 1-902556-06-2. Community Planning and Hucknall 20/20 Vision Nicely illustrated explanation of Development 8 Conference a Planning for Real. Michael Parkes, London Planning Audio Visual Arts, 1997. Advisory Committee, 1995. Case study of a future search Duke Street/Bold Street Detailed guide with case studies by conference in the UK. Useful Planning Weekend 8 a seasoned practitioner. introduction and insight into the John Thompson & Partners for (LPAC, Artillery House, Artillery process, 12 minutes (from New English Partnerships, 1997. Row, London SW1P 1RT, UK. Economics Foundation). Good example of a detailed report Tel: +44 (0)20 7222 2244.) of a community planning weekend. Ideas Annuals O (John Thompson & Partners – reports The Guide to Effective Innovative ideas and examples of of other planning weekends in Participation 8 successful community work Europe also available.) David Wilcox, Partnership Books, practice, Community Links, 1997 & 1994, 1-870298-00-4. 1998 available. Economics of Urban Villages O Overview of general participation Excellent illustrated series aimed at Tony Aldous (ed), Urban Villages methods. (David Wilcox, 1/43 community organisations. Forum, 1995. 0-9519028-1-4. Bartholomew Close, London EC1, UK General guide on the practical Imagine Chicago a Email: [email protected]. realities of developing urban David Szabo, Imagine Chicago, 1998. Also on www.partnerships.org.uk.) villages. (The Prince’s Foundation.) Inspiring case study on a project The Guide to Development based on future search and Effective working with rural Trusts and Partnerships O appreciative inquiry. 15 mins. communities O David Wilcox, Development Trusts (from New Economics Foundation). James Derounian, Packard Association, 1998. 0-9531469-0-3. Publishing, 1998, 1-85341-106-X. Innovations in Public Handbook aimed particularly at Includes a useful chapter on Participation 8 those setting up trusts. (Full text community appraisals. Jane Morris (ed), IDeA, 1996. also on www.partnerships.org.uk.) 0-7488-9599-X. Future Search O Guiding urban design series a Brief but illuminating introduction An action guide to ﬁnding common Three-part video on urban design, to mechanisms for increasing ground in organisations and Tony Costello, Martin Cramton Jr, citizen involvement including communities, Marvin R Weisboard Bruce Race and Nore Winter, citizens juries, study circles, citizens and Sandra Janoff, Berrett-Koehler, American Institute of Certiﬁed panels, teledemocracy, focus 1995,1-881052-12-5. Planners, American Planning groups, techniques for workshops Good step-by-step guide to running Association Bookstore, 1994. 312- and resolving conflicts, future future search conferences. 955-9100. Total of 6 hours videos search and visioning (IDeA, Layden From Place to Place O entitled: Community-decision House, 76-86 Turnmill Street, Maps and parish maps, Sue Clifford making; Understanding design London EC1M 5QU, UK. and Angela King (eds), Common context; Design implementation. Tel: +44 (0)20 7296 6600). Ground, 1996. 1-870-364-163. Here to Stay 8 Involving communities in urban The background and experience of A public policy framework for and rural regeneration 8 parish mapping with contributions community-based organisations, A guide for practitioners, Pieda plc, from several authors. Caroline Davies (ed), Development Department of the Environment, Trusts Association, 1997. 1995, 1-85112201-X. 0-9531469-0-1. Useful overview to general Review of development trusts approaches with handy checklists movement in the UK and policies and summaries. necessary for developing it further.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 205 CPH Pages 203-217 10/7/06 14:27 Page 206

I PUBLICATIONS & FILM

Involving Citizens in Community Measuring Community Participatory Design O Decision Making 8 Development in Northern Theory and techniques, Henry A Guidebook, James L Creighton, Ireland 8 Sanoff (ed), North Carolina State Program for Community Problem Voluntary Activity Unit, Northern University, 1990, 0-9622107-3-0. Solving, 1997. Ireland Department of Health and Rich compendium of interesting Very clear and easy guide for local Social Services, 1996. theoretical and practical material, government staff in designing, Handbook for practitioners, particularly from USA experience. developing and managing citizen including set of indicators grouped Participatory Learning and participation programs, based on into two clusters: community Action O original version commissioned for empowerment, and change in the A trainer’s guide, Jules Pretty, Irene the City of Glendale, California. quality of community life. (VAU, Guijt, John Thompson and Ian (915 15th Street, NW., Suite 601, CDP, DHSS, Dundonald House, Scoones, International Institute for Washington DC 20005, USA.) Upper Newtownards Road, Belfast Environment and Development, BT4 3SF, UK.) Large Group Interventions O 1995, 1-899825-00-2. Engaging the entire organisation Open Space Technology O Excellent handbook for trainers for rapid change, Barbara Benedict A user’s guide, Harrison Owen, involved in using participatory Bunker and Billie T Alban, Jossey- Abbott Publishing, 1992, methods. Bass, 1997, 0-7879-0324-8. 0-9618205-3-5. A Pattern Language O Practical guide to some of the many Step-by-step journey through the Christopher Alexander et al., ways of involving everybody in open space workshop method. Oxford University Press, 1977, improving whole systems. The Oregon Experiment O 0-19501-919-9. The Linz Cafe O Christopher Alexander et al, Oxford Influential book describing working Christopher Alexander, Oxford University University Press, 1975. method enabling untrained people University Press, 1981. 0-19-501824-9. to design any part of the 0-19520-263-5. Classic account of the planning environment themselves; homes, Beautiful account of the design and process for the University of Oregon streets, neighbourhoods. construction of an Austrian cafe where the entire community of The Permaculture Teachers based on user participation. 15,000 were involved in the Handbook O planning and design. Making Cities Better 8 Andrew Goldring (ed), WWF-UK , Visions and implementation, Ziona Parish Maps 8 2000, 1-85850-168-7. Strelitz, George Henderson and Common Ground, 1996. Why and Explains how to run permaculture Robert Cowan (eds), Vision for how to make a parish map, with design courses. Cities, De Montfort University, 1996. Illustrated examples. PLA Notes 0-9527500-0-7. ¶ Participation Works! O Published three times a year by the Report on a series of 20 Vision for Twenty-one techniques of Sustainable Agriculture and Rural Cities workshops in the mid 1990s. community participation for the Livelihoods Programme of the (Department of Architecture, De twenty-first century, Julie Lewis, International Institute of Montfort University, The Gateway, Catherine Unsworth and Perry Environment and Development. Leicester LE1 9BH, UK.) Walker (eds), New Economics Frank exchange of experience and Making Places 8 Foundation, 1998. 1-899407-17-0. views on participatory learning and EDAW Consultants, English Useful standard summary profiles action, by and for practitioners in Partnerships, 1998. on a varied range of general the field. ( IIED.) Guide to good practice in mixed participation methods. Plan, Design and Build O development schemes. Participatory Action in the 21st Century Halls for England, (The Prince’s Foundation.) Countryside 8 Alan Wilkinson, Action with Managing Partnerships 8 A literature review, Diane Warburton, Communities in Rural England Tools for mobilising the public Countryside Agency, 1998. (ACRE) 1997, 1-871157-48-X. sector, business and civil society as Useful annotated listing. Excellent how-to-do-it on creating partners in development, Ros community centres including Tennyson, Prince of Wales Business community involvement. Leaders Forum, 1998. 1-899159-84-3. Excellent how-to on partnerships crammed with useful checklists, tips and sample documents.

206 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH Pages 203-217 10/7/06 14:27 Page 207

PUBLICATIONS & FILM T

Plan for Action a Rising from the Ashes O The Self-Build Book O The Mount Wise Community Development strategies in times How to enjoy designing and Action Planning event, 1999. Case of disaster, Mary B Anderson and building your own home, Jon study. Useful introduction and Peter J Woodrow. Intermediate Broome and Brian Richardson, insight into the process, 25 minutes Technology Publications, 1998 Green Books,1995, 1-900322-00-5. (from Mount Wise Action (reissue), 1-85339-439-4. Clear explanation of a variety of Planning). Explains capacities and self-build techniques including the vulnerabilities analysis and how timber frame method evolved by Planning for Real to apply it to projects. the architect Walter Segal. Community Pack P Neighbourhood Initiatives Recycling Streets Workshops § Small is Bankable O Foundation. Revised 1999. Jack Sidener. Nicely illustrated Community reinvestment in the UK, Provides the materials for a group leaflet providing a guide to staging Ed Mayo et al., New Economics to make an adaptable 3-dimensional a neighbourhood improvement Foundation, 1998, 1-85935-047-X. model of an existing or new workshop. (Chinese University of Guide to a range of community neighbourhood. Hong Kong, attn. Jack Sidener. finance initiatives which can help a Free, send self-addressed envelope.) build financially sustainable Planning for Real – the video regeneration. Neighbourhood Initiatives Reducing Risk O Streetwise ¶ Foundation, 1997, 17 mins. Participatory learning activities for Magazine which often covers Good insight into the origins and disaster mitigation in southern community planning issues. value of Planning for Real including Africa, Astrid von Kotze and Ailsa Contact Places for People for an two case studies. Holloway, University of Natal, South index. The Power in our Hands O Africa and International Federation Neighbourhood-based world- of Red Cross, Geneva, 1997. Taking Power O shaking, Tony Gibson, Jon 0-85598-347-7. An agenda for community Carpenter Publishing, 1996, Reference material and ideas for economic renewal, Ed Mayo, 1-897766-28-9. participatory training/learning Stephen Thake and Tony Gibson, Powerful account of ordinary exercises for field workers involved New Economics Foundation, 1998, people doing extraordinary things in community-based disaster 1-899407-14-6. all over the world. mitigation. Provocative paper on how to build on the work of people at O Reducing Urban Risk P Projects with People community level to rebuild society CD and action planning help-cards The practice of participation in rural neighbourhood by neighbourhood. development, Peter Oakley et al., for project facilitators on how to ILO (IT Publications), 1991. reduce urban risk at community The Thin Book of Appreciative 922-107-2827. level, based on research and Inquiry 8 Comprehensive analysis based projects in India. (Centre for Sue Annis Hammond, Kodiak on international experience over Development and Emergency Consulting, 1998, 0-9665373-1-9. several decades. Especially good Practice.) Handy introduction to this on rationale, benefits and technique. (Appreciative Inquiry The Scope of Social practical problems and how to Group.) Architecture O overcome them. Excellent Richard Hatch, Van Nostrand Tenant Participation in Housing summaries and tables. Reinhold, 1984. 0-442-26153-5. Design 8 Real Time Strategic Change O Fascinating and detailed case A guide for action, Royal Institute Robert Jacobs, Berrett-Kohler, 1994, studies of community architecture of British Architects and the 1-881052-45-1. and planning projects from twelve Institute of Housing, RIBA How-to on this participatory countries, mostly in the developed Publications, 1988. 0-947877-02-9. approach to enterprise management. world. Range from housing projects Simple, practical advice aimed to replanning entire cities. mainly at development professionals and housing managers.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 207 CPH Pages 203-217 10/7/06 14:27 Page 208

T PUBLICATIONS & FILM

Unleashing the Potential 8 Village Appraisals Software for The Weller Way O Bringing residents to the centre of Windows 9 The story of the Weller Streets regeneration, Marilyn Taylor, Joseph Questionnaire generation and housing cooperative, Alan McDonald Rowntree Foundation, 1995. analysis programme for for the Weller Streets, Faber and 1-85935-014-3. undertaking village, parish or Faber, 1986, 0-571-13963-9. Draws lessons from 33 studies from community appraisals. Easy to use. Lively blow-by-blow narrative of the Foundation’s Action on Estates IBM compatible. £50. (from how 61 working-class families programme. Covers many different Countryside & Community Unit, battled tirelessly to build Liverpool’s aspects of community involvement Cheltenham & Gloucester College first new-build housing co-operative. and ways of developing a more of Higher Education, Francis Close The What, How and Why of central role for residents in the Hall, Swindon Road, Cheltenham Neighbourhood Community regeneration of estates. Useful for GL50 4AZ, UK. Tel: 01242-544083). Development 8 principles and examples. Village design P Christine Flecknoe and Neil McLellan, Urban Design in Action O Making local character count in Community Matters, 1994. The history, theory and new development, Countryside Explains what community development development of the American Commission UK, 1996, CCP 501 is, the values it reflects and what it Institute of Architects’ (Part 1). can achieve in a neighbourhood, and Regional/Urban Design Assistance Excellent guidance pack explaining offers simple models for evaluating Teams Program (R/UDAT), Peter how to produce village design those achievements. Excellent, short, Batchelor and David Lewis, North statements. Contains handbooks easy to read. Carolina State University School of plus two examples. When we build again O Design and the American Institute (CC Postal Sales, PO Box 124, Let’s have housing that works, of Architects, 1985. 0-913962-80-5. Walgrave, Northampton NN6 9TL, UK. Colin Ward, Pluto Press, 1985. Classic work on the development of Tel: +1 (0)1604 781848.) 0-74530-022-7. action planning in the USA. Village views a Very readable summary on how Urban Projects Manual O Making local character count in paternalistic government housing A guide to preparing upgrading new development, Eye to Eye for policies should be transformed to and new development projects the Countryside Commission UK, enable people to house themselves. accessible to low income groups, 1996, CCV 05. Whose Reality Counts? O Forbes Davidson and Geoff Payne Useful introduction to local design Putting the first last, Robert (eds), Liverpool University Press, 1986, statements based on the UK village Chambers, Intermediate Technology revised 1999, 0-85323-484-1. context. 10 mins. Publications, 1997, 1-85339-386-X. Well illustrated guide based on field (CC Postal Sales, PO Box 124, State of the art treatise on experience, mainly in Egypt. Walgrave, Northampton NN6 9TL, UK. Tel: +44 (0)1604 781848.) Participatory Rapid Appraisal (PRA). Urban Villages O Your Place and Mine 8 A concept for creating mixed-use AVision of Britain O Reinventing planning. Town & urban development on a A personal view of architecture, Country Planning Association, 1999. sustainable scale, Urban Villages HRH The Prince of Wales, 0-902797-33-6. Forum, 1997. 0-9519028-0-6. Doubleday, 1989. 0-385-26903-X. Proposals for restructuring the Housebuilders, funders, planners Inspiring statement of the Prince’s planning system incorporating a and developers make the case for a influential approach to architecture community planning approach. more people-friendly approach to including Ten Principles for creating mixed-use sustainable development humane environments. Youth Planning Charrettes O (The Prince’s Foundation.) Viterbo; Santa Maria in Gradi O A manual for planners, teachers and youth advocates, Bruce Race User Participation in Building Brian Hanson and Liam O’Connor and Carolyn Torma, American Design and Management O (eds), Union Printing Edizioni, Planning Association,1998. David Kernohan, John Gray, John Viterbo, 1994. 1-898465-09-6. Written as a resource for planners Daish, Butterworth-Heinneman, Fully illustrated account of an urban and educators working with young 1996, 0-7506-2888-X. design task force in Italy. Also in people. Gives advice on how to Useful how-to-do-it on participatory Italian. (The Prince’s Foundation.) design an informed and interactive evaluations of buildings after they process. have been erected. Well-thought through process. Good drawings.

208 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH Pages 203-217 10/7/06 14:27 Page 209

A Contacts A–Z

An annotated selection of Action Towards Local Architecture Centres Network contacts for further Sustainability c/o Visual Arts: Architecture. Arts information and support on e [email protected] Council of England, 14 Great Peter community planning. w www.sustainability.org.uk Street, London SW1P 3NQ, UK European project helping local t +44 (0)20 7973 6469 f 7973 6581 Emphasis on organisations authorities to improve quality of life e [email protected] able to: through sustainable development. Contact: Claire Pollock. • supply publications or film; Website has policy guidance, case Coordinating network for • supply local, national or studies and techniques. Includes a architecture centres. 'community toolkit' of participatory international contacts or The Architecture Foundation techniques. with useful website links; 30 Bury Street, London SW1Y 6AU, • provide more info on Action with Communities in UK methods in handbook. Rural England (ACRE) t +44 (0)20 7839 9389 f 7839 9380 Somerford Court, Somerford Road, e [email protected] Information listed Cirencester, Glos GL7 1TW, UK w www.architecturefoundation.org.uk t +44 (0)1285 653477 f 654537 Promotes a range of participatory • Name of organisation or e [email protected] approaches for contemporary individual w www.acreciro.demon.co.uk architecture and urban design. • address National association of rural Expertise in roadshows, competitions, community councils. Publications, electronic maps and participatory • tel (t) information sheets and briefings on education programmes. Exhibitions • fax (f) rural development and village halls. and talks in shopfront gallery. (minus code if same as tel) • email (e) African Academy of Sciences Association for Community • web site (w) PO Box 14798, Nairobi, Kenya Design t +254 2 884401 f 884406 Pratt Institute, 379 Dekalb Avenue, • contact name Contact: Thomas R Odhiambo Brooklyn 11205, USA • annotation Useful regional contact point. t +1 718 636 3486 e [email protected] Appreciative Inquiry Group e [email protected] c/o Anne Radford, 303 Bankside w www.communitydesign.org/ Lofts, 65 Hopton Street, London Network for community design SE1 9JL, UK Website updates centres in the USA. Member listing t +44 (0)7000 077 011 f 077 012 www.communityplanning.net and conference reports. For latest contacts listing. e [email protected] w www.aradford.co.uk Association of Community New material Management coach and consultant Technical Aid Centres on appreciative inquiry.Website has w www.liv.ac.uk/abe/actac/ If you know of contacts AI resource centre (email newsletter Network for community design and which should be listed on the and publications). technical aid centres in the UK. website and in future Listing of local centres. See also American Institute of Architects editions, please complete the Community Technical Aid Centre. 1735 New York Avenue, NW online submission form or Washington DC 20006, USA Azerbaijan Civil Engineering send details to the address t 1 202 626 7300 f 626 7365 University on page 221. Contacts from e [email protected] 5A Sultanova St, Baku 370073, countries or regions not w www.aiaonline.com Azerbaijan. already covered particularly Promotes design assistance team t +99412 39 10 19 f 39 07 48 welcome. (DAT) programmes. Has films, e [email protected] tapes, brochures and reports from Contacts: Tair Teyubov, Emil If you find any contacts listed US events. Supplies addresses of Gousseinov. unhelpful, please let us know. experienced team members and Useful regional contact point. local and state support programmes.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 209 CPH Pages 203-217 10/7/06 14:27 Page 210

B CONTACTS

Baga Toiruu City Government, Centre for Disaster Preparedness Chuanshing Publishing Company Governor's Municipality, Baga Room 304 NCCP Bldg, 879 EDSA, 10F-3, No.60, SEC. 4, Chung Hsiao Toiruu, Mongolia Quezon City, Philippines E. Road, Taipei, Taiwan t +976 1 324 072 f 324 072 t +63 2 9240386 f 9240836 t +886 2 27752207 f 27318734 Contact: Chogsom Erdene-Ochir. e e [email protected] Useful regional contact point. Contact: Lorna Victoria. President: Ming-Cheu Chen Training courses on community- Contact: Jo Tsai Ball State University based urban and rural planning Publications and information. Community-Based Projects Program, focusing on disaster prevention. Useful regional contact point. College of Architecture & Planning, Publications and consultancy. Muncie, Indiana 47306, USA Civic Practices Network t +1 765 285 5868 f 285 1765 Centre for Environment and Center for Human Resources, Heller e [email protected] Human Settlements School, Brandeis University, 60 Turner w www.bsu.edu/cbp School of Planning and Housing, 79 Street, Waltham, MA 02154, USA Contacts: Tony Costello, Scott Truex. Grassmarket, Edinburgh EH1 2HJ, UK t +1 617 736 4890 f 736 4891 Urban design studio within a t +44 (131) 221 6164 f 221 6163 e [email protected] w www.cpn.org university setting. Experience of e [email protected] Collaborative project dedicated to running charrettes, using mobile w www.eca.ac.uk/planning/cehs.htm bringing practical tools for public studios and producing newspaper Teaching, training, research and problem solving into community supplements. Good website. knowledge-based services in and institutional settings. Useful planning and housing issues related manuals, essays and opportunities Business in the Community to developing world. Main focus on for information exchange. 44 Baker Street, London W1M best practice in conditions of rapid 1DH, UK Civic Trust urbanisation. t +44 (0)20 7224 1600 f 7486 1700 17 Carlton House Terrace, London e [email protected] Centre for Environment and SW1Y 5AW, UK w www.bitc.org.uk Society, University of Essex t +44 (0)20 7930 0914 f 7321 0180 Promotes corporate community John Tabor Labs, Wivenhoe Park, w www.civictrust.org.uk involvement. Its Professional Firms Colchester CO4 3SQ, UK Charity focusing on the built Group promotes action planning t +44 (0)1206 873323 f 873416 environment. Organises national and acts as broker of professional e [email protected] environment week programme. services to community organisations. w www.essex.ac.uk/centres/ces/ Regeneration Unit has expertise in Bristol office administers annual Contact: Jules Pretty. community-based regeneration. Community Enterprise Awards Information on deliberative Common Ground scheme. Contact Graham Russell: democracy and participatory PO Box 25309, London NW5 1ZA, UK BITC, 165 White Ladies Road, governance methods. t/f +44 (0)20 7267 2144 Bristol BS8 2RN, UK Centre for Social Work, Sombor e [email protected] t 0117 923 8750 f 923 8270 City Government, Karadjordjeva 4, w www.commonground.org.uk e [email protected] Sombor 25000, Yugoslavia Environmental arts charity linking Centre for Development and t +381 35 22 499 people and place. Expertise on Emergency Practice (CENDEP) Contact: Silvija Kranjc. parish mapping and community Oxford Brookes University, Gypsy Useful regional contact point. orchards. Lovely publications: Lane Campus, Headington, Oxford books, posters and cards. Chinese University of Hong Kong OX3 OBP, UK Department of Architecture, Shatin, Communio Kommunikations- t +44 (0)1865 483413 f 483298 Hong Kong und Konfliktberatung w www.brookes.ac.uk/schools/arch t +852 2609 6581 f 2603 5267 Am Wiesental 40a, 45133 Essen, /cendep e [email protected] Germany Contact: Nabeel Hamdi. Contact: Jack Sidener. t +49 (0) 201 841 9914 f 841 9913 Postgraduate programme. Expertise Expertise in design fests. e [email protected] on community planning, particularly Contact: Barbara Mettler v. Meibom. in developing countries. Communications consultancy promoting and implementing co-operation and participation techniques to overcome conflict.

210 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH Pages 203-217 10/7/06 14:27 Page 211

CONTACTS D

Communities Online Community Technical Aid Centre Department for International e [email protected] 2nd floor, 3 Stevenson Square, Development w www.communities.org.uk Manchester M1 1DN, UK 94 Victoria Street, London SW1E Web-based project to encourage t +44 (0)161 236 5195 f 236 5836 5JL, UK community networking using new Contact: Ian Taylor. t +44 (0)20 7917 7000 f 7917 0019 communications technologies. Local community technical aid e enquiry@dfid.gov.uk centre. Also a contact point for w www.dfid.gov.uk Community Architecture Group national Association of Community UK government department c/o Pollard Thomas & Edwards Technical Aid Centres. focusing on helping developing Architects, Diespeker Wharf, 38 countries eliminate poverty. Graham Street, London N1 8JX, UK CONCERN, Inc t +44 (0)20 7336 7777 f 7336 0770 1794 Columbia Rd., NW Department of the Environment, e [email protected] Washington, DC 20009, USA Transport and the Regions Contact: Judith Marshall. t +1 (202) 328 8160 f 387 3378 Eland House, Bressenden Place, Network of community architects. e [email protected] London SW1E 5DU, UK Administers Community Projects w www.sustainable.org t +44 (0)20 7890 3000 Fund, raising sponsorship to provide w www.smartgrowth.org w www.detr.gov.uk grants for feasibility studies to Contact: Susan F Boyd. Government department covering community groups for small projects. Nonprofit US environmental England. Information and education organisation focusing on publications. Community Links building sustainable communities. 4th floor, Furnival House, 48 Furnival Deutsche Institut fur Urbanistik Aims to build public understanding Gate, Sheffield, UK Strasse des 17. Juni 112, 10623 of, and support for, programmes, t +44 (0) 114 2701171 f 2762377 Berlin, Germany policies and practices that are e [email protected] t +49 (0)30 39001 0 f 39001 100 environmentally, economically and w www.shef.ac.uk/~cl Expertise in action planning in socially sound. Good websites. Social action and training network Germany. promoting good practice in Congress for the New Urbanism Development Alternatives Group community work. Useful publications. The Hearst Building, 5 Third Street, B-32 Tara Crescent, Qutab Institutional Suite 500A, San Francisco, CA Community Matters Area, New Delhi 110016, India 94103, USA 8/9 Upper Street, London N1 OPQ, UK t +91 11 665370 f 6866031 t +1 415 495 2255 f 495 1731 t +44 (0)20 7226 0189 f 7354 9570 e [email protected] e [email protected] w www.cnu.org e communitymatters@community w www.ecouncil.ac.cr/devalt Influential movement for humanising matters.org.uk Contact: Shastrant Patara. the built environment based on the w www.communitymatters.org.uk Training, consultancy and organisation of charrettes, Charitable federation for community publications on participatory urban congresses and task forces. associations. Good publications on and rural development. setting up and running community The Countryside Agency Development Planning Unit organisations and buildings. John Dower House, Crescent Place, 9 Endsleigh Gardens, London Cheltenham, Gloucestershire, Community Planning WC1H OED, UK GL50 3RA, UK Publications t +44 (0)20 7388 7581 f 7388 4541 t +44 (0)1242 521381 f 584270 c/o Nick Wates Associates e [email protected] e [email protected] 7 Tackleway, Hastings, TN34 4DE, UK w www.ucl.ac.uk/DPU/ w www.countryside.gov.uk t +44 (0)1424 447888 f 441514 International centre for research, Information and training on e [email protected] teaching, training and consultancy innovative ways of involving people w www.nickwates.co.uk focusing on Asia, Africa and Latin in improving the countryside Contact: Nick Wates. America. including village design statements Updates to this handbook and community forests. Development Trusts Association signposted on website. Information 20 Conduit Place, London W2 1HZ, for future editions and ideas for Deicke Richards Architects UK further publications welcome. PO Box 10047, Adelaide Street, t +44 (0)20 7706 4951 f 7706 8447 Brisbane, Queensland, Australia 4000 e [email protected] w www.dta.org.uk t +61 7 38394380 f 38394381 National UK umbrella organisation e [email protected] for community-based development Experienced practitioners and organisations. Useful publications, researchers. training and information exchange.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 211 CPH Pages 203-217 10/7/06 14:27 Page 212

D CONTACTS

Dick Watson Community Projects Environmental Partnership for Foros Técnicos Ltda 14 Riverside, Totnes, Devon TQ9 Central Europe Carrera 10 # 65-35, Oﬁcina 402, 5JB, UK Nadaci Partnerství, Panská 7/9, Bogotá, Columbia t/f +44 (0)1803 865773 602 00 Brno, Czech Republic t +571 2100480 f 2103149 Experienced consultant on t +420 5 4221 8350 f 4222 1744 e [email protected] stakeholder participation and e [email protected] w www.gbn.org community project management. Promotes community planning in Contact: Inés de Mosquera. central Europe. Useful regional contact point. Directory of Social Change Consulting ﬁrm involved in creation Environmental Trainers Network 24 Stephenson Way, London NW1 of NGOs, strategic alliances around c/o BTCV Enterprises, Red House, 2DP, UK projects of national Interest, Hill Lane, Great Barr, Birmingham t +44 (0)20 7209 5151 f 7209 5049 strategic and scenario planning. e [email protected] w www.dsc.org.uk B43 6LZ, UK Publishes a range of useful t +44 (0)121 358 2155 f 358 2194 Forum for the Future & fundraising and other directories, e [email protected] Cheltenham Observatory aimed at the voluntary sector. w www.btcv.org Francis Close Hall, Swindon Road, Runs training programmes on Cheltenham, Glos. GL50 4AZ, UK Drought Preparedness participatory approaches. t +44 (0)1242 544082 f 543273 Intervention and Recovery e [email protected] European LEADER Observatory Programme (DPIRP) w www.chelt.ac.uk/observatory AEIDL, 260 chaussee Saint Pierre, PO Box 954 Nanyuki, Kenya Partnership of independent experts B-1040 Bruxelles t +254 176 31641 f 31640 committed to building a sustainable t +32 2 736 49 60 f 736 04 34 e Design Research Filipinos for Community Network of future search Association Involvement practitioners. Supplies publications, PO Box 7146, Edmond, OK 73083- 22 Solar Street, Bel Air III, Makati videos, local practitioner contacts. 7146, USA City, Philippines t +1 405 330 4863 f 330 4150 t +63 (2) 8965475 f 8959503 Georgian Technical University e [email protected] e [email protected] Institute of Architecture, Tbilisi, w www.telepath.com/edra/home.html Contact: Leticia Ramos Shahani. Georgia International association promoting Useful regional contact point t +995 32 33 71 63 f 33 26 25. advancement and dissemination of e [email protected] environmental design research. Contacts: Vladimir Vardosanidze, Magda Goliadze. Association of Urbanists of Georgia. Useful regional contact point.

212 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH Pages 203-217 10/7/06 14:27 Page 213

CONTACTS J

Groundwork HUD USER Intermediate Technology 85/87 Cornwall Street, Birmingham P.O. Box 6091, Rockville, MD Publications B3 3BY, UK 20849, USA 103-105 Southampton Row, t +44 (0)121 236 8565 f 236 7356 t +1 800 245 2691 f 301 519 5767 London WC1B 4HH, UK e [email protected] e [email protected] t +44 (0)20 7436 9761 f 7436 2013 w www.groundwork.org.uk w www.huduser.org/ e [email protected] UK network of local trusts working Government department for USA. w www.oneworld.org/itdg/ through partnership to improve the Information and publications. publications.html quality of life in deprived areas. Publishing arm of the Intermediate Imagine Chicago Sister organisations in Japan and USA. Technology Development Group. 35 East Wacker Drive, Suite 1522, Useful publications and videos. Material on all aspects of development Chicago, Illinois 60601, USA and appropriate technology Habitat Budapest Office t +1 312 444 1913 f 444 9243 including community participation. VATI Magyar Regionalis Fejlesztesi e [email protected] Urbanisztikai KHT, Gellerthegy u.30- w www.imaginechicago.org The International Association of 32, 1016 Budapest PF 2011253, Contact: Bliss Brown. Public Participation Practitioners Hungary Innovative project helping people IAP3 Headquarters, PO Box 82317, t +361 375 5691 f 356 8003 develop their imagination as city Portland, Oregon 97282, USA Contact: Nora Horcher. creators, based on future search t 503 236 6630 f 233 0772 Useful regional contact point. and appreciative inquiry methods. w www.journalism.wisc.edu/cpn/se Resource materials available. ctions/affiliates/iap3.html Habitat International Coalition Non-projit corporation aiming to PO Box 34519, Groote-Schuur Institute of Cultural Affairs allow practitioners throughout the 7937, Cape Town, South Africa Rue Amedee Lynen 8, B-1210 world to exchange good practice. t +27 21 696 2205 f 696 2203 Brussels, Belgium e [email protected] t +32 (0)2 219 00 87 f 219 04 06 International Institute for w http://home.mweb.co.za/hi/hic/ e [email protected] Environment and Development Global forum for NGOs concerned w www.icaworld.org 3 Endsleigh Street, London WC1H with human settlements. Global network of private, non- ODD, UK profit organisations concerned with t +44 (0)20 7388 2117 f 7388 2826 Hackney Building Exploratory the human factor in world e [email protected] w www.iied.org Queensbridge Building, Albion development. Runs courses based Independent organisation Drive, London E8 4ET, UK on its Technology of Participation promoting sustainable world t/f +44 (0)20 7275 8555 (ToP) methodology. development. Its Resource Centre e [email protected] for Participatory Learning and Architecture centre developing Institute of Development Action has over 2000 documents innovatory display techniques. Studies, Brighton covering most participatory University of Sussex, Brighton BN1 Hastings Trust approaches, focusing primarily on 9RE, UK 35 Robertson Street, Hastings TN34 Africa, Asia and South America. t +44 (0)1273 877263 f 621202 1HT, UK e [email protected] Isabel Val de Flor t +44 (0)1424 446373 f 434206 w www.ids.ac.uk/ids/particip Architecture, Urbanisme, Ecologie e [email protected] A Participation Group produces Urbaine, 91 Route de Carrieres, w www.hastingstrust.co.uk regular newsletter and website on 78400 Chatou, France Local development trust. Building participatory approaches with t/f +33 (0) 39 52 96 08 an international database on Tools useful bibliographies, contacts and Architect and urbanist promoting for Community Regeneration. listings of events around the world. community participation and Hertfordshire County Council ecology. Useful regional contact. Environment Department, County Jigso Hall, Pegs Lane, Hertford SG13 1 North Parade, Aberystwyth, 8DN, UK Ceredigion SY23 2JH, Wales, UK t +44 (0) 1992 555231 f 555251 t +44 (0)1970 623255 f 639033 Contact: David Hughes. e [email protected] w www.jigso.org Experience of using future search to Information on community develop whole settlement strategies. participation methods for Wales. Useful publications and info sheets. Good web site.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 213 CPH Pages 203-217 10/7/06 14:27 Page 214

J CONTACTS

John Thompson & Partners MATCH (MAnaging The CHange) Neighbourhood Initiatives 77 Cowcross Street, London EC1M Entwicklungsberatung Foundation 6EJ, UK Horstweg 5, D-14059 Berlin, The Poplars, Lightmoor, Telford TF4 t +44 (0)20 7251 5135 f 7251 5136 Germany 3QN, UK e [email protected] t + 49 30 326 5012 f 326 5214. t +44 (0)1952 590777 f 591771 w www.jtp.co.uk e [email protected] e [email protected] Contact: John Thompson. w www.matchconsult.de w www.nif.co.uk Architects, urban designers and Contact: Andreas von Zadow. Charity specialising in community community planners with much Development companions for participation, training and experience of participatory and sustainable development in cities, development, often using ‘Planning action planning methods in the UK communities and organisations. for Real’ which is a registered and Europe. trademark of the Foundation. Has Max Lock Centre membership scheme, regular Kala Karthikeyan, Community University of Westminster, 35 newsletter, training courses and Educator Marylebone Road, London NW1 useful publications and packs. C 1/1, Humayun Road, New Delhi 5LS, UK 110003, India t +44 (0)20 7911 5000 f 7911 5171 Neighbourhood Planning for t +91 11 4632818 & 4632919 e [email protected] Community Revitalisation e [email protected] w www.wmin.ac.uk/~maxlockc/ 330 Humphrey Center, 301-19th Useful regional contact point. krttp.html. Ave South, Minneapolis, MN Research unit based on the civic 55455, USA Kobe University diagnosis and participatory ideals of t 612.625-1551 Department of Architecture and the Max Lock Group, supplemented e [email protected] Civil Engineering, Rokkodai Nada, with the archives of John Turner. w www.freenet.msp.mn.us/org/npcr/ Kobe 657-0013, Japan University project providing technical t/f +81 (0)78 803 6039 Medvode Community assistance and applied research to e [email protected] Mayor and City Planning Dept., local community-based organisations. Contact: Yoshimitsu Shiozaki. Cesta Komandanta Staneta 12, Research and practical experience in si–1215 Medvode, Slovenia New Economics Foundation community architecture and t +386 (0)61 613 600 f 611 686 Cinamon House, 6-8 Cole Street, planning in Japan including disaster e [email protected] London SE1 4YH, UK reconstruction. w http://welcome.to/Medvode t +44 (0)20 7407 7447 f 7407 6473 Contact: Mayor Stanislav Zagar e [email protected] The Local Futures Group Useful regional contact point. w www.neweconomics.org 5 Southampton Place, London Contact: Perry Walker/Julie Lewis, WC1A 2DA, UK Mount Wise Action Planning Centre for Participation. e [email protected] Estate Management Ofﬁce, Promotes community visioning, w www.lfg.co.uk 102 Pembroke Street, Plymouth indicators, community ﬁnance and Contacts: Mark Hepworth, Ian PL1 4JT, UK social audit. Coordinates UK Christie. t +44 (0) 1752 607277. Participation Network. Specialises in regeneration based on Active local group. Supply video ‘joined up’ policies and private–public and report on action planning. Nishikawa Tetsuya partnerships. Relationship marketing Hosei University Graduate School of Murdoch University for companies through focus groups, Architecture, 7-16-6 Yanaka Taitoh- Institute for Science and Technology workshops and use of local knowledge ku, Tokyo 110-0001, Japan Policy, Murdoch, Perth, Western databases. Futures analysis of social, t +81 (0)3 5685 1995 f 5685 1995 Australia 6150 economic, political and cultural trends. Contact: Yanaka Gakko. t +618 9360 2913 f 9360 6421 Experience of community-based Massachusetts Institute of e [email protected] development, planning and design. Technology w wwwistp.murdoch.edu.au/ Department of Architecture, Useful research and publications. 77 Mass Avenue, Cambridge, Mass National Tenants Resource Centre 02130, USA Trafford Hall, Ince Lane, Wimbolds t +1 617 253 7904 f 522 0613 Trafford, Chester CH2 4JP, UK e [email protected] t +44 (0)1244 300 246 f 300 818 Contact: Professor Jan Wampler. Training centre for tenants and Academic and practical expertise in other community organisations. many countries. Useful publications.

214 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH Pages 203-217 10/7/06 14:27 Page 215

CONTACTS R

North Carolina State University Participatory Design Conference The Prince of Wales Business School of Design, Campus Box e [email protected] Leaders Forum 7701, Brooks Hall, Pullen Road, w www.cpsr.org/conferences/ 15-16 Cornwall Terrace, Regent’s Raleigh, North Carolina 27695- pdc98/background.html Park, London NW1 4QP, UK 7701, USA Network based on a biannual t +44 (0)20 7467 3600 f 7467 3610 t +1 919 515 2205 f 515 7330 conference in North America. e [email protected]. e [email protected] Contact: Ros Tennyson, Learning PEP w www4.ncsu.edu/unity/users/s/ Programmes. 2 Albert Mews, Albert Road, sanoff/www/henry.html Organises partnership capacity- London N4 3RD, UK Contact: Henry Sanoff. building events worldwide with t +44 (0)20 7281 0438 f 7281 3587 Expertise in participatory design. focus on the developing world. e [email protected] Useful publications available. w www.pep.org.uk The Prince’s Foundation North-South Research Network Non-profit consultancy and training 19-22 Charlotte Road, Shoreditch, w www.eca.ac.uk/planning/cehs.htm on locally-based housing services London EC2A, UK e [email protected] and resident involvement. Useful t +44 (0)20 7613 8500 f 7613 8599 Internet-based network of publications and information sheets. e [email protected] institutions based in the UK w www.princes-foundation.org Permaculture Association involved in human settlements Unites and extends HRH The Prince BCM Permaculture Association, research in the developing world. of Wales’s initiatives in architecture, London WC1N 3XX, UK Includes this handbook with update building and urban regeneration. t +44 (0)7041 390170 information and feedback facilities. Encourages a more holistic and e [email protected] Hosted by Centre for Environment humane approach to the planning Can provide details of Permaculture & Human Settlements, Edinburgh, and design of communities. design courses and local contacts. Scotland (see separate entry). Public Participation Campaign Places for People Novosibirsk State Academy of c/o Friends of the Earth, 26-28 c/o ETP, 9 South Road, Brighton, Architecture and Fine Arts Underwood Street, London N1 7JQ, UK BN1 6SB, UK Krasny Prospect 38, Novosibirsk-99 t +44 (0)20 7566 1687 f 7566 1689 t/f +44 (0)1273 542660 630099, Russia e [email protected] e [email protected] t +7 383 2 225 830 f 222 905 w www.participate.org w http://pobox.com/~streetwise e [email protected] Contact: Mary Taylor, Co-ordinator. Network of the UK National Contact: Nikolai P Zhurin. Campaign by European non- Association for Urban Studies. Useful regional contact point. governmental organisations for Publishes Streetwise magazine and transparency and participation in OKO-Stadt – Universite de useful newsletter. decision-making on the environment. Dortmund Planners Network Publishes newsletter, Participate, Faculty of Spatial Planning, Paul- Pratt GCPE, 200 Willoughby Ave, from: Mara Silina, FoE Europe, 29 Lincke-Ufer 30, D10999 Berlin, Brooklyn, NY 11205, USA Rue Blanche, B-1060, Brussels, Germany t +1 718 636 3461 Belgium t. +49 (0) 30 611 8511 f 611 2320 e [email protected] t +32 2 542 0180 f 537 55 96 e [email protected] w www.plannersnetwork.org e [email protected] Contact: Prof. Dr. Ekhart Hahn Association of progressive planners. Eastern European contact point: Private office dealing with model Useful publications, papers, contacts. Svitlana Kravchenko projects and research on urban and t +380 44 229 3690 f 229-3645 spatial ecology. Post-war Reconstruction and e [email protected] Development Unit Open Society Fund University of York, The King’s Rajyoga Education and Research A. Jaksto st. 9, 2600 Vilnius, Manor, York YO1 2EP, UK Foundation National Lithuania t +44 (0)1904 433959 f 433949 Coordinating Office t +370 2 62 90 50 f 22 14 19 e [email protected] 25 New Rohtak Road, Karol Bagh, e [email protected] w www.york.ac.uk/depts/prdu New Delhi, India Contact: Sarunas Liekis. Contact: Sultan Barakat. t +91 11 752 8516 f 777 0463 Useful regional contact point. Community planning expertise in e [email protected] post-war situations. Contact: Asha Puri. Useful regional contact point.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 215 CPH Pages 203-217 10/7/06 14:27 Page 216

R CONTACTS

Rod Hackney Associates w www.nrec.org.uk/inforurale/. Sofia University of Architecture, St Peters House, Windmill Street, Internet ‘gateway site’ with links to Civil Engineering and Geodesy Macclesfield, Cheshire SK11 7HS, UK rural development resources. 1 Smirnensky Blvd, Sofia 1421, t +44 (0)1625 431792 f 616929 Bulgaria Samara State Academy of e [email protected] t +359 2 668 449 f 656 809 Architecture and Engineering Experienced community architecture e st_popv_far@bcace%.uacg.acad.bg Nikitinskaya Square 5/28-19, and planning practice. Contact: Stefan Popov. 443030 Samara, Russia Useful regional contact point. Roger Evans Associates t +7 846 2 362 119 f 321 965 59-63 High Street, Kidlington, e [email protected] SOFTECH Energie, Tecnologia, Oxford OX5 2DN, UK Contact: Elena Akhmedova Ambiente t +44 (0)1865 377030 f 377050 Useful regional contact point. via Cernaia 1, 1-10121 Torino, Italy e [email protected] t +39 (0) 11 562 2289 f 540 219 Sarkissian Associates Planners Urban design practice with e [email protected] 11 Laurel Street, Highgate Hill, community planning expertise. Contact: Roberto Pagani. Queensland Australia 4101 Consultancy integrating technology, Royal Institute of British t + 617 3846 3693 vf 3846 2719 economy, public administration and Architects e [email protected] citizen participation in regeneration. 66 Portland Place, London W1N Contact: Wendy Sarkissian. 4AD, UK Experienced practitioners and South Bank University t +44 (0)20 7580 5533 f 7225 1541 academics. Useful regional contact. Faculty of the Built Environment, e [email protected] 202 Wandsworth Road, London Sheep Network w www.riba.org SW8 2JZ, UK #204 Mejiro House K, 3-25-10 Runs Architects in Schools t +44 (0)20 7815 7283 f 7815 7366 Mejiro, Toshima-ku, Tokyo ZIP171, programme. Can supply a Schedule e [email protected] Japan of Services for Community Contact: Nick Hall. t +81 3 3565 4781 f 3565 4061 Architecture. Clients Advisory Community-based disaster Contact: Mariko Saigö. Service provides lists of local management research. Courses on Expertise in community architecture community architects. Bookshop tenant participation. and planning. Regional contact. and library have useful publications. Sustainable Strategies & Shelter Forum, Kenya Royal Town Planning Institute Solutions, Inc. PO Box 39493, Nairobi, Kenya 41 Botolph Lane, London EC3R 1535 NE 90th Street, Seattle, WA t +254 2 442108 f 445166. 8DL, UK 98115-3142, USA e [email protected] t +44 (0)20 7929 9494 f 7929 9490 t +1 (206) 979-9842 f 524-2524 Contact: Elijah Agevi. e [email protected] e [email protected] Coalition of NGOs in East Africa w www.rtpi.org.uk Contact: J. Gary Lawrence. with research and training Contact: Louise Waring, Community Helps public, private and civic programmes about community Planning Development Officer. organizations achieve their involvement in urban upgrading. Promotes public participation in individual and shared objectives planning through education for Shoevegas Arts and Media through incorporation of sustainable development, awards Top floor, 24-28 Hatton Wall, sustainable development theory schemes, publications and Planning London EC1N 8JH, UK and practice. Aid. Manages a Community t +44 (0)20 7916 6969 f 7916 9977 Tallinn College of Engineering Planning Project (funded by DCLG) e [email protected] Tallinn, Estonia. including the development of this w www.shoevegas.com t +372 2 645 0588 f 645 0956 website. Multimedia group. Experience with e [email protected] creating electronic maps. Rural Development Network & Contacts: Aleksander Skolimowsk, RuralNet Society for Development Studies Kristi Aija. National Rural Enterprise Centre, Opp. Pillanji, Sarojini Nagar, New Useful regional contact point. Stoneleigh Park, Warwickshire CV8 Delhi 110023, India Tamagawa, Community Design 2RR, UK t +91 11 6875862 f 6875862 House, 2-11-10 Tamagawa Den-en t +44 (0)24 7669 6986 f 7669 6538 e [email protected] chofu, Setagaya-ku, Tokyo, Japan e [email protected] w www.sdsindia.org t +81 3 3721 8699 f 3721-8699 w www.ruralnet.org.uk/ Contact: Vinay D. Lall, Director. e [email protected] Provides support for grass-roots Research, training and consultancy Contact: Yasuyoshi Hayashi. rural development organisations. institution. Useful regional contact Experienced practitioners. See also InfoRurale point.

216 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH Pages 203-217 10/7/06 14:27 Page 217

CONTACTS Y

Tenants Participatory Advisory Urban Design Alliance Wikima Service w www.towns.org.uk/ppo/udal 23 Leamington Road Villas, London Brunswick House, Broad Street, Inter-professional campaign group W11 1HS, UK Salford M6 5BZ, UK promoting urban design. t/f +44 (0)20 7229 7320 t +44 (0)161 745 7903 f 745 9259 e [email protected] Urban Design Group e [email protected] Contact: Romy Shovelton. 70 Cowcross Street, London EC1M w www.tpas.org.uk Information and consultancy on 6EJ, UK Provides information, advice, open space technology. Useful t +44 (0)20 7250 0872 f 7250 0892 training, consultancy, seminars and publications and videos. e [email protected] conferences on involving tenants in w www.udg.org.uk Wilkinson Hindle Hallsall Lloyd their housing management. Contact: Rob Cowan. 98-100 Duke Street, Liverpool L1 Tirana Polytechnical University National voluntary organisation that 5AG, UK Faculty of Engineering, Architecture helps set urban design agenda. Its t +44 (0)151 708 8944 f 709 1737 Dept., Rruga Udhamed Gvolle, Public Participation Programme Architecture practice with expertise shavsha No. 54, Tirana, Albania promotes good practice through in housing cooperatives, choice t +355 42 332 52 research and publications. Register catalogues and design meetings. Contact: Nardiola Hoxa of experienced professionals and Wordsearch Useful regional contact point. good practice guidance on web site. 5 Old Street, London EC1 9HL, UK Tokyo La-Npo Urban Villages Forum t +44 (0)171 549 5400 f 336 8660 1-6, Akazuthumi 4 Chome, 19-22 Charlotte Road, Shoreditch, e [email protected] Setagayaku, Tokyo 156, Japan London EC2A, UK w www.wordsearch.co.uk t +81 (0)3 3324 4440 f 3324 3444 t +44 (0)20 7916 7380 f 7916 7381 Contact: Lee Mallett. e [email protected] e [email protected] Communications consultancy with Contact: Misako Arai. w www.princes-foundation.org expertise in public participation in Supports local community planning Contact: David Warburton. urban design. activity in Japan. Campaigning organisation Yale Urban Design Workshop promoting urban villages; the Town & Country Planning Center for Urban Design Research, planning and development of Association Box 208242, New Haven, integrated, sustainable communities. 17 Carlton House Terrace, London Connecticut 06520, USA Provide support for action planning SW1Y 5AS, UK t +1 203-432-2288 f 432 7175 events. Maintains list of experienced t +44 (0)20 7930 8903 e [email protected] professionals. Useful publications. e [email protected] w www.architecture.yale.edu/re/ w www.tcpa.org.uk URBED udw/FrontDoor/ Campaign group for reforming the 19 Store Street, London WC1E Contacts: Alan Plattus, Michael planning system. Useful publications. 7DH, UK Haverland. t +44 (0)20 7436 8050 f 7436 8083 Well established urban design United Nations Centre for e [email protected] studio at Yale University working Human Settlements (Habitat) w www.urbed.co.uk with surrounding local communities. Pob 30030, Nairobi, Kenya Contact: Nicholas Falk. t +254 2 624 231 f 624 265/66 Urban regeneration consultants e [email protected] with long experience of community w www.unchs.org planning. Expertise in round table Contact: Selman Erguden workshops. Focal point for social development. Vista Consulting United Nations Development 16 Old Birmingham Road, Lickey Programme, Turkey End, Broomsgrove B60 1DE, UK Zeki Pasa, Apt 12-6, Macka t +44 (0)1527 837930 f 837940 Caddesi, MackA, Istanbul, Turkey e [email protected] t +90 212 248 3612 f 296 1951 Contact: Ann Brooks Contact: Uner Kirdar (Secretary for Information and consultancy on UN Habitat 2 conference, 1996). critical mass events such as real Useful regional contact point. time strategic change.

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 217 CPH pages 218-232 10/7/06 19:33 Page 218

Credits and thanks

This handbook is the product of three related Many people have helped with the work. Special initiatives: thanks are due to all those who sent in material, participated in editing workshops, provided Tools for Community Design Programme inspiration or commented on drafts. They include: Supported by The Prince’s Foundation (and formerly The Prince of Wales’s Institute of Jon Aldenton Ripin Kalra Architecture), this initiative promotes good Anthea Atha Joan Kean practice through the production of high quality, Debbie Bartlett Sonia Khan universally applicable, how-to-do-it information Stephen Batey Sally King using participatory editing techniques. Roger Bellers Charles Knevitt Dianah Bennett Anne Kramer Urban Design Group Public Participation John Billingham Alison Lammas Programme (UDGPPP) Jeff Bishop Birgit Laue Funded by the Department of the Environment, Peter Blake Akan Leander Transport and the Regions (DETR) for England, Jeremy Brook David Lewis this action research programme assisted and Charles Campion Julie Lewis evaluated 12 public participation events and 10 Jeremy Caulton Arnold Linden seminars in England during 1996 and 1997 to June Cannon Melanie Louise establish good practice principles. Emma Collier David Lunts Action Planning in Developing Countries Tony Costello Caroline Lwin Research Project Robert Cowan Frances MacDermott Funded by the UK’s Department for International Simon Croxton Lee Mallett Development (DFID), this project examined Robin Deane Tony Meadows practice in countries in many parts of the world James Derounian Frances MacDermott during 1998 and 1999 to establish methods most Stephanie Donaldson Jo McCaren appropriate for developing countries. Roger Evans Nim Moorthy Yanaka Gakko Babar Mumtaz Flora Gathorne-Hardy Michael Mutter The book has beneﬁted from close collaboration Joanna Gent Mary Myers with other related initiatives. These include: Christine Goldschmidt Jenneth Parker Suzanne Gorman Michael Parkes Community-based Disaster Mitigation Andrew Goldring Geoffrey Payne A research project funded by the European Peter Greenhalf Alan Plattus Community and based at London’s South Bank Virginia Grifﬁn Jules Pretty University. Felicity Gu Richard Pullen Tools for Community Regeneration Susan Guy Debbie Radcliffe A project to develop a database of community Rod Hackney Renate Ruether-Greaves regeneration based at Hastings Trust, UK. Nick Hall Peter Richards Nabeel Hamdi Alex Rook Brian Hanson Jon Rowland An advisory group of individuals from the above Lorraine Hart David Sanderson initiatives – listed on the imprint page – has been Yasuyoshi Hayashi Henry Sanoff particularly helpful in guiding the book’s Michael Hebbert Yoshimitsu Shiozaki evolution. Mandy Heslop Romy Shovelton David Hughes Jack Sidener Paul Jenkins Jonathan Sinclair Wilson Richard John Miriam Solly Sam Jones-Hill Steve Smith

218 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 218-232 10/7/06 19:33 Page 219

Ian Taylor Diane Warburton Book evolution Ros Tennyson Colin Ward Simon Thomas Margaret Wilkinson The production of this book has been guided by John Thompson Mae Wates the belief that participatory editing and testing of Stephen Thwaites Max Wates good practice guidance is one of the most Catherine Tranmer Dick Watson effective ways of achieving widespread Susie Turnbull Nicholas Wilkinson improvement of practice and knowledge transfer. John F C Turner Adele Wilter John Twigg Julie Witham The process adopted has been as follows: Pat Wakely John Worthington 1 Title and format Perry Walker Charles Zucker Overall concept established by the author, designer and supporting organisations. 2 Publicity Organisations which have provided assistance Call for information leaﬂet distributed widely. include: 3 Pilot projects, seminars and research Architecture Foundation Monitoring and evaluation of pilot projects, Ball State University participation in seminars and workshops, Building Design desk research. Centre for Community Visions 4 Sample material published Centre for Disaster Preparedness Ten methods and four scenarios published in Countryside Commission Urban Design Quarterly, July 1998. Over CLAWS 2 1,000 copies distributed. Also available on Chinese University of Hong Kong Urban Design Group web site. Edinburgh World Heritage Trust 5 Editing workshops Free Form Arts Trust Held at the South Bank University in London, Hackney Building Exploratory November 1998, and in the Philippines, Hertfordshire County Council January 1999. Neighbourhood Initiatives Foundation 6 Consultation draft Planning Aid UK Circulated to over 60 practitioners. Over 35 RUDI responses received. Roger Evans Associates 7 Final draft Scottish Participatory Initiatives Circulated to main supporting organisations Shoevegas and advisors.

Feedback received at each stage has been invaluable in developing the book, although the Apologies for any omissions. editor takes full responsibility for all views expressed.

It is planned to continue the process with further editions, translations and adaptations tailored to speciﬁc local contexts.

See www.communityplanning.net

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 219 CPH pages 218-232 10/7/06 19:33 Page 220

Photocredits

Location, date, and 55 Sri Lanka, 92, John Thompson. South Wales Planning Aid. photographer or source of Kiambu, Tamil Nadu, India, 91, 99 Oxpens Quarter, Oxford, UK, 97. Irene Guijt. Burkina Faso, Africa, 101 Queens Park, Bedford,UK, 95, photos and illustrations. 92, Jules Pretty. unknown. London, UK, 97. Many thanks to all those 56 Hastings, 99, Greenhalf Photography. 102 Duke Street, Liverpool, UK. 97. who have allowed their 57 Shoreditch, London, 98, ShoeVegas. Ore Valley, Hastings, UK, 97. 58 Birmingham, UK, 94. 106 Ore Valley, Hastings, UK, 97. material to be used. 59 Kingswood, UK, 96, Roger Evans 107 East Street, Farnham, UK, 96. Associates. 108 Mount Wise, Plymouth, UK (map). Photos not credited are by Nick Wates. 61 New Town, Edinburgh, 96, Pittsburgh, USA, 88, John Thompson Edinburgh World Heritage Trust. & Partners. Poundbury, UK, 89. Cover: Yellamanchilli, Adrapradesh, India, Hastings, UK, 90. Panay Island, Philippines, 95. 96, Nick Hall; Berlin, John Thompson 64 Yellamanchilli, Adrapradesh, India, 109 Calvay Coop, Glasgow, 85. & Partners, 96; Hong Kong, 98, 96, Nick Hall. Yellamanchilli, 96, Wakefield, UK, 97. Jack Sidener; Hackney Building Roger Bellers. Igbalangao, Panay 110-1 Mount Wise, Plymouth, UK, 99. Exploratory, London, UK, 99. Island, Philippines, 95, Nick Hall. 115 Muncie Design Studio, Ball State ii Duke Street, Liverpool, UK, 97. Yellamanchilli, 96, Nick Hall. University, USA, 97, Tony Costello. 12 Wakefield, UK, 97. 66-7 Reproduced from Future Search. 117 Igbalangao, Panay Island, 14 Woodberry Down, London, UK, 97. 68 Tower Hamlets, London, UK, 99, Philippines, 95, Nick Hall. 15 Liverpool, UK, 97. Architecture Foundation. 119 Bath, UK, 97. 16 Punjab, Pakistan, 92, Jules Pretty. 69 Ball State University, Indiana, USA, 120-1 Farnham, UK, 97. Hastings, UK, 97. 95, Tony Costelllo. 123 El Cerrito, California, USA, 98. 17 Honduras, 94, Jules Pretty. 71 George Street, Hastings, UK, 89. Richard Ivey. Viterbo, Italy, 94. Runcorn, UK, 79, CDS Liverpool. 72-3 East Street, Farnham, UK, 97 (4). Richard Ivey (2). 19 Pruitt Igoe, USA. Bath, UK, 97. 124-5 Yale University, USA, 96. 20 Sri Lanka, 92, Jules Pretty. Wenceslas 75 Kent, UK, 97, Debbie Bartlett. 126 Shoreham, UK, 97. Lightmoor, UK, Square, Prague, Czech Republic, 76 Igbalangao, Panay Island, 90, Tony Gibson, NIF. 96, John Thompson & Partners. Philippines, 95, Nick Hall. 128 Building Design 9.4.98 (3 + 21 Trans Nzoia, Kenya, 93, John 77 Easton, Bristol, UK, 93, Vizability drawing). Hammersmith, London, Thompson. Hastings, UK, 90. Arts. West Bengal, India, 90, 98, Architecture Foundation. 22 Hong Kong, 98, Jack Sidener. Robert Chambers. 130 Yunnan, China, 97, Jules Pretty. 25 Prague, Czech Republic, 96, John 78 Bangaladesh, 94, Nabeel Hamdi. 132 Lostwithiel, Cornwall, UK, 85, CAG Thompson & Partners. 80 London, 70s, Town & Country 134 Krakow, Poland, 96. 26 Hastings, UK, 90. Planning Association. 136 Kobe, Japan, 95. 28-9 Hackney Building Exploratory, 81 Ball State University, Indiana, USA, 138 North Shields, UK, 87, Freeform. London, UK, 99. 85, S.Talley. 140 Hesketh Street, Liverpool, UK, 84, 30 Town Quay, Barking, UK, 98, Free 82 The Prince of Wales’s Institute of Architects’ Journal. Form Arts Trust. Architecture, London, UK, 97. 142 Wakefield, UK, 97. 31 Caldmore Green, Walsall, UK, 98, 83 Oxpens Initiative, Oxford, UK, 97, 144 Children’s drawing, Nishikawa Free Form Arts Trust. Roger Evans Associates. Tetsuya, Tokyo, Japan, 98. 33 Leeds Evening Post, 9.8.94 The Birmingham, UK, 94. Stockport, 146 Mount Wise, Plymouth, UK 97. Times, 23.8.94 & 29.12.94. West UK, 88, Community Technical Aid 148 Model of Krakow, Poland, 96. Cumbrian News & Star, 15.11.94. Centre Manchester. Forge Project, 150 Shoreham, UK, 98. 34 Blairs College, Aberdeen, UK, 94, Cinderford, UK, 93. 152 Remaking Cities, Pittsburgh, USA, 98. John Thompson & Partners. Holy 84 Hackney, London, UK, 82, Hunt 154 Unknown, John F C Turner. Trinity Brompton, London, UK, 97 Thompson Associates. MUDStudio, 156 Farnham, UK, 97. (2). Wornington Green, London, Ball State University, Indiana, USA, 158 Krakow, Poland, 96. UK, 89, John Thompson & Partners. 94, Anthony Costello (2). 160 Crowhurst, UK, Peter Smith, 35 Sidon, Lebanon, 97, John Thompson 85 Lea View, Hackney, London, UK, Picturemaps, Hastings. & Partners. Liverpool, UK, 97. 82, Hunt Thompson Associates. 162 Hitchen Vision, Hertfordshire 37 West Cork, Ireland, 87 (6). St Leonards-on-sea, UK, 90. County Council, UK, 96. 39 Setagaya Community Design 86 Madison Courier, USA, 86. 164 Sidon, Lebanon, 97, John Centre, Tokyo, Japan, 95. 87 The Daily Clintonian, USA, 81. Thompson & Partners. 41 Richmond Virginia, USA, 96. 88-9 East Street, Farnham, UK, 97. 173 Drawings by Jack Sidener. 42 Fiji, 95, Jules Pretty. 91 The Prince of Wales’s Institute of 175 Drawing by Tony Costello, 98. 44 Duke Street, Liverpool, 97. Architecture, London, UK, 97. 177 Drawing by Tony Costello, 98. 47 Hong Kong, 98, Jack Sidener. 94 Hastings, UK, 99, Greenhalf 180 Drawing by Tony Costello, 98. 48-9 London, UK, Alexandra Rook, Photography. 222 Planning Aid Conference, South CLAWS (2). Tokyo, 98, Henry Sanoff. 95 Igbalangao, Panay Island, Bank University, London, UK, 98. 50-1 Brixton, London, UK, 93. Duke Philippines, 95, Nick Hall. Kent, UK, 224 John Thompson & Partners Street, Liverpool, UK, 97 (2). 96, Debbie Bartlett. 230 Greenhalf Photography, 99. 54 Kiambu, Kenya, 93, Jules Pretty. Anon. 96 Leaflets: Planning Aid for London,

220 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 218-232 10/7/06 19:33 Page 221

Feedback on this book

Further editions of this handbook are planned as well Dear Editor, as translations and adaptations. So feedback would be most useful and welcome. Your handbook Ways you can help is great. But in the ᔡ Comments next edition, Send any comments on the book, good or bad. Quotes please include: suitable for publicity especially welcome!

ᔡ Changes 1. A page on the Send speciﬁc amendments, preferably marked up in ...... coloured ink on the book or photocopies of pages. method (info ᔡ Additions enclosed). Send details of material that should be covered: extra principles, methods, scenarios, glossary items, books, 2. Scenario for ﬁlms, contacts etc. It would help greatly if these could be ...... in the same format as the book. based on our ᔡ Illustrations. project here Good photos or drawings are always welcome (be sure to (details enclosed). specify clearly if you want them back).

ᔡ Hold an editing workshop. 3. A really good Organise an editing workshop and send in the results. See video called next page for a sample format...... ᔡ Help with a translation or adaptation. (also enclosed) Translators, editors, local publishers needed. Why not use the framework and incorporate your own photos and local examples. Let me know when it comes out. Please complete the form on page 223, complete the online forms on www.communityplanning.net or make contact in any way convenient: post, email, fax or telephone. yours ever

All communication to: PS. Check out Handbook Editor, Community Planning Publications, c/o Nick Wates Associates, 7 Tackleway, Hastings TN34 3DE, UK. www...... Tel: +44 (0)1424 447888 Fax: +44 (0)1424 441514 if you haven’t Email: [email protected] already. Some Check the Community Planning Website for the latest useful info there. information: www.communityplanning.net

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 221 CPH pages 218-232 10/7/06 19:33 Page 222

Editing workshop format

For helping make improvements to this handbook. Also useful for stimulating debate on community planning generally. Can be run as independent sessions or as part of a conference or other programme. Participants should ideally have had time to look through the book beforehand but this is not essential.

1 Setting up Display some or all of the pages on a wall, preferably blown up to A3 size on a photocopier. Arrange in sections – ‘Principles’, ‘Methods’, ‘Scenarios’ etc – with large headings above. Insert blank pages in each section with headings ‘Other principles’, ‘Other methods’, etc. Have a supply of coloured felt tips. (2 hours)

2 Introduction Welcome participants. Explain purpose of event and structure of book display. (10 mins)

3 Participatory editing Participants examine the display individually or in small groups and write comments directly on the pages or blank sheets. Informal discussion encouraged. (20 - 60 mins depending on whether people have looked through the book beforehand)

4 General discussion On implications for local activity, initiatives Editing workshop needed etc. (20-40 mins) Blown up photocopies of book pages pinned on the wall allow people to write in comments and 5 Send in results amendments. Blank sheets stimulate people to Mail or fax originals or copies of sheets think about additional material that could be plus any notes of the discussion to: included in the next edition. Handbook Editor, Community Planning Publications, c/o Nick Wates Associates 7 Tackleway, Hastings TN34 3DE, UK Exhibition material Fax: +44 (0)1424 441514 Display pages of The Community Planning Email: [email protected] Handbook are available from Community Planning Publications, in colour or black and Running time: 60–100mins white, and at various sizes. Ideal numbers: 5–20

222 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 218-232 10/7/06 19:33 Page 223

Feedback Form

Please complete and return the form below if you want to be notiﬁed of future editions or can offer any help or advice. Feel free to use additional sheets, enclose material or communicate in a different way altogether.

Name Organisation (if any) Contact details (address, tel, fax, email, web)

Comments on this edition (good and bad)

Suggestions for a revised edition (suggestions adopted will be acknowledged)

I/we can supply information/photos/drawings covering the following methods/case studies/ publications/ﬁlms etc. (all material used will be acknowledged)

Please let me/us know when the revised English language edition is available អ yes អ no I/we would be interested to have translations or adaptations in the following languages

I/we could help with work on translations or adaptations អ yes អ no I am happy for you to pass my details on to other community planning networks អ yes អ no Date

Return to: Handbook Editor, Community Planning Publications c/o Nick Wates Associates, 7 Tackleway, Hastings TN34 3DE, UK Fax: +44 (0)1424 441514 Email: [email protected] 

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 223 CPH pages 218-232 10/7/06 19:33 Page 224 CPH pages 218-232 10/7/06 19:33 Page 225

Index Figures in bold type indicate main entries; Brown, Robert 48 terms also entered in the glossary are marked by budgets 19 an asterisk *.

Note that only some of the Glossary items are Caldmore-Palfrey Youth Forum 30 indexed and that the Publications and Contacts calendar 55 sections are not indexed. You may find what you Cantell, Timothy 118 are looking for in these sections. capacity and vulnerability analysis 112 * cardboard cut-outs 100–1 Carlisle City Council 42 Cartmel Village Design Group 74 academic resources character assessment 75 industrial heritage reuse 142–3 Charles, Prince of Wales 32 task force 122–3 charrette 46 * urban design studios 124–5 charts 54–5 * acting see role play; simulation checklists action group 127, 181 * equipment and supplies 172–3 action planning event 24–5, 143, 145, 181 * hazards 112 planner format 168–9 neighbourhood skills survey 175 review session 110–11 people and organisations 174 activity map 77 * policy initiatives 176–9 activity week 26–7, 159 * Chinon, Mayor of 122 Advanta Corporation 66 choice catalogues 36–7, 140–1 * Agenda 21 162 Clancy, J B 124 agendas, different 12 commitment 12, 15 Allthorpe-Guyton, Marjorie 28 community action planning see microplanning Alter, Dennis 66 community association 127 American Institute of Architects 102 community centre 60–1, 132–3 architects community design centre 38–9, 155 * community design centre 38–9 community enterprise awards 32–3 housing development 140–1 Community Links, London 32 neighbourhood planning office 84–5 community planning new settlement 148–9 benefits 4–5 architecture centre 28–9, 148–9, 159 * methods 2–3, 17 art map 77 policy initiatives 176–9 art projects, environmental 138–9 principles 11–21 art workshops 30–1, 135, 139, 145 * starting up 6–7, 15, 17 Arts Council of England 28 community planning forum 40–1, 133, 161 attitudes 14 community profiling 42–3, 133, 155, 161 * award scheme 32–3, 153, 159 * community technical aid centres 38–9 * competitions award scheme 32–3, 153, 159 * Ball State University 86 ideas 70–1, 134–5, 153 * Bath Preservation Trust 118 computer-generated maps 56–7 board games 68–9 conservation brainstorming 34–5 * historic buildings 158–9 briefing workshop 34–5, 103, 140–1 * industrial buildings 142–3 Bristol Architecture Centre 28 conservation centre 28

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 225 CPH pages 218-232 10/7/06 19:33 Page 226

INDEX

consultants 16, 96–7, 150–1, 162–3 feasibility fund 62–3, 133, 153 * Costello, Professor Anthony 86 fence method 105 * countryside design summary 74, 160–1 * field workshop 64–5, 155 * cultural context 18 Finlay, Ian 62 customising housing 36, 82, 140–1 fixtures and fittings catalogues 36–7 Dauge, Yves 122 flexibility 14 decision-making 4, 104–5 flip charts 72–3 democratisation 4 flooding see disaster management; hazard analysis derelict site reuse 134–5 flow diagram 55 design assistance team 44–5 * follow-up 14 design centres, community 38–9, 155 forum 126–7 * design charrette 46 * community planning 40–1 design choice catalogues 36–7 Freitas, Roger de 114 design fest 46–7 * 'friends' group 127 design games 48–9, 144–5 * fun 15 design statement 74–5 funds design studio, mobile 80–1 feasibility 62–3, 133, 153 design workshop 50–1, 99 * public 178 see also briefing workshop raising 4, 7 Designing Hong Kong 46 future search conference 66–7, 162–3 * development briefs 176 Future Search network 66 development partnerships 135, 142–3 * development trust 52–3, 127, 147, 159 * diagramming 21, 43, 54–5 * gaming 48–9, 68–9 disaster management 64–5, 136–7 * gender workshops 43 see also hazard analysis 'go for it' 15 documentation 18 goals 13 Dotson, Laura 40 good practice guidance 178 grants 62–3, 133, 153 graphics 20, 21, 43, 54–5 earthquakes see disaster management; hazard groups see user groups analysis electronic maps 29, 56–7 elevation montage 58–9 * Hackney, Rod 38 empowerment 4 * Hackney Building Exploratory 28 enablers, professional 178, 180 Hammersmith Society 114 environment shop 60–1, 84, 159 * hazard analysis 112–13, 136–7 * environment week 26 * hazard checklist 112 environmental art project 138–9 hazard map 77 environmental education 176 * heritage, industrial 142–3 equipment checklist 172–3 heritage centre 28 * evaluation form 171 historic buildings 142–3, 158–9 events 24–5 honesty 13, 20 exhibitions house image game 37 architecture centres 28–9 house models 83 design fest 46–7 household livelihood analysis 43 experts 20, 78 housing co-operative 127 * see also consultants; professionals housing designs, catalogues 36–7 housing development 140–1

facilitator 20, 34–5, 42, 78 *

226 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 218-232 10/7/06 19:33 Page 227

INDEX

ideas competition 70–1, 134–5, 153 * media 14, 26, 86–7, 149 industrial accidents see disaster management; mental mapping 77 * hazard analysis methods 17 industrial heritage reuse 142–3 microplanning workshop 78–9 * information mind map 54–5, 67 * centres 176 mobile unit 80–1 * sources 16, 19 models 50–1, 82–3, 141 * systems 177 architecture centre 28–9 inner city regeneration 144–5 planning for real 100–1 interactive display 72–3, 118–19 * momentum 16 see also open house event money 19 involvement, all parties 15–16 mosaic making 31

Janoff, Sandra 66 name badges 13 jargon 13, 178 Neighbourhood Initiatives Foundation 100 Jefferson, Pat 42 neighbourhood models 83 judging rules/criteria 32–3, 70–1 neighbourhood planning ofﬁce 84–5, 144–5, 147 neighbourhood skills survey 175 * neighbourhood tours 108–9 knowledge sources 16, 19 network diagram 55 newspaper supplement 86–7, 149 * newspapers 14, 26 ladder of participation 10 Nre, Celeste 62 land ownership information 178 land-use planning 48–9 language 13, 180 open house event 88–9, 135, 149, 157 * law of two feet 90 see also interactive display; table scheme display layouts, design games 48–9 open space workshop 90–1, 147 * leaﬂets 40 * option cards 100–1 limitations, of community planning activities 12 Ore Valley Action Planning Weekend 44 local character 74–5, 142–3, 160–1 * organisation charts 39, 53, 55 local context 17 organisations checklist 174 local design statement 74–5, 161 * outsiders 21 * local employment 13, 178 Oxpens Quarter Initiative, Oxford 98 local knowledge 19 local neighbourhood initiative 146–7 local skills 13, 20, 175 pace of progress 14 location, working on 21 parish mapping 77, 160–1 * Lubetkin, Sasha 28 parks 49, 134–5 participation culture 178 participation matrix 11 management committee 127 * participation process 18 management structures 52–3 involving all parties 15–16 mapping 76–7 * numbers involved 18 hazard and risk 113 people and organisations checklist 174 maps see also process planning session architecture centre 28–9 participatory editing 74–5, 92–3, 151 * electronic 29, 56–7 partnerships 14 * and photo surveys 95 patrons 32–3 * matrix diagram 55 * pavement mosaics 31

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 227 CPH pages 218-232 10/7/06 19:33 Page 228

INDEX

pavement signs 88 local neighbourhood 146–7 people, checklist 174 regeneration infrastructure 152–3 personal initiative 17 reports 92–3 photo survey 75, 94–5 * research 180 photomontage 58–9 residents' association 127 Piacentini, Lorenzo 122 review sessions 110–11 picture analysis 69 evaluation form 171 pie chart 55 progress monitor 170 planning aid scheme 96–7, 152–3 * risk assessment 112–13, 136–7, 155 planning applications 179 simulation 116–17 planning day 98–9, 150–1, 157 * roadshow 114–15 * planning decisions 180 see also video soapbox planning for real 100–1 * Robinson, David 32 planning ofﬁces, neighbourhood 84–5 role play 43, 68–9 * planning procedures review 178 see also simulation planning study 150–1 room layout planning weekend 102–3, 147 choice catalogues 37 Plattus, Alan 124 models 83 post-it notes 73 * Royal Institute of British Architects 62 posters, design fest 46 rules and boundaries 12, 19 preparation 17 prioritising 100–1, 104–5, 136–7 * priority cards 100–1 Saleem, Waheed 30 problem tree 43 * scale of projects 15 process planning session 106–7, 147, 151, 157 * settlement professionals 18 new development 148–9 community design centre 38–9 strategy for whole 162–3 design assistance team 44–5 upgrading 154–5 as enablers 18, 178, 180 shanty settlement upgrading 154–5 fees 179 shared control 19 location 179 shop, environment 60–1, 158–9 neighbourhood planning ofﬁce 84–5 see also street stall planning aid scheme 96–7 Sidener, Professor Jack 50 registers 179 simulation 43, 116–17 * volunteers 96–7 skills survey 13, 20, 175 * progress monitoring 16, 170 soapbox, video 128–9 project group 127, 133 speed of progress 14 public participation process 106–7 sponsors, award schemes 32–3 publicity 14 * statutory procedures review 180 activity week 26–7 * steering group 127, 147, 157 * newspapers 14, 26, 86–7, 149 sticky dots roadshow 114–15 * judging competitions 71 video soapbox 128–9 * voting 120–1 storms see disaster management story-telling 69 * reconnaissance trip 43, 103, 108–9, 149 * strategy 6–7 records 18 planner format 166 regeneration street lights 30 historic buildings 158–9 street models 83 industrial buildings 142–3 inner city 144–5

228 THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK CPH pages 218-232 10/7/06 19:33 Page 229

INDEX

street stall 72, 118–19 * Wachowiak, Joanna 122 students walks, reconnaissance 108–9 task force 122–3 Wandsworth Black Elderly Project 62 urban design studio 124–5 Waverley Borough Council 88 suggestion cards 100 wealth ranking 43 * supplies checklist 172–3 Weisbord, Marvin 66 sustainable community 5 * well-being ranking 43 * wheel of fortune 105 * Wilcox, David 52 table scheme display 88–9, 120–1 * working party 127 * talent see skills workshop Tan, Ning 94 art 30–1 * task force 122–3, 149 * brieﬁng 34–5 * technical aid centres 38–9, 159, 180 design 50–1 * telephone boxes (video soapbox) 128–9 design fest 46–7 * threat ranking 113 ﬁeld 64–5, 155 * time-line 55, 66 * groups 40–1 * timetables 55 microplanning 78–9, 155 * tour of neighbourhood 108–9 open space 90–1 * town centre upgrade 156–7 planner formats 167, 170 training 20 reports 93 see also good practice guidance transect walk 43, 109 * transparency 13 Yale Design Workshop 124 trust 20 *

Ullman, Janet 28 universities see academic resources Unsworth, David 74 urban conservation 158–9 urban design studio 124–5, 134–5 * urban task force 122–3 urban studies centre 28 urban village 144–5 * user groups 126–7 *

Venn diagram 54–5 victims see disaster management video soapbox 128–9 * village design statements 74–5 * village revival 160–1 visions 13 visual information 20, 21 see also diagramming; maps; photo survey voluntary sector empowerment 181 voting 120–1 vulnerability and capacity analysis 113 *

THE COMMUNITY PLANNING HANDBOOK 229 CPH pages 218-232 10/7/06 19:33 Page 230

Nick Wates is a writer, Jeremy Brook is a graphic researcher and project designer specialising in consultant specialising in exhibition catalogues and community planning and posters for museums and art design. galleries. Previous books include The He studied at the Royal College Battle for Tolmers Square of Art and has taught part-time (Routledge, 1976), Squatting, at the London College of the real story (Bay Leaf Books, Printing, Ravensbourne College 1980), Community Architecture; of Design and Eastbourne and (with Charles Knevitt, Penguin, Hastings Colleges of Arts and 1987) and Action Planning (The Technology. Prince of Wales’s Institute of Architecture, 1996). Regular clients include the De La Warr Pavilion, Bexhill; He has also written extensively Hastings Museum and Art for the architectural press, Gallery; South East Arts; Surrey directed local regeneration Institute of Art and Design; projects and taken part in local Towner Art Gallery, Eastbourne planning sagas in the areas and Rye Art Gallery. where he has lived. Previous books include Erich In the past few years he has Mendelsohn 1887-1953 been Project Manager of the (A3 Times, 1987) and Hans Urban Design Group’s Public Scharoun: the alternative Participation Programme and a tradition (A3 Times, 1995). Senior Research Associate at The Prince of Wales’s Institute He also lives in Hastings. of Architecture. www.graphicideas.co.uk He lives on the south coast of England in Hastings. www.nickwates.co.uk

230 CPH pages 218-232 10/7/06 19:33 Page 231

We’ve had workshop days that would amaze, we’ve been well facilitated – a constant drain on the polished brain, and hell for the addle-pated!

We’ve drunk pints of tea and tried to agree amid multi-voiced confusion – so the hours we’ve spent circled in our tent could arrive at some solution.

We’ve spent serious time on Housing, Crime, Image and Education – We’ve met people who have helped us through with fact, and imagination.

So a big ‘thank you’ for all your views on the way our future lies – When our Action Plan ends we’ve made good friends And sorted out Mount Wise.

Thea Bruten poet and local resident Mount Wise Plymouth UK 1998 CPH pages 218-232 10/7/06 19:33 Page 232

More Development Titles from Earthscan

PARTICIPATORY WORKSHOPS A Sourcebook of 21 Sets of Ideas and Activities Robert Chambers

‘A ﬁrst-rate and highly entertaining sourcebook of 21 sets of ideas and activities for participatory workshops that is essential reading for anyone arranging and teaching events… highly recommended’ THE SCIENTIFIC MEDICAL NETWORK

Making participation work requires workshops, training and learning that are themselves participatory.This sourcebook makes easily accessible the author’s experience in the ﬁeld in the form of 21 sets of ideas, activities and tips, both serious and fun.

ISBN: 1853838632 | May 2002 | £8.99

ENACTING PARTICIPATORY DEVELOPMENT Theatre-based Techniques Julie McCarthy

Theatre can play a signiﬁcant role in addressing issues of power in social, political and cultural relationships and acting as a catalyst for personal and societal change. Enacting Participation advocates the use of theatre in participatory development as a way for groups to discover their own goals and aspirations and to develop strategies for improving their lives based on need and experience.

ISBN: 1844071111 | November 2004 | £16.99

IDEAS FOR DEVELOPMENT Robert Chambers

With much of our world dominated by increasing extremes of power, inequality and injustice, and with a litany of development problems that includes conﬂict and insecurity, debt, corporate irresponsibility, unfair trade and climate change, it is tempting to be a pessimist. In Ideas for Development, Robert Chambers, one of the critical optimists of international development, points to the scope that all development actors have to ﬁnd good things to do.

ISBN: 1844070883 | June 2005 | £8.99

For more information and to order with 10% discount, visit www.earthscan.co.uk